JP2023184640A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably performing management of a game machine.SOLUTION: An MPU 62 includes not only a main-side CPU 63 but also a management IC 66. The main-side CPU 63 is electrically connected to the management IC 66, and a detection result of each ball entry detection sensor is transmitted from the main-side CPU 63 to the management IC 66. In this case, the detection result of each ball entry detection sensor is transmitted to the management IC 66 through each corresponding signal path, and a corresponding relationship between each ball entry detection sensor and the signal path is supplied from the main-side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when starting to supply operating power. The management IC 66 stores information on the detection result of each ball entry detection sensor in a history memory 117 as history information. A management-side CPU 112 calculates each kind of parameter by utilizing history information of the history memory 117 in occurrence of an operation opportunity. The history information and each kind of parameter are outputted to the outside through a reading terminal 102.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 13

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

JP2009-261415A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be suitably managed.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 provides a program output means for outputting a control program to a device external to the gaming machine using an information output section;
information output means for outputting special information using the information output section;
It is characterized by having the following.

According to the present invention, it is possible to appropriately manage gaming machines.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the structure of a game board. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition regarding discharge of the game ball which flowed down the game area. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning/losing lottery and the like. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which the detection result of the ball entry detection sensor is input to the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a payout control device and various devices that communicate with the payout control device. It is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the payout side CPU. FIG. 2 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a management IC. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a correspondence memory. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the recognition process performed by main side CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by a management CPU. (a) to (d) are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory; 3 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how history information is stored in the history memory. 3 is a flowchart showing data output processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by a management CPU. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F in a second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the recognition process performed by main side CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by a management CPU. 5A to 5H are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers and signal types is stored in the correspondence memory; FIG. 7 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a management IC in a third embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F. 3 is a flowchart showing a power outage information storage process executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a power outage response process executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by a management CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing a power outage response process executed by a management CPU in the fourth embodiment. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the trigger identification process performed by the main side CPU in 5th Embodiment, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process performed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the trigger identification process performed by the main side CPU in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing performed by the management side CPU in 7th Embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU in the eighth embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of memory for history in a 9th embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU. FIG. 7 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of an MPU of a main control device in a tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 7 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a main control device in an eleventh embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory. 3 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing parameter management processing executed by the main CPU. It is a block diagram for explaining the structure of the signal path which transmits the detection result of each ball entry detection sensor to the main side CPU and management IC in a 12th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a main control device and a sound emission control device in a thirteenth embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control process performed by sound-light side CPU. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing executed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows special call start processing performed by main side CPU. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal counter area, an opening/closing execution mode counter area, and a high-frequency support mode counter area provided in the main side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal ball entry detection process performed by main side CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a check process executed by the main CPU. (a) It is a front view of the special figure display part, (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the special figure display part, (b) It is a front view of the ordinary figure display part, (B) It is a front view of the ordinary figure display part FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of a diagram display section. 3 is a flowchart showing check waiting processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a check result display process executed by the main CPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how the check waiting period and the check result display period progress. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main CPU. (a) to (j) are diagrams each showing symbols variably displayed on a symbol display device. (a), (b) It is a figure showing the display surface of a pattern display device. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device during the check waiting period or the check result display period. 12 is a flowchart showing a check process executed by the main CPU in the fourteenth embodiment. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a check result display process executed by the main CPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how the check waiting period and the check result display period progress. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the input port provided in MPU of the sound emission control device in a 15th embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the correspondence area provided in the sound-light side ROM. 3 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control process performed by sound-light side CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining a normal counter area, an opening/closing execution mode counter area, and a high frequency support mode counter area provided in the sound-light side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows history setting processing performed by sound-light side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a check performed by audio-light side CPU. It is a front view of the main control device in a 16th embodiment. 78 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 78. It is a front view of the slot machine in a 17th embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is a front view of a display window part. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between a combination of symbols that result in a prize and a benefit that is given when a prize is won. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a slot machine. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process performed by main side MPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal modes. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop order of the reels and the winning pattern that is established when the normal mode lottery table is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT modes. It is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the stop order of the reels and the winning pattern that is established when the first RT mode lottery table is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT mode. It is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning pattern when the second RT mode lottery table is selected. It is a flowchart showing the corresponding processing when the game ends, which is executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating migration chance management processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing ART state processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the game management process performed by main side MPU. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents of an image display device. 3 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lighting process performed by main side MPU. (a), (b) are time charts showing the relationship between the opening angle of the front door and the control state of the lighting device. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the lighting device when the front door is in an open state and the opening angle is below a predetermined opening angle, and (b) the opening angle of the front door is the maximum opening. It is an explanatory view for explaining the state of the illumination device in the case of an angle. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various areas provided in the main side RAM in the 18th embodiment, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters provided in the total accumulation buffer. (c) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters provided in the first cumulative totaling buffer, and (d) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters provided in the second cumulative totaling buffer. FIG. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how gaming history is managed. It is a flowchart which shows the game management process performed by main side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing target switching processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by the main MPU. FIG. 7 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a management IC in a nineteenth embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining composition of a first history memory and a second history memory. 3 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing target switching processing executed by a management CPU.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in FIG. 2, the configuration within the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. have The outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting wooden boards on four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island equipment. It should be noted that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in an island facility of a game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, when viewed from the front, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front. Further, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided in an exposed manner on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21 . A game board 24 is removably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be explained based on FIG. 3. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail part 25 and an outer rail part 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail part 25 and the outer rail part 26 provide a guide means. The guide rail is configured as follows. A game ball fired from a game ball firing mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

Incidentally, the game ball firing mechanism 27 includes a firing rail 27a that extends toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 55a (described later) onto the firing rail 27a, and a ball feeding device 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 55a (described later) onto the firing rail 27a. The solenoid 27c is an electric actuator that fires the game balls supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. When the firing operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and the game ball is fired.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings passing through it in the front and back direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special winning winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, etc. ing. A total of four general winning holes 31 are provided, and one each is provided for the others.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, if one game ball enters the first operating port 33 or one game ball enters the second operating port 34, In this case, when one game ball is paid out and one game ball enters the general winning hole 31, ten prize balls are paid out and sent to the special electric winning device 32. When one game ball enters the ball, 15 prize balls are paid out.

Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of winning balls than the first operating port 33. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of prize balls is greater than 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the gaming area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a windmill are also provided.

Here, entering the ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also the manner in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the fluid continues to flow down the gaming area PA without being discharged. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 will be used. The landing of a game ball into a ball is also expressed as winning a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are installed in the game board 24 as a unit as an operating port device. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are open upward. Further, both the operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction with the first operating port 33 facing upward. The second actuating port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric utility object 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, it is possible to enter the second operating hole 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 34 in the downstream direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) that passes through the through gate 35 in the vertical direction, and the game ball that enters the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after winning the prize. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning in the through gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is held triggered by winning in the through gate 35, and a general figure display of the normal figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass through in the gaming area PA. A changing display of the picture is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a power open winning, a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuating display of the general figure display section 38a is ended, the state shifts to the general electric power open state. In the general power open state, the general power accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

Note that the general figure display section 38a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, etc. , CRT or other types of display devices such as a dot matrix display. In addition, the patterns that are variably displayed on the general figure display section 38a include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

In the general drawing unit 38, a general drawing holding display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the general drawing display section 38a. The number of game balls that have entered the through gate 35 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the regular game reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is held using the win at the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly displayed through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special symbol unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

Specifically regarding the special figure unit 37, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a. The display area of the special figure display section 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display section 37a, a winning lottery is performed using a prize winning in the first operating port 33 or a winning in the second operating port 34 as a trigger, so that a variable display of symbols or a predetermined display is performed. Then, the results corresponding to the lottery results are displayed. Note that the special figure display section 37a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, etc. , CRT or other types of display devices such as a dot matrix display. In addition, the designs displayed on the special figure display section 37a include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed. Possible configurations include a configuration where .

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure pending display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The number of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the special symbol reservation display section 37b.

In detail about the symbol display device 41, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device to be described later. Note that the symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and may also be a dot matrix display device. You can.

In the symbol display device 41, when a variable display of a symbol or a predetermined display is performed on the special symbol display section 37a based on a winning at the first operating port 33 or a winning at the second operating port 34, the symbol is changed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas, and in each symbol row, a main character numbered from "1" to "9" is set. The symbols are scrolled and displayed in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, scrolling display for all symbol rows is first started, and then the scroll display is switched to standby display in the order of upper symbol row → lower symbol row → middle symbol row, and finally a predetermined display is displayed in each symbol row. The process ends with the symbol displayed statically. For example, in a game round where the game result is a jackpot, symbols of a predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on the active line set in advance on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41.

In addition, in the symbol display device 41, not only the display performance triggered by winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts after winning is performed. be exposed. In addition, based on winning to either of the actuating ports 33, 34, the display starts on the special symbol display section 37a and the symbol display device 41, and the period from displaying a predetermined result to ending is one game round. equivalent to times. Further, the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41 are not limited to the above-mentioned symbols, and for example, only numbers may be displayed in a variable manner as the symbols.

If a jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on winning to the first operating port 33 or winning to the second operating port 34, a transition is made to an opening/closing execution mode in which winning to the special electric winning device 32 is possible. The special electric winning device 32 is equipped with a grand prize opening (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and is also provided with an opening/closing door 32a that opens and closes the grand prize opening. The opening/closing door 32a is placed in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes, but if the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery, it can be switched to the open state in which game balls can win prizes. It has become. Incidentally, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to which the game will transition in the event of a winning result. Note that in the closed state, it is not impossible to win a prize, but it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration regarding the discharge of game balls that have flown down the game area PA.

As already explained, the game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a is ejected from the gaming area PA. In other words, the game ball ejected from the game ball launch mechanism 27 and flowing into the game area PA is either the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, or the out port 24a. By entering the ball, the ball will be ejected from the gaming area PA. A game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, and out opening 24a is guided to the back side of the gaming board 24.

On the back side of the game board 24, discharge passages 42 to 48 are formed in correspondence with the general winning opening 31, the special winning winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, respectively. . The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 42 to 48 flow down the discharge passages 42 to 48 into which they have flowed, and are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24, and then to the discharge ball collection part (not shown). will be collected. Then, the game balls collected by the discharged ball collection section are discharged to a ball circulation device of the island equipment in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Each of the discharge passages 42 to 48 is provided with various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting game balls. The discharge passage sections 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be explained below. As described above, there are four general winning openings 31, so there are discharge passages 42 to 44 corresponding to each of the four openings. In this case, one detection sensor 42a, 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning a prize opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the first discharge passage part 42, and the detection range exists in the middle of the second discharge passage part 43. A second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. The game ball that entered the leftmost general winning hole 31 is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage section 42, and the game ball that entered the general winning hole 31 on the right side The ball is detected by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage section 43. In addition, a third discharge passage portion 44 is provided for the two right-side general winning ports 31 so as to merge at an intermediate position. The third discharge passage section 44 has an inlet side area corresponding to each of the two general winning ports 31, and has one outlet side area by merging the inlet side areas in the middle. are doing. The third winning a prize opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the exit side area of the third discharge passage section 44. A game ball that enters one of the two general winning holes 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage section 44.

A fourth discharge passage section 45 is provided corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32. A special electric detection sensor 45a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage part 45, and the game ball that enters the special electric winning device 32 is on the way to pass through the fourth discharge passage part 45. It is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage portion 46 is provided corresponding to the first operating port 33 . A first operation port detection sensor 46a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage section 46, and the game ball that enters the first operation port 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage section 46. While passing, it is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 is provided corresponding to the second operating port 34 . A second operating port detection sensor 47a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharge passage portion 47, and the game ball that enters the second operating port 34 passes through the sixth discharge passage portion 47. While passing, it is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a. A seventh discharge passage portion 48 is provided corresponding to the out port 24a. An out-port detection sensor 48a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage section 48, and the game ball that enters the out-port 24a is on the way to pass through the seventh discharge passage section 48. It is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

Note that a game ball that is detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a will not be detected by any of the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. Further, a gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a game ball passing through the through gate 35 while flowing down the gaming area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

Although electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used as the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, any sensor can be used as long as the game balls can be detected individually. Further, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are electrically connected to a main control device 60, which will be described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal when a game ball is not detected, and output a HI level signal when a game ball is detected. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 configured as described above is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window 51 that allows almost the entire area of the gaming area PA to be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of glass to be colorless and transparent, but is not limited to this, and may be made of synthetic resin to be colorless and transparent. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting section 53 is provided above the window section 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker sections 54 are provided to output sound effects and the like according to the gaming state. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 and a lower bulging portion 56, which bulge toward the front side, are arranged vertically in parallel. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that similarly opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper tray 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls put out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball firing mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower tray 56a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 55a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 60 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. Note that the substrate box 60a may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. Examples of such trace means include the configuration of a joint that connects the plurality of case bodies that make up the board box 60a inseparably and requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating them, and the adhesive layer that remains on the adhesive target when peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off is pasted across the boundaries between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies constituting the board box 60a can be considered.

A back pack unit 15 is installed to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 made of transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism section 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism section 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls put out by the payout device 76 are delivered to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The dispensing mechanism section 73 is supplied with a main power source of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power on and off.

The control device assembly unit 74 includes a payout control device 77 that has a function of controlling the payout device 76, and a predetermined amount of power required by various control devices, etc., is generated and outputted, and is also used to generate and output electricity when the player operates the firing operation device 28. A power supply/launch control device 78 is provided to control the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/launch control device 78 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 77 is located at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 67 that monitors the power supply. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62 . The MPU 62 includes a main CPU 63, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section, as well as a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The main ROM 64 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory (ie, nonvolatile storage means), and is used for reading only. The main side ROM 64 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main side CPU 63.

The main RAM 65 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (ie, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The main side RAM 65 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than the main side ROM 64. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64.

The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the manner in which game balls enter the game area PA based on information supplied from the main CPU 63. Although details will be described later, the management IC 66 grasps the entry history of game balls into the general prize opening 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, and In accordance with the grasped ball entry history, the frequency of balls entering the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is grasped.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power outage monitoring board 67 and a payout control device 77 provided in the main control device 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. A power supply/launch control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power outage monitoring board 67, and operating power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power outage monitoring board 67.

Various sensors such as various ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As already explained, the various ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a include the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the first operating opening detection sensor. 46a, a second operating port detection sensor 47a, an out port detection sensor 48a, and a gate detection sensor 49a. Based on the detection results of these ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines whether the ball enters each ball entry section. Further, the main side CPU 63 executes various lottery drawings based on winnings to the first operating port 33 and various drawings based on winnings to the second operating port 34.

A power outage monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and a sound emission control device 81 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the fact that a game ball has entered a prize ball corresponding entering part of the above-mentioned ball entering part where the occurrence of the ball entering corresponds to the payout of the game ball. Ru. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the audio emission control device 81.

On the output side of the MPU 62, there are a drive unit 32b for special electricity that opens and closes the opening/closing door 32a of the special electricity prize winning device 32, a drive unit 34b for general electricity that opens and closes the general electricity accessory 34a of the second operating port 34, and a drive unit 34b for general electricity that opens and closes the opening/closing door 32a of the special electricity winning device 32. A drawing unit 37 and a general drawing unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a and a special figure pending display section 37b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the general drawing unit 38 is provided with a general drawing display section 38a and a general drawing holding display section 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b is executed in the main side CPU 63 so that the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed. Further, when the open state of the general electric utility object 34a is won, the drive control of the general electric drive unit 34b is executed in the main CPU 63 so that the general electric utility object 34a is opened and closed. Furthermore, in each game round, display control of the special figure display section 37a is executed by the main CPU 63. In addition, when displaying the lottery result as to whether or not to open the general utility object 34a, the main side CPU 63 executes display control of the general public figure display section 38a. In addition, when a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, or when a variable display starts in the special symbol display section 37a, the main CPU 63 controls the display of the special symbol pending display section 37b. is executed, and when a winning occurs in the through gate 35, or when variable display is started on the common picture display section 38a, display control of the common picture pending display section 38b is executed in the main CPU 63.

The power outage monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power source/launch control device 78, and monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power source/launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The power source/launch control device 78 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) in, for example, an amusement hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, necessary operating power is generated for the main control board 61, payout control device 77, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power outages such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF, the power supply unit for power outages supplies power from the main power supply unit. Power for memory retention is supplied to the main side RAM 65 of the control device 60 and the payout control device 77. Further, the power supply/launch control device 78 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The audio light emission control device 81 drives and controls the display light emission section 53 and the speaker section 54 provided in the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 82. It is. The display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on commands received from the audio emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings on the main CPU 63>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the main CPU 63 will be explained using FIG. 6.

When playing a game, the main CPU 63 uses various types of counter information to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, settings for display on the special pattern display section 37a, settings for display on the pattern display device 41, settings for display on the general pattern display section 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the winning random number counter C1 used in the lottery of winning occurrences, the jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are changed when the winning occurs. Determine the reach random number counter C3 used for the reach occurrence lottery when playing, the random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the display duration time on the special symbol display section 37a and the symbol display device 41. A variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, a general electric utility object release counter C4 is used to determine whether or not the general electric utility object 34a of the second operating port 34 should be brought into the general electric power open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided in the main side RAM 65 as an acquisition information storage means when a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. The data is stored in the reserved storage area 65a.

The reservation storage area 65a includes a reservation area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. In addition, a combination of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as pending information in any of the pending areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, if winnings to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occur multiple times in a row, the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 are Each piece of numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of reservation area RE2 → third reservation area RE3 → fourth reservation area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, the winning history of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 can be held and stored up to a maximum of four. .

Note that the number that can be held and stored is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a, and is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE. At this time, a judgment is made based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be explained in detail.

First, the general utility goods release counter C4 will be explained. The general utility utility release counter C4 is configured such that, for example, it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 250, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general electric utility object release counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the general electric power holding area 65c of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the general electric utility object 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electric utility object opening counter C4.

In the present pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the common electric accessory 34a are different from each other. In detail, in the support mode, when compared with the situation where the game balls continue to be launched in the same manner into the game area PA, the general electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 opens per unit time. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the state is relatively high or low.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the general electricity release state in the general electricity release lottery using the general electricity utility item release counter C4 is the same (for example, 4/5 in both cases). , In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the general electric utility accessory 34a is in the open state when the general electric power open state is won is set to be greater than that in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time for one time is also set to be longer. has been done. In this case, when the general power open state is won in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the general power accessory 34a occurs multiple times, the period from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (i.e., The duration of one display on the display section 38a is set short.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first operating port 33 is higher than that in the second operating port 34, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize is higher in the first operating port 33 than in the second operating port 34. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 increases. When a winning occurs in the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has too much. It can be carried out.

Note that the configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequently open to the power grid per unit time than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, in the power grid release lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the general power open state. In addition, the secured time period that is secured between the time when one general electricity lottery is held and the next general electricity distribution lottery is held (for example, the period of time that is secured on the general electricity map display section 38a based on winnings in the through gate 35) is In configurations where multiple types of variable display times are available, it is easier to select a shorter securing time in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, or the average securing time is set to be shorter. Good too. In addition, the number of times the power grid is released, the length of time it is open, the amount of time secured between one general power grid release lottery and the next power grid release lottery is shortened, and such secured time. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of shortening the average time and increasing the probability of winning.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be explained. The winning random number counter C1 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly and is stored in the holding storage area 65a of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

The random number value that results in a jackpot is stored in the main ROM 64 as a win/fail table. As the pass/fail table, a pass/fail table for low probability mode and a pass/fail table for high probability mode are set. That is, in this pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the win/fail lottery means.

Under the gaming state in which the low probability mode win/fail table is referred to during the above-mentioned lottery, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is two. On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the high probability mode win/fail table is referred to during the lottery, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 20. Note that the number of random numbers that result in a win is arbitrary as long as the winning probability is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and is stored in the holding storage area 65a at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plurality of jackpot results include (1) the mode of opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the win/fail lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (3) the opening/closing mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by differentiating three conditions, namely, the support mode in the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34.

The mode of opening/closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is such that the frequency of winnings on the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high or low. A frequent winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in both the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, round games are executed up to a predetermined number of times.

Here, the round game is continued until either one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the prize in the special electric winning device 32. It is a game that is played. Further, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot result is a fixed number of rounds and is the same regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds, regardless of the jackpot result.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types are set for one opening mode of the special electric winning device 32, with different opening durations from when the special electric winning device 32 is opened until it is closed. Specifically, a long-time mode in which the open duration is set to a long time of 29 seconds, and a short-time mode in which the open duration is set to 0.06 seconds, which is a short time shorter than the above-mentioned long time, are set. has been done.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the firing operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area PA every 0.6 seconds. be done. Further, in the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to nine. Then, in the long-time mode among the above-mentioned open modes, the open continuation time is set to be longer than the product of the game ball firing cycle and one round game. On the other hand, in the short time mode, the open duration time is set to be shorter than the product of the game ball firing cycle and one round game, more specifically, shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, if one opening is made in a long-time mode, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will receive a prize equal to the upper limit number in one round game, and one in a short-time mode. When the number of rounds is opened, it is expected that no winnings will be made to the special electric winning device 32, or that only one prize will be won, if any.

In the high frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a long time mode in each round game. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a short time mode in each round game.

In addition, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration time for one opening, and the upper limit number of pieces in one round game are the same as those in the high-frequency winning mode. is not limited to the above values and may be set arbitrarily if the frequency of winnings in the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher than that of the low-frequency winning mode. It is.

The distribution destinations of game results for the jackpot type counter C2 are stored in the main ROM 64 as a distribution table. As such distribution destinations, a low-probability jackpot result, a low-win high-probability jackpot result, and a most profitable jackpot result are set.

The low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games has reached the end standard number of times (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

For low winning and high probability jackpot results, the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. be. These high probability mode and high frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the win/fail lottery becomes a jackpot state win and the state shifts to a jackpot state accordingly.

The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency winning mode, and furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode becomes a high probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. These high probability mode and high frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the win/fail lottery becomes a jackpot state win and the state shifts to a jackpot state accordingly.

In relation to each of the above gaming states, the normal gaming state refers to a state where the win/fail lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode, not the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a low win/high probability jackpot result is not set as the game result. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode with a low winning/high probability jackpot result, the number of round games may be smaller than in the case of a low probability jackpot result and a most advantageous jackpot result.

In the distribution table, among the values of jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to low probability jackpot results, and "10 to 14" correspond to low probability jackpot results. "15-29" corresponds to the most profitable jackpot result.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expected performance is set as a type of display performance on the symbol display device 41. Expected production is a gaming machine that is equipped with a symbol display device 41 that is capable of displaying symbols in a fluctuating manner, and in which the final stop result is the award corresponding result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result. This refers to a display state that is made to make the player think that the fluctuating display state is likely to result in the award corresponding result after the start of fluctuating display of symbols and before the stop result is derived and displayed. Specifically, regarding the award correspondence result, combinations of symbols with the same number attached on any active line are stopped and displayed.

Two types of expected effects are set: a ready-to-reach display and a preview display for making the user expect the occurrence of a ready-to-reach display or a grant response result at a stage before the ready-to-reach display occurs.

In the ready-to-reach display, the combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying some of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and in this state, the remaining symbol rows are displayed. This includes a display state in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a symbol row. In addition, while the combination of ready-to-reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-reach effect. , those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying or not displaying a combination of ready-to-reach symbols are included.

The preview display may be performed in a situation where the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner in all symbol rows after the variable display of the symbols has started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, or in a situation in which symbols are being displayed in a variable manner in all symbol rows, or in some symbol rows but in a plurality of symbol rows. In a situation where symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a symbol column, a mode is included in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol column. Also included are those in which the background screen is set in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and those in which the symbols on the symbol row are set in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display can occur in any game round when a reach display is displayed or when a reach display is not performed, but it is higher when a reach display is performed than when a reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game round in which the same combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in a game round corresponding to a jackpot result in which the same combination of symbols is not stopped and displayed, the game is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, in the game round corresponding to the winning result, this is executed when the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main side ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. .

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to display a preview is not made by the main control device 60 but by the sound emission control device 81. In this case, the sound emission control device 81 recognizes that a preview display is more likely to occur in a game round corresponding to a jackpot result than in a game round corresponding to a losing result, and that a preview display with a low appearance rate is A lottery process for displaying a preview is executed so as to satisfy at least one condition that the occurrence is likely to occur. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the symbol display device 41 performs a game repeat effect.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used by the main CPU 63 to determine the display duration time on the special symbol display section 37a and the display duration time of symbols on the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the special symbol display section 37a and at the time the symbol display device 41 starts the variation of the symbol.

<About the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed by the main CPU 63 to advance the game will be explained. The processing of the main CPU 63 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, every 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, a power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the main process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) has elapsed after the main process is started. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main side RAM 65 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function registers of the main side CPU 63 are set (step S103).

After that, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 78 is manually operated (step S104), and it is further determined whether the power failure flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". Determination is made (step S105). Also, a checksum calculation process is executed to calculate a checksum (step S106), and it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power was cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined ( Step S107).

In this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a gaming hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process moves to step S108. Further, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not set, or if an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly moves to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 65 is cleared. After that, the process advances to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch is not pressed, on condition that the power outage flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal, step S109 is performed without executing the process of step S108. Proceed to. In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main side RAM 65, such as initialization of a power outage flag, is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. Further, after executing the process of step S109, a recognition process (step S110) for making the management IC 66 recognize various information, and a data output process for outputting various data to the reading device connected to the MPU 62 are performed. Processing is executed (step S111). Details of these recognition processing and data output processing will be explained later.

Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited at the stage when main processing is started. This state in which generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is canceled at a timing when the process in step S111 is completed and before the process in step S112 is executed, and execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process in step S111 is completed and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process in step S112 is started. Therefore, the main CPU 63 will not start the process for advancing the game until the situation is reached.

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115. In other words, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process from step S112 to step S115 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115 is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly.

In the remaining processing, first, in step S112, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit generation of timer interrupt processing. In the subsequent step S113, a random number initial value update process is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and in step S114, a variation counter update process is executed to update the variation type counter CS. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main side RAM 65, the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the process of overwriting the counter from which it was read is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S115, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing is permitted. After executing the process in step S115, the process returns to step S112 and repeats the processes in steps S112 to S115.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 msec).

First, a power outage information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power outage is received from the power outage monitoring board 67, and if the occurrence of a power outage is identified, an infinite loop is executed after executing power outage processing. Become. In the power outage process, the power outage flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

After that, a lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the random number update process for lottery, the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general utility object opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information was sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general utility goods release counter C4, and a process was performed in which each of the read numerical information was incremented by 1. Afterwards, a process is executed to overwrite the reading source counter. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S203, a random number initial value update process is executed as in step S113, and in step S204, a variation counter update process is executed as in step S114.

Thereafter, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred (step S205). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the game stop flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". In the following step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes from step S207 onwards are executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output processing, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to perform output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b. For example, if information is set to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state, output of a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and if information is set to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the closed state. stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, if information is set to switch the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state, output of a drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34b should be started, and the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 should be switched to the closed state. If the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

After that, reading processing is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power outage signal and winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

Thereafter, ball entry detection processing is executed (step S209). In the ball entry detection process, the signals received from each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a are read, and based on the reading results, the output port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, and first operating port 33 are activated. , the presence or absence of the ball entering the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 is determined. Note that the details of the ball entry detection process will be explained later.

Thereafter, a timer update process is executed to collectively update numerical information of multiple types of timer counters provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S210). In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are handled collectively, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are performed collectively. It may also be a configuration.

Thereafter, a firing control process for controlling the firing of game balls is executed (step S211). In a situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is fired at a predetermined firing cycle of 0.6 seconds. In the subsequent step S212, as an input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process in step S208, the disconnection of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a is confirmed, and the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 is confirmed. I do.

Thereafter, a special figure special electric control process for controlling the execution of the game round and the opening/closing execution mode is executed (step S213). In the special figure special electric control process, if a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 in a situation where the number of pending information stored in the pending storage area 65a is less than the upper limit number, A process is executed in which numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 at the time is stored in the pending storage area 65a in chronological order as pending information. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, on the condition that the game is not in progress or opening/closing execution mode, and the pending information is stored, a validity judgment is made to determine whether or not the pending information corresponds to a jackpot win. processing, and if it corresponds to a jackpot win, a distribution determination process is executed to determine which jackpot result the pending information corresponds to. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, in addition to the win/fail judgment process and the distribution judgment process, if the hold information does not correspond to a jackpot win, it is checked whether the hold information corresponds to a reach occurrence. At the same time, a process of selecting the duration of a game round is executed using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time. Then, a variation command including duration information according to the results of each process and a type command including game result information are transmitted to the audio emission control device 81, and the picture pattern on the special figure display section 37a is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Start variable display. By receiving the variation command and the type command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emission section 53 and the speaker section 54 to start a game round production corresponding to the contents of these commands. Further, the audio emission control device 81 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command to the display control device 82. By receiving the variation pattern command, the display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to start variable display of symbols corresponding to the contents of the variation pattern command. As a result, one game round is started.

In the special figure special electric control process, during the execution of one game round, it is determined whether or not the duration of the game round determined at the start of the game round has elapsed, thereby determining whether it is the end timing of the game round. Determine. If it is the end timing, a process is executed to end the game round while displaying a display corresponding to the game result. In this case, if the current game round corresponds to the occurrence of any jackpot result, the symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the special pattern display section 37a, and the current game When the game round corresponds to a losing result, the symbol corresponding to the losing result is stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a. Furthermore, a final stop command indicating that the game round should be ended is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. Upon receiving the final stop command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emission section 53 and the speaker section 54 to finish the production of the current game round. Further, the audio light emission control device 81 transmits a final stop command to the display control device 82. By receiving the final stop command, the display control device 82 ends the performance of the current game round on the symbol display device 41.

In the special figure special electric control process, when the result of the game round is a result corresponding to transition to the opening/closing execution mode, a process for starting the opening/closing execution mode is executed. At this start, an opening command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the audio light emission control device 81. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. When the round game is started, the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state, and when the round game is finished, the special electric winning device 32 is in a closed state. In each of these processes, an open command indicating that a round game is to be started is sent to the sound emission control device 81, and a close command indicating that the round game is to be ended is sent to the voice emission control device 81. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, when the opening/closing execution mode is to be ended, an ending command indicating this is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. The audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 to execute effects for the opening/closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the opening/closing execution mode. Further, the audio light emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the command received during the opening/closing execution mode to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to execute effects for the opening/closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, when ending the opening/closing execution mode, the winning lottery mode and support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends correspond to the type of jackpot result that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode. Executes processing to set the mode.

In the timer interrupt process, after executing the special figure/special electric line control process in step S213, the regular figure/general electric line control process is executed (step S214). In the general map and general electric power control process, when a prize is won in the through gate 35, a process is executed to obtain the reservation information on the general electrician side, and when the reservation information on the general electrician side is stored. Then, a release determination is made regarding the pending information, and further, using the release determination as a trigger, a process for performing a production for a regular map is executed. Further, based on the result of the open determination, a process of opening and closing the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is executed. In this case, if the support mode is low-frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed, and if the support mode is high-frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed. Furthermore, in the case of the opening/closing execution mode, even if the immediately previous support mode was the high-frequency support mode, the mode becomes the low-frequency support mode.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of pending information related to the special figure display section 37a on the special figure pending display section 37b. , Output information is set to reflect the increase/decrease in the number of hold information related to the general figure display section 38a on the ordinary figure pending display section 38b. In addition, in step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, output information for updating the display content of the special figure display section 37a is set, and the display content of the regular figure display section 38a is updated. Configure the output information for updating.

Thereafter, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 is confirmed, and a payout state receiving process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the confirmation result (step S216). Further, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S217). Further, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of output of an external signal according to the processing results of various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process (step S218). Thereafter, a management output process is executed to output information corresponding to the result of the game ball entering the game area PA to the management IC 66 (step S219). Details of the management output process will be explained later.

Next, in the main side CPU 63, based on the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through A configuration for identifying whether or not a game ball has entered the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are input to the main CPU 63.

The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled simultaneously. Areas in which information of "0" or "1" is stored in accordance with the voltage of each signal are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. In other words, the area includes the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7. In addition, more than eight types of signals will be input to the input port 63a, but in order to limit the number of signals input at the same time to eight types, the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is determined by the driver IC. Switched through switching control.

In the ball entry detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to the signal group from each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. In a situation where such settings are made, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the 1st bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric detection sensor 45a. , the fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working port detection sensor 46a, the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a. The 6th bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the exit detection sensor 48a, and the 7th bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a.

When the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a do not detect the passage of a game ball, they output a LOW level signal indicating that the ball is not being detected as a detection signal, thereby detecting the passage of a game ball. In this case, a HI level signal indicating that detection is in progress is output as a detection signal. The input port 63a stores information of "0" for the corresponding bit when receiving a LOW level signal, and stores "1" for the corresponding bit when receiving a HI level signal. Stores information about. In other words, in a situation where the passing of a game ball is not detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, information of "0" corresponding to the information indicating that the ball is not detected is stored for the corresponding bit, and the passing of the game ball is not detected. In a situation where detection is being performed, information of "1" corresponding to information indicating that detection is being performed is stored for the corresponding bit.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

When it is confirmed that the situation has changed from the situation where the 0th bit D0 stores the information "0" to the situation where the information "1" is stored, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S301: YES). In this case, the first output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S302), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S303). . The first output flag is used to specify by the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a should be output to the management IC 66. It's a flag. The 10 prize balls counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that 10 game balls should be paid out. If the value of the 10 prize balls counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize balls command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), and the 10 prize balls are output. When the command is output once, the value of the 10 award balls counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize balls command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the first bit D1 has changed from the state where the information of "0" is stored to the state where the information of "1" is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S304: YES). In this case, the second output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S305), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S306). . The second output flag is used to specify by the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a should be output to the management IC 66. It's a flag.

When it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has changed from the state where the information of "0" is stored to the state where the information of "1" is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S307: YES). In this case, the third output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S308), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S309). . The third output flag is used to specify by the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a should be output to the management IC 66. It's a flag.

When it is confirmed that the third bit D3 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S310: YES). In this case, the special electric winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S311), the fourth output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S312), and The value of the 15 award balls counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S313). The special electric winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32 in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode. In the special figure special electric line control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), by confirming that "1" is set in the special electric prize winning flag, it is possible to input one game ball into the special electric prize winning device 32. It is specified that a ball has occurred, and the remaining number of balls that can be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in a round game is subtracted by 1. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of balls that can be entered is executed, the special electric winning flag is cleared to "0". The fourth output flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a should be output to the management IC 66. . The 15 prize balls counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that 15 game balls should be paid out. If the value of the 15 prize balls counter is 1 or more, the 15 prize balls command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), and the 15 prize balls are output. When the command is output once, the value of the 15 prize ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize balls command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the fourth bit D4 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S314: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S315), and the fifth output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S316). Furthermore, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S317). The first operation winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the first operation port 33. In the special figure special electric control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), by confirming that "1" is set in the first operation winning flag, the game is stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation storage area 65a. Processing for newly storing pending information is executed on the condition that the number of pending information that has been stored is less than the upper limit of 4 pieces. In the special electric special electric control process (step S213), it is confirmed that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0". do. The fifth output flag is used to specify in the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a should be output to the management IC 66. It's a flag. The one prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times one game ball should be paid out. If the value of the one prize ball counter is 1 or more, a one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), and one prize ball is output. When the command is output once, the value of the one prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the one prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

When it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has changed from the state where the information "0" is stored to the state where the information "1" is stored, the second operating port detection sensor 47a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S318: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S319), and the sixth output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S320). Furthermore, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S321). The second operation winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the second operation port 34. In the special figure special electric control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), by confirming that "1" is set in the second operation winning flag, the game is stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation storage area 65a. Processing for newly storing pending information is executed on the condition that the number of pending information that has been stored is less than the upper limit of 4 pieces. In the special electric special electric control process (step S213), it is confirmed that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0". do. The sixth output flag is used to specify in the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a should be output to the management IC 66. It's a flag.

When it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 has changed from the state in which the information "0" is stored to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the exit detection sensor 48a detects one game ball. is detected (step S322: YES). In this case, the seventh output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S323). The seventh output flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the exit detection sensor 48a should be output to the management IC 66. be.

When it is confirmed that the seventh bit D7 has changed from the situation where the information "0" is stored to the situation where the information "1" is stored, the gate detection sensor 49a detects that one game ball is It is determined that it has been detected (step S324: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S325). The gate winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), the general map and general electric power control process (step S214) confirms that the gate winning flag is set to "1," and the general electrician that is stored in the general electric power holding area 65c. A process for storing the numerical information of the current general utility utility release counter C4 in the general electric utility holding area 65c as the general electric utility object release counter C4 as the general electric utility object release counter C4, on the condition that the number of holding information on the side is less than the upper limit of 4 pieces. Execute. It is confirmed that the gate winning flag is set to "1" in the general figure general electric power control process (step S214), and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

Note that the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) is started at a 4 msec cycle as already explained, so when one ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a starts detecting one game ball, the entry ball In a situation where the detection sensors 42a to 49a continue to detect that one game ball, the main CPU 63 can specify that one game ball has been detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. It will be done. Therefore, it is sufficient to provide one each of the first to seventh output flags.

Next, the contents of the processing executed by the payout control device 77 will be explained. First, the electrical configuration of the payout control device 77 and various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 11.

The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 includes a payout side CPU92, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section, a payout side ROM93, a payout side RAM94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The payout side ROM 93 is a memory such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory (ie, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for reading only. The payout side ROM93 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side CPU92.

The payout side RAM 94 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 94 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than the payout side ROM 93. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93.

The payout side CPU 92 is capable of bidirectional communication with the main side CPU 63. When the payout side CPU 92 receives the prize ball command from the main side CPU 63, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the state is such that it is possible to normally pay out the game balls, and when it is determined that the state is such that it is not possible to pay out the game balls normally, the payout side CPU 92 stores information in the payout side RAM 94. To stop a payout device 76 even in a situation where information on the number of unpaid prize balls is stored. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a payout restriction command to the main side CPU 63 indicating that it is not possible to pay out normally. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 issue a notification indicating that it is not possible to normally pay out game balls. A notification command is sent to the audio light emission control device 81 so that The states in which it is not possible to normally pay out game balls include a full state in which the lower tray 56a is filled with game balls, a no-ball state in which the tank 75 is not replenished with game balls, and a state in which the payout device 76 is not filled with game balls. There is an abnormal payout state in which the game machine does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is released from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is released from the inner frame 13. .

A full tank sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball path leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank sensor is input to the payout side CPU92. The payout side CPU 92 determines that the tank is full when the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and the state where the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank sensor is canceled. It is determined that the full tank state has been released.

A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball path leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU92. The payout side CPU 92 identifies the no-ball state when the no-ball detection sensor continues to detect no game balls, and when the no-ball detection sensor continues to detect no game balls, the CPU 92 identifies the no-ball state. Specify that the no-ball state has been released.

The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when a game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 identifies a payout abnormal state when the payout detection sensor does not continuously detect a game ball even though the payout device 76 is drive-controlled so that the game ball is paid out. , when the state in which the game balls are not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is canceled, it is determined that the abnormal payout state has been canceled.

A front door open sensor 95 is provided on the front side of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closure detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 identifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving a closing detection signal from the front door open sensor 95, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving an open detection signal from the front door open sensor 95. It is specified that the front door frame 14 is in an open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a front door open command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the open state to the closed state. At this timing, a front door closing command is sent to the main CPU 63. The main side CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when receiving the front door open command, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the front door close command.

A main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front side of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the dispensing side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits a closure detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body open sensor 96 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the opening detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96. It is determined that the main body 12 is in an open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a main body opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A main body closing command is sent to the main CPU 63 at the appropriate timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has entered the open state when receiving the main body opening command, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has entered the closed state when receiving the main body closing command.

The timer interrupt process executed by the payout side CPU 92 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 12. The timer interrupt process is activated repeatedly at a predetermined period (for example, 2 msec).

First, a full tank process is executed (step S401). As already explained, the full tank process is a process to identify whether or not the tank is full based on the detection result of the full tank sensor, and to stop the payout of game balls if the tank is full. At the same time, a command indicating that the tank is full is sent to the main CPU 63. Furthermore, when the full tank state is released, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state is released is sent to the main side CPU 63.

Thereafter, ball unnecessary processing is executed (step S402). In the no-ball process, as already explained, the process is performed to identify whether or not there is no ball based on the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor, and to stop the payout of game balls if there is no ball. At the same time, a command indicating that there is no ball is sent to the main CPU 63. Furthermore, when the no-ball state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the no-ball state is canceled is sent to the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S403). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormal payout state based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if it is in the abnormal payout state, a process is executed to stop the payout of game balls. At the same time, a command indicating that the payout is in an abnormal state is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the abnormal payout state is canceled, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls, and a command indicating that the abnormal payout state is canceled is sent to the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, front door opening monitoring processing is executed (step S404). In the front door open monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95, and if the front door frame 14 is in the open state, It executes a process to stop the payout of game balls, and also sends a front door opening command to the main CPU 63. Further, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls, and a front door close command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, main body opening monitoring processing is executed (step S405). In the main body open monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, and if the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the game ball is At the same time, a main body release command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, command reading processing is executed (step S406). In the command reading process, a process of reading the prize ball command sent by the main CPU 63 is executed. Then, the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. After executing the prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S407), the payout device 76 pays out the game balls. A payout control process is executed to control the execution of (step S408). In the payout control process, when the information on the number of unpaid prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 94 is a value of 1 or more, the payout device 76 is driven and controlled, and the payout detection sensor detects one game ball. In this case, the value of prize ball number information is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the prize ball number information becomes "0", the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. Thereafter, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of output of an external signal according to the processing results of various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process (step S409).

Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal board 97. The external terminal board 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, some of which are electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and some of which are electrically connected to the main CPU 63. A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. Since the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 are electrically connected to the external terminal board 97 in this way, the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 can externally transmit information to the hall computer HC, as shown in FIG. It is possible to output.

One external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the front door open sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the main body open sensor 96. In detail, regarding the configuration of this electrical connection, a signal relay board 98 is provided at a position in the middle of the signal path from the front door open sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branching from the signal path SL1 from the front door open sensor 95 toward the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal on the external terminal board 97 for opening the front door. Therefore, the electrical signal corresponding to the detection result by the front door opening sensor 95 is not only input to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal board 97. This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side CPU 92.

More specifically, regarding the main body open sensor 96, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL4 branching from the signal path SL3 from the main body open sensor 96 toward the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal for opening the main body on the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electrical signal corresponding to the detection result by the main body opening sensor 96 is not only input to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for main body opening on the external terminal board 97. This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side CPU 92.

Next, the contents of the information externally output from the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be explained. First, the contents of the information externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be explained.

In the external information setting process (step S218) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), the main CPU 63 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97. The information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the support mode is in the high-frequency support mode, and information indicating that the first game round has ended. information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls are sent from the gaming area PA through any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Information indicating that the game ball has been ejected, information indicating that the game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and information indicating that the game ball has entered the second operating port 34 are included. .

The payout side CPU 92 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S409) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). The information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that ten game balls have been paid out.

The hall computer HC is able to grasp the manner in which game balls are paid out in the pachinko machine 10 in accordance with various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97. for example,
・Ball payout rate which is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out until 100 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 ・Ball payout rate that is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out until 100 game balls are discharged from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 Ball rate (hereinafter, this ball rate will be referred to as "B")
・Ball output rate in opening/closing execution mode ・Ball output rate in high-frequency support mode ・Number of games played until 100 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this percentage is (referred to as “S”)
・BS × “Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33 and second operating port 34”
- The number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 until 100 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "S1")
- The number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 until 100 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "S2")
・B-(S1 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the first operating port 33" + S2 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the second operating port 34")
etc. are calculated. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage the manner in which game balls enter the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. Note that the number of prize balls is the number of game balls that are paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding ball entry section.

<Configuration for managing winning modes of game balls>
Next, a configuration for managing winning modes of game balls using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As already explained, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 includes a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to these, the MPU 62 also includes an I/F 101 and a reading terminal 102.

The I/F 101 is an interface for transmitting and receiving signals to and from devices external to the MPU 62. The I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via an internal bus 103. Detection results from sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a and commands from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I/F 101, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands, As already explained, various processes are executed by the main CPU 63. Further, as a result of various processes being executed by the main side CPU 63, when a signal is output to a device such as the special electric drive unit 32b, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101, and the main side As a result of various processes being executed by the CPU 63, when a command is output to the payout side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81, the command output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101.

The reading terminal 102 is a terminal for electrically connecting a reading device, which is an external device of the pachinko machine 10, to the MPU 62, and is provided so that the connection terminal portion is exposed on the surface of the MPU 62. . However, as already explained, the main control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted is housed in the board box 60a, and the reading terminal 102 faces the wall of the board box 60a so as not to be exposed to the outside of the main controller 60. ing. Therefore, in order to electrically connect a reading device to the reading terminal 102, it is necessary to open the board box 60a and expose the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102. Note that the invention is not limited to this, and an opening for exposing the reading terminal 102 to the outside of the main control device 60 is formed in the board box 60a, so that the reading terminal 102 can be used for reading without destroying the board box 60a. A configuration may be adopted in which electrical connection of a reading device to the terminal 102 can be made.

The management IC 66 includes a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117. These devices are connected through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66 so as to be able to communicate in both directions.

The management side I/F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via a signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and also receives a signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. This is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 102 via the terminal. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management side I/F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 102 are output from the output port of the management side I/F 111. Note that the main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 via a signal path group 120 for bidirectional communication built in the MPU 62 .

The management CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and an arithmetic section. The management side ROM 113 is a memory such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory that does not require an external power supply to maintain memory (that is, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for reading only. The management side ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the management side CPU 112. The management side RAM 114 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (that is, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The management side RAM 114 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the management side ROM 113. The management RAM 114 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the management ROM 113.

The RTC 115 is a real-time clock, and is configured to constantly measure date information and time information, and output the measured date information and time information according to instructions from the management CPU 112. Note that the RTC 115 is provided with a backup power source, so that it is possible to measure date information and time information even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The correspondence memory 116 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (ie, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 116 is for storing information on the correspondence between each of the buffers 122a to 122p provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122p. used for. Details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be explained later.

The history memory 117 is a memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory (that is, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing purposes. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding the entry of game balls received from the main CPU 63 through the management I/F 111. Details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be explained later.

Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I/F 111 will be explained. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111.

The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to 16th buffers 122a to 122p through signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to 16th buffers 122a to 122p receives a signal to be input. When the input signal is at a LOW level, "0" information is stored as the first data, and when the input target signal is at a HI level, "1" information is stored as the second data. Note that the relationship between these LOW and HI and the first data and second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the first signal of LOW level in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, and the first winning hole detection sensor 42a outputs one game ball. When a ball is detected, a first signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the first signal at the HI level is input to the first buffer 122a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a second signal of LOW level in a situation where no new game balls are detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, and the second winning hole detection sensor 43a outputs a second game ball. When a ball is detected, a second signal at HI level is output for a specific period of time. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the second signal at HI level is being input to the second buffer 122b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs a third signal of LOW level in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, and one game ball is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. When a ball is detected, a third signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the third signal at the HI level is being input to the third buffer 122c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the fourth signal at LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and when one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. A fourth signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the fourth signal at HI level is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the fifth signal of LOW level in the situation where no new game ball is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a, and the first operating port detection sensor 46a outputs the fifth signal of LOW level. When a ball is detected, a fifth signal at HI level is output for a specific period of time. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the fifth signal at the HI level is being input to the fifth buffer 122e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the sixth signal of LOW level in a situation where the second operating port detection sensor 47a does not detect a new game ball, and the second operating port detection sensor 47a outputs the sixth signal of LOW level. When a ball is detected, a sixth signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the sixth signal at the HI level is input to the sixth buffer 122f.

A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the seventh signal of LOW level in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the exit detection sensor 48a, and when one game ball is detected by the exit detection sensor 48a. In this case, a seventh signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the seventh signal at HI level is input to the seventh buffer 122g.

An eighth signal corresponding to whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at LOW level when the opening/closing execution mode is not present, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at HI level when the opening/closing execution mode is present.

A ninth signal corresponding to whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the ninth signal at LOW level when the mode is not high frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the ninth signal at HI level when the mode is high frequency support mode.

A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open period is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continues to output the 10th signal at LOW level when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and continues to output the 10th signal at HI level when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. and output.

An output instruction signal for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize an opportunity to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102 is input to the 16th buffer 122p. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal when there is no need to output history information, and outputs a HI level output instruction signal for a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p.

Although signals from the main CPU 63 can be input to the 11th buffer 122k, 12th buffer 122l, 13th buffer 122m, 14th buffer 122n, and 15th buffer 122o, normal signals are not input in this pachinko machine 10. It is blank. In this way, as the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is provided with buffers 122a to 122p that are larger in number than the types of signals output from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 in the pachinko machine 10, It becomes possible to use the management IC 66 for a model different from the present pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p so as to correspond one-to-one to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the signal paths 118k to 118o are not formed between the buffers 122k to 122o to be blanked.

It has been decided at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111, and the output instruction signal is inputted to the 16th buffer 122p in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111. can specify that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. On the other hand, what types of signals are input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are determined by instructions from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. Specification of the types of these signals in the management side CPU 112 will be described in detail later, but when control is started in the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 with the supply of operating power to the MPU 62, the type of these signals is specified from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112. This is done by sending a type identification command. In this case, information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the management CPU 112 identifies the types of various signals in a situation where operating power is supplied, Information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referred to.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. The correspondence memory 116 stores first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in one-to-one correspondence to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111. It is provided.

In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a. In addition, in the first correspondence area 123a, there is information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31, as well as information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 (10 balls). Stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b. In addition, in the second correspondence area 123b, along with information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31, information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 (10 balls) is also included. Stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, there is information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31, as well as information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 (10 balls). Stored.

The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32 as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122d. In addition, in the fourth correspondence area 123d, there is information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32, as well as information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the special electric winning device 32 (15 balls). Stored. Information indicating that the signal is the first operating port 33 is stored in the fifth correspondence area 123e as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. Further, in the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating that it is the first operating port 33 and information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the first operating port 33 (1 ) are also stored. Information indicating that the signal is the second operating port 34 is stored in the sixth correspondence area 123f as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f. In addition, the sixth correspondence area 123f contains information indicating that the second operating port 34 is used, as well as information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the second operating port 34 (1 ) are also stored. Information indicating that the signal is the output port 24a is stored in the seventh correspondence area 123g as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

The eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is used as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. Information indicating the high frequency support mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. Information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored in the tenth correspondence area 123j as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j.

The eleventh correspondence area 123k stores, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k, information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of them. The twelfth correspondence area 123l stores, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l, information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the types. The thirteenth correspondence area 123m stores, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of them. The fourteenth correspondence area 123n stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the types, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. The fifteenth correspondence area 123o stores, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o, information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of them.

As described above, the configuration is such that the management CPU 112 specifies what kind of signals are input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o by receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. , it becomes possible to use the management IC 66 for a model different from the present pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

Furthermore, instead of outputting information for recognizing the type of signal each time a signal corresponding to storage of history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, the type of signal is recognized in advance. Information for the management CPU 112 to specify the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o based on the output information is stored in the correspondence memory 116. The configuration is as follows. As a result, compared to a configuration in which information for recognizing the type of signal is output each time a signal corresponding to storage of history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, the main It becomes possible to suppress the amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112.

Additionally, the management CPU 112 outputs information for specifying the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o when supply of operating power is started. As a result, when a game is started on the pachinko machine 10, the management CPU 112 can specify the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o.

Further, information setting that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p is performed at the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, the type of signal input to the 16th buffer 122p can be specified for the output instruction signal to be used reliably not only in this pachinko machine 10 but also in other pachinko machines that use the management IC 66. It becomes possible to omit the processing for Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of processing for identifying the type of signal.

Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be explained. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117.

The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set in serial numbers, and a history information storage area 125 is set in one-to-one correspondence with each piece of pointer information. The history information storage area 125 can store combinations of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, a 1 byte data capacity is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and an area for storing correspondence information. A data capacity of 1 byte is allocated. When it becomes necessary to store correspondence relationship information in accordance with the signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (actually the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j of this pachinko machine 10), First, the date information and time information measured by the current RTC 115 are stored in the area for storing RTC information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written. After that, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the current information storage is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is is stored in the area for storing correspondence information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written.

Specifically, regarding the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g receive signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, as described above. Therefore, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116 store information corresponding to the types of ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. More specifically, information corresponding to the type of ball entry portion corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. In this pachinko machine 10, as already explained, the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a detect game balls that have entered the general winning hole 31. Information indicating that each of the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a is a general winning hole 31 is stored. Further, the fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operating port 33. , the sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating that it is the second operating port 34, and the seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating that it is the out port 24a. If the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the current information storage are any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of ball entry part corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is The information about the type of ball entering part is read out from one of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the information about the type of ball entering part is stored as is in the area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

On the other hand, the eighth buffer 122h receives a signal indicating whether it is in the open/close execution mode, the ninth buffer 122i receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high-frequency support mode, and the tenth buffer 122j receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high-frequency support mode. A signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened is input. Therefore, the eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is set, the ninth correspondence area 123i stores information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set, and the tenth correspondence area Information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored in 123j.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 8th signal at LOW level when the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect, and continuously outputs the 8th signal at HI level when the opening/closing execution mode is in effect. The side CPU 112 specifies that the opening/closing execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and specifies that the opening/closing execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. becomes possible. Then, in both cases where the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 receives an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Specify that That is, when the eighth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, not only the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in the opening/closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the start information are transferred to the history information storage area 123h. is stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information. Furthermore, when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the opening/closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the end information are transferred to the history information storage area 123h. is stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 9th signal at LOW level when it is not in high-frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the 9th signal at HI-level when it is in high-frequency support mode. , the management side CPU 112 specifies that the high-frequency support mode has started when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and the high-frequency support mode ends when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It is possible to identify that. Then, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 receives an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Specify that In other words, when the ninth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, not only the information indicating that the high frequency support mode is in the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information are transferred to the history information storage area. It is stored in an area for storing 125 correspondence information. Furthermore, when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the termination information are transferred to the history information storage area. It is stored in an area for storing 125 correspondence information.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 10th signal at LOW level when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and outputs the 10th signal at HI level when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. In order to continue outputting, the management side CPU 112 identifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the 10th signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the 10th signal changes from HI level to LOW level. It becomes possible to specify that the front door frame 14 is closed. Then, in both cases where the tenth signal changes from LOW level to HI level and from HI level to LOW level, the management CPU 112 receives an opportunity to store correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Specify that In other words, when the 10th signal changes from LOW level to HI level, not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the 10th correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information is stored in the history information. It is stored in the area for storing correspondence information in area 125. Further, when the 10th signal changes from HI level to LOW level, history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is the front door frame 14 read from the 10th correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information. It is stored in the area for storing correspondence information in area 125.

The history information storage area 125 is capable of storing all the history information that has occurred during that period, even if there are 10 consecutive business days in which the pachinko machine 10 continues to fire game balls from opening to closing. It takes a few minutes. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times in a day, more than 600,000 history information storage areas 125 are provided. This allows all history information to be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 in addition to the history area 124. The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to specify pointer information that is currently being written in the history memory 117. Specifically, at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, the pointer area 126 is set with information that specifies pointer information of "0" to be written. Then, each time a piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. When the pointer information in the last order becomes the write target and the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information in the last order, the pointer information is set so that the pointer information of "0" becomes the write target. The information in the area 126 is updated. As a result, if an opportunity arises to store history information that exceeds the number of pieces of history information that can be stored, the history information storage area 125 where the oldest history information is stored will be overwritten with new history information in order. Become.

Furthermore, when the reading device reads history information from the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 is cleared to all "0" and the pointer information of "0" is written. Information in the pointer area 126 is updated. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has once been targeted for reading from becoming targeted for reading again.

Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the winning mode of game balls using the management IC 66 will be explained. First, a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and signal types in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the recognition process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 7).

First, a recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "15" (step S501). The recognition output counter measures the remaining number of information outputs necessary for the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal each buffer 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to. This is a counter for identification by the main CPU 63. As already explained, since the 15 first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are to be recognized for their signal types, "15" is set in the recognition output counter.

Thereafter, output processing of an identification start command is executed (step S502). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize which types of signals the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to. When outputting this command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. That is, by using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management CPU 112 to store history information, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a A command is output to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the signals 122o to 122o correspond to. This reduces the number of signal paths compared to a configuration in which the signal path for outputting the command is provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration. The identification start command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In addition, in the process of outputting the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification start command in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. In addition, the output period of the identification start command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. has been done. By receiving the identification start command, the management side CPU 112 is instructed to start processing for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal types in the correspondence memory 116. Identify.

Thereafter, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). In this case, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to each other such that the first buffer 122a becomes the signal type setting target first, and then the nth buffer and then the n+1th buffer become the signal type setting target. The recognition setting for the signal type to be used is performed. Therefore, if the output counter for recognition is "15" to "13", the type identification command indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 and the number of prize balls is read out, and if the output counter for recognition is "12", it is a special prize winning hole. A type identification command indicating that the device is the device 32 and the number of prize balls is read out, and if the recognition output counter is “11”, a type identification command indicating that the device is the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls is read out, If the output counter for recognition is "10", it is the second operating port 34 and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read out, and if the output counter for recognition is "9", it is determined that it is the out port 24a. If the output counter for recognition is "8", read the type identification command that indicates the opening/closing execution mode, and if the output counter for recognition is "7", it is the high frequency support mode. If the output counter for recognition is "6", read the type identification command indicating the front door frame 14, and if the output counter for recognition is "5" to "1", blank. Read the type identification command indicating that the

Thereafter, output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S504). The type identification command has a data capacity of 8 bits like the identification start command, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In addition, in the process of outputting the identification type command, in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when outputting the identification type command is started. In addition, the output period of the identification type command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification type command and the ninth signal. has been done. By receiving the identification type command, the management side CPU 112 assigns correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current setting target buffer among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o to correspond to the identification type command. Store information to be used.

Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S505), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S506). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S506: NO), a process for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after being subtracted by 1 is executed (steps S503 and Step S504).

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S506: YES), output processing of the identification end command is executed (step S507). The identification end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In addition, in the process of outputting the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when outputting the identification end command is started, in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. In addition, the output period of the identification end command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. has been done. By receiving the identification end command, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the process for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal types in the correspondence memory 116 has been completed. do.

Next, the management processing executed by the management side CPU 112 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 18. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started. Note that the processing speed of the management side CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main side CPU 63, and after one timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) is started in the main side CPU 63, the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) is started. The combination of processes from step S606 onward in the management process is executed 16 or more times before the process starts.

When the identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S601: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S602). The setting target counter is a counter used by the management CPU 112 to specify the types of the buffers 122a to 122o whose signal types are to be set. The first buffer 122a is the signal type setting target first, and thereafter the signal type is set to the nth buffer and then the (n+1)th buffer.

Thereafter, on the condition that a type identification command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), a correspondence relationship setting process is executed (step S604). In the correspondence setting process, the currently received type identification is placed in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be set in the management side RAM 114 among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116. Stores information about the signal type set in the command. Thereafter, the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S605).

If a negative determination is made in step S603, or if the process in step S605 is executed, it is determined whether or not an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606). If the identification end command has not been received (step S606: NO), the process returns to step S603, and on the condition that a new type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), steps S604 and S605 are performed. Execute the process again.

If the identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the processes of steps S607 and S608 are repeatedly executed. In step S607, a history setting process is executed to store history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117, although the details will be described later. In step S608, although details will be described later, external output processing is executed to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102.

FIG. 19 is a time chart showing how information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 19(a) shows a period during which commands are output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h). b) shows the period in which the output state of the ninth signal is at HI level, and FIG. 19(c) shows the relationship between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o. 19(d) shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed, and FIG. 19(d) shows the timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S604) is executed by the management CPU 112.

By starting the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at timing t1, as shown in FIG. 19(a). Ru. Further, at the timing of t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 19(b). Thereafter, at timing t2 when the identification start command continues to be output, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 19(b). By confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 identifies that the command is being sent from the main side CPU 63, and outputs the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management CPU 112 enters the identification state by making an affirmative determination in step S601 of the management process (FIG. 18). Thereafter, at timing t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG. 19(a).

Thereafter, at timing t4, output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. 19(a). Further, at the timing t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 19(b). Thereafter, at timing t5 when the type identification command continues to be output, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 19(b). The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and updates the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process at timing t5 as shown in FIG. 19(d). In the correspondence relationship setting process, information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 and information on the number of prize balls are stored in the first correspondence area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. Thereafter, at timing t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG. 19(a).

After that, at each of the timings from t7 to t9, from t10 to t12, from t13 to t15, and from t16 to t18, the main Correspondence setting processing corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63 is executed by the management side CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence relationship setting process corresponding to the 15th type identification command is completed from timing t16 to timing t18.

Thereafter, at timing t19, output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. 19(a). Further, at the timing t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 19(b). Thereafter, at timing t20 when the identification end command continues to be output, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 19(b). The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and updates the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management CPU 112 ends at timing t20 as shown in FIG. 19(c). Thereafter, at timing t21, the output of the identification end command is stopped as shown in FIG. 19(a).

As described above, by using the ninth signal to make the management CPU 112 recognize whether or not a command is being output, it is possible to instruct the management CPU 112 as to when to store history information. Even in a configuration where command output is performed using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths), it is clearly made clear to the management CPU 112 that the command is being output. It becomes possible to make it recognized.

Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the management output process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the management output process is executed in step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

First, a management target counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "10" (step S701). The managed target counter allows the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not there is a managed target that is not specified as to whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process. It is also a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed for which management target. The management targets for which the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in one management output process are the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, There are a total of 10 items, including whether the opening/closing execution mode is executed, whether the high-frequency support mode is executed, and whether the front door frame 14 is opened or closed. Therefore, first, the managed counter is set to "10".

Thereafter, it is determined whether the output state of the signal to the management CPU 112 for the managed object corresponding to the current managed object counter value is at the HI level (step S702). If the level is not HI (step S702: NO), by determining whether the value of the managed counter is 4 or more, the ball entry detection sensor 42a has seven managed targets corresponding to the value of the managed counter. to 48a is specified (step S703).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether the output flag of the main side RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S704). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "10" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether the first output flag is set to "1", If the value of the counter to be managed is "9" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether the second output flag is set to "1", and the value of the counter to be managed is determined. is "8" and corresponds to the third winning a prize opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", and the value of the managed counter is "7". Yes, if it corresponds to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether the fourth output flag is set to "1", and the value of the managed counter is "6", and the first operating port detection sensor 46a is determined. If it is compatible with the second operating port detection sensor 47a, it is determined whether the fifth output flag is set to "1" or not, and the value of the managed counter is "5" and it corresponds to the second operating port detection sensor 47a. In this case, it is determined whether the sixth output flag is set to "1", and if the value of the managed counter is "4" and corresponds to the outlet 24a, the seventh output flag is set to "1". 1" is set. As already explained, these first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 10).

If the output flag corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed is set to "1" (step S704: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed among the first to seventh signals is set to HI level. (step S705). Thereafter, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S706).

If a negative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the HI level has occurred (step S707). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is "3", it is determined whether a transition to the opening/closing execution mode has occurred, and if the value of the managed counter is "2", the high It is determined whether a shift to the frequency support mode has occurred, and if the value of the managed counter is "1", it is determined whether the front door frame 14 has entered the open state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S707, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to HI level (step S708).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined whether an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level (step S709). Specifically, if the value of the counter to be managed is 4 or more and the current target to be managed is any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, the value of the counter to be managed among the first to seventh signals is It is determined whether a HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the corresponding signal was switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S607) of the management process (FIG. 18) in the management side CPU 112, and the output of the signal that has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This is a period during which the management CPU 112 can reliably identify the state. In addition, if the value of the managed target counter is "3" and the current managed target is in the open/close execution mode, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode has ended, and if the value of the managed target counter is "2" and the current managed target is in the open/close execution mode. If the current management target is the high-frequency support mode, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode has ended, and the value of the management target counter is "1" and the current management target is the front door frame 14. If so, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in a closed state. If an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S709: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the LOW level ( Step S710).

If a negative determination is made in step S704, if the process of step S706 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S707, if the process of step S708 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S709, or if a negative determination is made in step S709, or When the process of S710 is executed, the value of the managed counter of the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S711). Then, it is determined whether the value of the managed counter after being subtracted by 1 is "0" (step S712). If the value of the managed object counter is 1 or more (step S712: NO), the processes from step S702 onwards are executed for the managed object corresponding to the new managed object counter value.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 21. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 18).

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in a check target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S801). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blankness is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is identified, and the number of correspondence areas is identified. Set the information of the number in the confirmation target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, as already explained, information other than information indicating blankness is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j, so in step S801, "10" is set in the check target counter. do.

Thereafter, it is checked whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S802). Note that when the value of the counter to be checked is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "10", the 10th buffer 122j is to be checked for numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is to be checked for numerical information. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S802, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S803). Then, writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S804). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the writing target is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S803 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current check target counter value, and written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Furthermore, if the correspondence relationship information is any of the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, the information indicating that it is in high-frequency support mode, and the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14, the above-mentioned Not only correspondence information but also start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Note that when the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o is the target for reading the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "10", the 10th correspondence area 123j is the correspondence relation information read target, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence relation. The information is to be read.

When the writing process is executed as described above, and the value of the check target counter is one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. In the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are stored. The combination of correspondence information indicating that the information is either one of the above is stored as history information. In addition, if the value of the counter to be checked is one of the opening/closing execution mode, high-frequency support mode, and front door frame 14, RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. A combination of the start information and the correspondence information indicating that the mode is one of the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14 is stored as history information.

Thereafter, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S805). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read out and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

If a negative determination is made in step S802, or if the process in step S805 is executed, the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked indicate whether or not the signal output has been switched to the LOW level. It is determined whether correspondence relationship information to be checked is stored (step S806). Specifically, when the current value of the counter to be checked is "8" to "10", information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect and information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in the corresponding correspondence area 123h to 123j are displayed. Since either the information indicating that there is a door frame 14 or the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S806.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S806, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is changed from "1" to "0". By checking whether the input signal from the main CPU 63 has been input to the buffer, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S807). When an affirmative determination is made in step S807, the RTC information is read out in the same manner as in step S803 (step S808), and further, a writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S809). In the writing process, the RTC information read in step S808 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current check target counter value, and written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Furthermore, not only the correspondence information but also the termination information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, if the value of the counter to be checked is in any of the opening/closing execution mode, high-frequency support mode, and front door frame 14, it corresponds to the pointer information to be written. A combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating that the mode is one of the opening/closing execution mode, high-frequency support mode, and front door frame 14, and termination information is stored as history information in the history information storage area 125. The state will be as follows. Thereafter, the process of updating the target pointer is executed in the same manner as step S805 (step S810).

If a negative determination is made in step S806, if a negative determination is made in step S807, or if the process of step S810 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S811). Then, it is determined whether the value of the check target counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S812). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S812: NO), the process from step S802 onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

Next, the manner in which history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 22. FIG. 22(a) shows a period when a HI level signal is input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and FIG. 22(b) shows a period when a HI level signal is input to the eighth buffer 122h. 22(c) shows a period when a HI level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 22(d) shows a period when a HI level signal is input to the tenth buffer 122j. FIG. 22E shows the timing of writing history information into the history memory 117.

At timing t1, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from LOW level to HI level, as shown in FIG. 22(a). Therefore, history information is written into the history memory 117 at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 22(e). Thereafter, at timing t2, the signal that was switched to HI level at timing t1 is switched to LOW level, as shown in FIG. 22(a). However, the signal is a signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and the switching of the LOW level is not stored in the history information, so at the timing t2, the signal shown in FIG. As shown in e), writing of history information is not executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 22(a), the first to seventh buffers 122a The output state of the signal input to any of the signals 122g to 122g is switched from LOW level to HI level. Therefore, history information is written at each of these timings as shown in FIG. 22(e).

As shown in FIG. 22(b), the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is at HI level from timing t4 to timing t7. This eighth buffer 122h corresponds to whether or not the opening/closing execution mode occurs. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22(e), the timing t4 is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal changes to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t7. In this case, the history information written at timing t4 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t7 includes end information. Thereby, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode.

Furthermore, history information is written into the history memory 117 in the order of time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is in the opening/closing execution mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, it is possible to determine which of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the ball is in the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 22(c), the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is at the HI level from timing t8 to timing t11. This ninth buffer 122i corresponds to whether or not the high-frequency support mode occurs. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22(e), the timing t8 is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal changes to the LOW level. History information is written at each timing t11. In this case, the history information written at timing t8 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t11 includes end information. This makes it possible to grasp the execution period of the high-frequency support mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

Furthermore, history information is written into the history memory 117 in the order of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is also included in the high-frequency support mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, it is possible to determine which of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has hit the field is in the high-frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 22(d), the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is at HI level from timing t12 to timing t15. This tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22(e), the timing t12 is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal changes to the LOW level. History information is written at each timing t15. In this case, the history information written at timing t12 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t15 includes end information. Thereby, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it becomes possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

Furthermore, history information is written into the history memory 117 in the order of time. Therefore, while the front door frame 14 is open, history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is displayed. It becomes possible to distinguish whether it is the one or not. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, it is possible to determine which of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the front door frame 14 is when the front door frame 14 is being opened.

Next, a processing configuration for outputting history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing data output processing executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the data output process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 7).

In the data output process, first, it is determined whether a connection signal indicating that a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is received from the reading terminal 102 (step S901). The reading device is configured to output a connection signal when electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when receiving the connection signal through the reading terminal 102, an affirmative determination is made in step S901. do.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, this data output processing is immediately terminated. In this case, in order to execute the data output process, it is necessary to restart the supply of operating power to the MPU 62. Therefore, in order to output the historical information to the outside, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the MPU 62 while the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. . The power supply operation unit for stopping and starting the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is provided on the back of the back pack unit 15. It is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 and expose the back side of the back pack unit 15. Under these circumstances, in order to output history information to the outside, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the MPU 62 while the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for anyone other than the game hall manager to read the history information.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the current connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is confirmed by determining whether or not a control information confirmation signal is received from the reading terminal 102. It is determined whether the control information (program and data) confirmation is supported (step S902). The reading device is configured to be able to confirm both control information and history information, and if confirmation of control information is selected by manual operation of the reading device, the reading device can confirm the control information. A signal is transmitted, and if confirmation of history information is selected by manual operation on the reading device, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the reading device. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the reading device for checking control information and the reading device for checking history are separate. In this case, if a reading device for checking the control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a signal for checking the control information is transmitted from the reading device, and a reading device for checking the history is sent to the reading terminal 102. If the device is electrically connected, a history confirmation signal is transmitted from the reading device.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, output processing for confirming control information is executed (step S903). In the output processing, a program and data are read as control information from the main ROM 64, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to read the control information with a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and confirm whether the control information is genuine or normal. It becomes possible to do this.

If a negative determination is made in step S902, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management CPU 112 (step S904). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from LOW level to HI level. This HI level output state continues for a specific period of time. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. By switching the output state of the output instruction signal to the HI level, the management CPU 112 executes processing for outputting history information. This process will be explained in detail later.

When the process of step S903 or the process of step S904 is executed, it is determined whether the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is continued (step S905). If the process is being continued (step S905: YES), the process continues to wait in step S905. This makes it possible to prevent the processing set to be executed after the data output processing from being executed until the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released. When the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released (step S905: NO), this data output processing is ended.

Next, the external output processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24. Note that the external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1001: YES), processing for outputting history information from step S1002 onwards is executed. Specifically, first, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the outlet 24a is stored is counted. The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1002). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the ball enters the general winning hole 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the ball enters the general winning hole 31. The number is calculated (step S1003). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the ball entering the special electric winning device 32 can be counted. The number is calculated (step S1004). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence relationship information indicating that the first actuation port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, information on the first actuation port 33 is stored. The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1005). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence relationship information indicating that the second actuation port 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, information on the second actuation port 34 is stored. The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1006).

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 where the correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating that it is the front door frame 14 are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists during the period between the history information storage area 125 where the information and the end information are stored, the exit that occurred when the front door frame 14 is in an open state can be detected. 24a, the number of balls entering each of the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1007). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the front door frame is the front door frame 14 and start information are stored; The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the termination information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, and a correspondence relationship that indicates that it is the front door frame 14. If there are multiple sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. Although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 exists. If the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 are not stored in the history information storage area 125 where is stored, the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 are stored. All history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 in which the front door frame 14 is stored is treated as that in which the front door frame 14 is in an open state.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1002 to S1007 (step S1008). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls that occurred while the front door frame 14 was open, calculated in step S1007, is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in each of steps S1002 to S1006. Then, the following parameters are calculated using each number of balls entered after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of balls entering the outlet 24a calculated in step S1007 and the number of balls entering the outlet 24a calculated in step S1002 is defined as the number of balls entering K1, and the difference between the number of balls entering the exit port 24a calculated in step S1003 and the number of balls entering the outlet 24a calculated in step S1007 is defined as the difference between the number of balls entering the exit port 24a calculated in step S1007. The difference in the number of balls entered into the general winning hole 31 is defined as the number of entered balls K2, and the difference between the number of entered balls in the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of entered balls calculated in step S1004 is defined as the number of entered balls K3, The difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1007 and the number of balls entering the ball calculated in step S1005 is defined as the number of balls entering K4. The difference in the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 is defined as the number of balls entering K5.
・First parameter: Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the general winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "First operating opening Ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the technique area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is (referred to as “D1”)
・Second parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general prize opening 31 K2/total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5)・Third parameter: Game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 Ratio of total number of game balls entering K3/total number of game balls discharged from gaming area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) 4th parameter: Total number of game balls entering first operating port 33 K4/discharging from gaming area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D2")
- Fifth parameter: ratio of total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 K5/total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D3")
・Sixth parameter: D1 - (D2 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + D3 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")
- Seventh parameter: (K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "General "Number of prize balls for winning into the winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34 8th parameter: K3 × "Number of prize balls received in the special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 × "Number of prize balls received in the general winning slot 31") Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the first actuation port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second actuation port 34 ”) After that, using the oldest RTC information and the newest RTC information in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the total amount required to extract all the history information that was the target of the calculation this time The time is calculated (step S1009). Then, first output processing is executed (step S1010). In the first output process, all the history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. Further, the various parameters calculated in step S1008 are sequentially outputted to the reading terminal 102, and the total time calculated in step S1009 is outputted to the reading terminal 102. As a result, each piece of information that was output in the first output process is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 stores correspondence information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect and start information, and the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode exists. By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists during the period between the history information storage area 125 where the end information is stored, the out exit 24a and the general winning opening 31 that have occurred in the opening/closing execution mode are , the number of balls entering each of the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1011). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect and start information are stored, and correspondence relationship information and end information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being stored. is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is stored, and correspondence information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is stored. If there are multiple sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. Furthermore, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is present. If correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is not stored in the stored history information storage area 125, correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being stored are stored. Any history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is handled as being in the opening/closing execution mode.

After that, during the period in the opening/closing execution mode specified in step S1011, the out exit 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special winning winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the The number of balls entering each of the second operating ports 34 is calculated (step S1012). The method of calculating the number of entering balls is the same as that in step S1007, except that the period in the opening/closing execution mode specified in step S1011 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1011 and S1012 (step S1013). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls that occurred while the front door frame 14 was open, calculated in step S1012, is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1011. Then, the following parameters are calculated using each number of balls entered after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1012 and the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1012 is defined as the number of balls entering K11, and the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 calculated in step S1011 is The difference between the number of balls entered in the general winning slot 31 calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K12, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1011 and the number of balls entered in the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1012. The difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1012 is defined as the number K13 of entering balls, and the difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1011 is defined as the number of entering balls K13. The number of balls entered is K14, and the difference between the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1012 and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1012 is set as the number K15 of entering balls.
- 11th parameter: Total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the general winning opening 31" + K13 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "First operating opening 33 Ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")/(Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34) D11”)
- 12th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general winning slot 31 K12/total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) - 13th parameter: Game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 Ratio of total number of game balls entering K13/total number of game balls ejected from gaming area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) ・14th parameter: Total number of game balls entering first operating port 33 K14/ejecting from gaming area PA The ratio of the total number of game balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D12")
・Fifteenth parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 K15/total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D13")
- 16th parameter: D11 - (D12 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + D13 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")
- 17th parameter: (K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K15 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "General "Number of prize balls for winning in the winning opening 31" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + K15 x "Second operating port 34 18th parameter: K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning slot 31") "Number of prize balls" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the first actuation port 33" + K15 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second actuation port 34" ”) After that, the second output process is executed (step S1014). In the second output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1013 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, each piece of information to be output in the second output process is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, a history information storage area 125 where correspondence information indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode and start information are stored, and a correspondence relationship indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists during the period between the history information storage area 125 where the information and termination information are stored, the output 24a, general The number of balls entering each of the winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34 is calculated (step S1015). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode and start information are stored, and a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode and start information are stored. The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the termination information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode and start information are stored, and a correspondence relationship indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode. If there are multiple sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. Although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating that the mode is high-frequency support mode is stored, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 exists. If correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the system is in high-frequency support mode are not stored in the history information storage area 125 where , correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that it is in high-frequency support mode are stored All the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information is stored is treated as that in the high-frequency support mode.

After that, during the period in the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1015, the out exit 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operating opening 33 that occur when the front door frame 14 is in an open state. and the number of balls entering each of the second operating ports 34 (step S1016). The method of calculating the number of balls entered is the same as in step S1007, except that the period of high-frequency support mode specified in step S1015 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1015 and S1016 (step S1017). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls that occur while the front door frame 14 is open, calculated in step S1016, is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1015. Then, the following parameters are calculated using each number of balls entered after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1016 and the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1016 is defined as the number of balls entering K21, and the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 calculated in step S1015 is The difference between the number of balls entered into the general winning slot 31 calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K22, and the difference between the number of balls entered into the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls entered in the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1016. The difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1015 is defined as the number of entering balls K23, and the difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1016 and the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1015 is defined as the number of entering balls K23. The number K24 is defined as the number of balls entering the second operating port 34, and the difference between the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1016 and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1015 is defined as the number K25.
- 21st parameter: Total number of game balls paid out (K22 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the general winning opening 31" + K23 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K24 x "First operating opening 33 The ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")/(Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34) D11”)
・22nd parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general winning slot 31 K22/total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) ・23rd parameter: Game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 Ratio of total number of game balls entering K23/total number of game balls discharged from gaming area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) ・24th parameter: Total number of game balls entering first operating port 33 K24/ejecting from gaming area PA The ratio of the total number of game balls (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D22")
・25th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 K25/total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D23")
・26th parameter: D21 - (D22 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + D23 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")
Thereafter, third output processing is executed (step S1018). In the third output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1017 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, each piece of information to be output in the third output process is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. After that, clearing processing is executed (step S1019). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". This brings the history area 124 into an initialized state.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When a game ball enters any of the general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34, the game ball is paid out. The player plays the game while hoping that the game ball will land in the ball. In this configuration, the game ball enters any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter also referred to as the history target ball entering section). If this occurs, the corresponding history information will be stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. This makes it possible for the pachinko machine 10 to memorize and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering each history target ball entry section or the frequency of ball entry, and this managed information can be used. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters each history target ball entry section. Furthermore, since the history information is stored and held in the pachinko machine 10 itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information.

All the ball entry units that eject game balls from the gaming area PA are subject to storage processing of historical information and are subject to management using historical information. This makes it possible to manage the frequency of ball entry for any history target ball entry section using history information. Furthermore, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering each history target ball entry section to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA using the history information.

The history information includes RTC information that is information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball entered the history target ball entry section that triggered the storage of the history information. Thereby, by using the history information, it becomes possible to grasp in detail the history of the entry of game balls into the history target ball entry section.

The history memory 117 contains not only history information corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the history target ball entry section, but also history information indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and whether the game ball is in the high-frequency support mode. History information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open or not, and history information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open or not are stored. This makes it possible to distinguish between these situations and manage the manner in which the game ball enters the history target ball entry section.

It is possible to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device that is a device external to the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to read the history information with the reading device and use the read history information to analyze how the game ball enters the history target ball entry section.

The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 102, and the program can be read from the main ROM 64 by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to check whether the program is normal or not. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is outputted to the outside using the reading terminal 102 for outputting the program to the outside. This makes it possible to output history information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

It is specified whether the information to be outputted from the reading terminal 102 is a program or history information, and the information corresponding to the identification result is externally outputted through the reading terminal 102. As a result, in a configuration in which historical information is externally output using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting a program, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether the information to be externally output is the program or the historical information. The specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the reading terminal 102 is used also, it is possible to read only necessary information.

Based on the information received from the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, it is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is program information or history information. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the selection of information to be outputted from the outside from becoming complicated.

The MPU 62 includes a main ROM 64 that stores programs in advance, and includes a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 102 . This makes it possible to consolidate the signal paths to the reading terminal 102 within the MPU 62. Therefore, while making it difficult to make unauthorized access to the signal path to the reading terminal 102, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

The main side CPU 63 executes processing for causing a game ball to be paid out based on the entry of a game ball into any of the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34. A management side CPU 112 is provided separately from the management side CPU 112, and processes for storing history information in the history memory 117 are executed by the management side CPU 112. This makes it possible to manage the manner in which game balls enter each history target ball entry section while preventing the processing load on the main CPU 63 from increasing excessively.

The main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 transmits information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a to each buffer of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using the signal paths corresponding to the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. 122a to 122g. As a result, the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 corresponds to each buffer 122a to 122g (that is, each signal path), simplifying the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management CPU 112. It becomes possible to do so.

The main CPU 63 includes information corresponding to whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, information corresponding to whether the high frequency support mode is in progress, and information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is being opened. is transmitted to each of the buffers 122h to 122j of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using signal paths corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the type of information corresponding to each of these situations corresponds to each buffer 122h to 122j (that is, each signal path), simplifying the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management CPU 112. becomes possible.

The main CPU 63 transmits to the management CPU 112 correspondence relationship information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122j (that is, each signal path 118a to 118j) corresponds to. This eliminates the need to store the correspondence information in advance in the management IC 66. Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 . This allows the management IC 66 to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history target ball entry area in a situation where a game ball may enter the history target ball entry area. It becomes possible to do so.

Correspondence information is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the history target ball entry section. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting correspondence information is provided.

The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. As a result, each time the main CPU 63 transmits information on the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, information that enables the management IC 66 to specify the history target ball entry portion corresponding to the information to be transmitted. There is no need to provide it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information on the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

Information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102 by switching the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 from the LOW level to the HI level. In this case, the management CPU 112 can identify that the signal path corresponding to the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal without receiving correspondence information from the main CPU 63. . This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the transmission of correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 66 is provided with buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, the number of which is greater than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. It is being Thereby, even if the number of types of information increases or decreases depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to cope with this without changing the configuration regarding the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102, each piece of history information includes correspondence relationship information indicating the type of the history target ball entry section that corresponds to the history information. This makes it possible to specify how the game ball enters each history target ball entry section using the read history information.

In the management IC 66, by using the history information stored in the history memory 117, various parameters (1st to 8th, 11th to 18th, 21 to 26 parameters) are calculated. This makes it possible to externally output various parameters that are the results of calculations using history information.

Various parameters are calculated while excluding history information corresponding to a situation where the front door frame 14 is open. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state. In addition, various parameters are calculated corresponding to each of the opening/closing execution mode situation and the high frequency support mode situation. This allows the manager of the game hall and the like to understand the manner in which game balls enter the game according to each situation.

When various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing a clearing process for the history memory 117. As a result, an amount of history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 is stored in the history memory 117, and history information that should originally be stored is erased by overwriting. It is possible to make it less likely to occur.

When outputting various parameters to the reading terminal 102, history information stored in the history memory 117 is also output to the reading terminal 102. Thereby, when reading out various parameters and analyzing the manner in which the game ball enters the gaming area PA, it is possible to refer not only to the various parameters but also to the historical information that is the basis for calculating the various parameters.

The management CPU 112 calculates various parameters when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of calculating various parameters.

When the main CPU 63 identifies that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and output instruction information is sent from the main CPU 63, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters. , various parameters resulting from the calculation are outputted to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to output various parameters to a reading device outside the pachinko machine 10 based on instructions from the main CPU 63.

Whether or not the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is specified in the process executed by the main CPU 63 at the time of starting the supply of operating power, and the reading device is electrically connected. is specified, output instruction information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. As a result, various types of Parameter calculation and external output of various parameters as a result of the calculation are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the calculation results in a situation where a game ball may enter the history target ball entry section, and the processing load on the management IC 66 can be reduced. It is possible to reduce this.

In a configuration in which when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, a corresponding external output is performed through the external terminal board 97, history information is stored in the history memory 117. . As a result, by using the information outputted externally through the external terminal board 97, the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 and the frequency of entering the balls can be easily grasped, and the history By using the history information stored in the memory 117, it becomes possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls entering the history target ball entry section and the frequency of ball entry.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111, the type of the input signal is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66. This is different from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 in order to cause the management CPU 112 to specify the type of input signal is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. 2 signals are input to the third buffer 122c, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the fourth buffer 122d, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth signal is inputted, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is inputted to the seventh buffer 122g, and the output instruction signal is inputted to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is inputted as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is inputted as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i, Although the configuration is such that the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, the buffers to which these signals are input are different in this embodiment. Specifically, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input to the 13th buffer 122m as an opening/closing execution mode signal, and the signal corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is input to the 14th buffer 122n as a high-frequency support mode signal. , the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o as a door open signal.

An opening/closing execution mode signal is input to the 13th buffer 122m, a high frequency support mode signal is input to the 14th buffer 122n, a door opening signal is input to the 15th buffer 122o, and It was decided at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 inputs the output instruction signal to the 13th to 16th buffers 122m to 122p without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is possible to specify that each of the above-mentioned signals corresponding to each is input. On the other hand, the types of signals input to the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are determined by instructions from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. Similar to the first embodiment, the process for identifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the recognition process of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 7) as in the first embodiment.

First, the recognition output counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "12", which is the number of the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l whose signal types are to be recognized (step S1101). After that, output processing of an identification start signal is executed (step S1102). In the output processing, the respective output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the opening/closing execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are determined. By setting the signal to HI level, the output of the identification start signal is started. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

Thereafter, information on the number of outputs corresponding to the current value of the output counter for recognition in the main side RAM 65 is read from the main side ROM 64, and the read information on the number of outputs is set in the output number counter provided in the main side RAM 65 ( Step S1103). The output number counter is a counter for specifying the number of outputs of the type identification signal by the main CPU 63.

In this embodiment, when the management side CPU 112 is made to recognize the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to 12th buffer 122l, the number of prize balls set for the ball entering section corresponding to the type of signal is determined. The type identification signal is output the same number of times as . The management CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal has been received for each of the first buffer 122a to 122l, in the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. . In other words, the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l is grasped as the number of prize balls set for the ball entering section corresponding to the type of signal.

In step S1103, when the value of the recognition output counter is one of "12", "11", and "10", "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning hole 31 is set in the output number counter. . Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "9", "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "8", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operating port 33 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "7", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second operating port 34 is set in the output number counter. In addition, when the value of the recognition output counter is "6", even if the game ball enters the out port 24a although it corresponds to the out port 24a, the payout of the game ball will not be executed, so the output number counter will not be executed. Set "0" to "0". Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is one of "5" to "1", the corresponding ball entry part does not exist and is blank, so the output number counter is set to "0".

Thereafter, output processing of a start trigger signal is executed (step S1104). In the output process, output of the start trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to HI level. The period during which the first signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

Thereafter, on the condition that the value of the output number counter of the main side RAM 65 is not "0" (step S1105: YES), that is, on the condition that a value of 1 or more is set in the output number counter in step S1103, The process advances to step S1106. In step S1106, output processing of the type identification signal is executed. In the output process, output of the type identification signal is started by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to HI level. The period during which the second signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

Thereafter, the value of the output number counter of the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1107), and it is determined whether the value of the output number counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1108). If the value of the output count counter is 1 or more (step S1108: NO), the process returns to step S1106.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1105 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1108, output processing of an end trigger signal is executed (step S1109). In the output process, output of the termination trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to HI level. The period during which the third signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1110), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1111). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S1111: NO), the process returns to step S1103 and executes processing for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtraction by 1. do.

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S1111: YES), output processing of an identification end signal is executed (step S1112). In the output processing, the respective output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open/close execution mode signal input to the 13th buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the 14th buffer 122n are determined. By setting the signal to HI level, the output of the identification end signal is started. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

Next, the management processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

When the reception of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 is completed (step S1201: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S1202). Thereafter, on condition that a start trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), the process advances to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether a type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. If the type identification signal is being received (step S1204: YES), the value of the reception frequency counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1205). The reception frequency counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the number of times the type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. Note that the value of the reception frequency counter is cleared to "0" when an affirmative determination is made in step S1203.

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, or if the process in step S1205 is executed, it is determined whether a termination trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1206). If the termination trigger signal has not been received (step S1206: NO), the process returns to step S1204, and if the termination trigger signal has been received (step S1206: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S1207). In the correspondence setting process, the reception counter is set in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be set in the management side RAM 114 among the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. Store the value that has been set. In this case, "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning hole 31 is set in the first correspondence area 123a, second correspondence area 123b, and third correspondence area 123c, and "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning hole 31 is set in the fourth correspondence area 123d. is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first actuation port 33 is set to the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence relationship “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 is set in the area 123f. Further, "0" is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123g to 123l. Thereafter, the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1208).

If a negative determination is made in step S1203, or if the process in step S1208 is executed, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S1209). If the reception of the identification end signal has not been completed (step S1209: NO), the process returns to step S1203, and on the condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), the process from step S1204 onward is executed. Execute. If the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S1209: YES), the history setting process of step S1210 and the external output process of step S1211 are repeatedly executed.

FIG. 28 is a time chart showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l is stored in the correspondence memory 116. 28(a) shows a period when the output state of the first signal is at HI level, FIG. 28(b) shows a period when the output state of the second signal is at HI level, and FIG. 28(c) shows a period when the output state of the second signal is at HI level. ) shows the period when the output state of the third signal is at HI level, FIG. 28(d) shows the period when the output state of the signal during opening/closing execution mode is at HI level, and FIG. 28(e) shows the period when the output state of the signal is at HI level. FIG. 28(f) shows the period during which the output state of the signal is at HI level during the high frequency support mode, and FIG. 28(g) shows the timing when the value of the reception counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. 28(h) shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence relationship is executed. The timing at which the correspondence relationship setting process (step S1207) is executed by the management CPU 112 is shown.

By starting the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112, at the timing t1, the first signal , the output states of the opening/closing execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from LOW level to HI level. As a result, output of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at timing t2, the output states of the first signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t2, the management side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S1201 of the management process (FIG. 27), thereby entering the identification state as shown in FIG. 28(f).

Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t3 to timing t4 as shown in FIG. 28(a). As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(b), the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing t5 to the timing t7. As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management CPU 112 once. In this case, at timing t6, the value of the reception count counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1, as shown in FIG. 28(g).

Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t8 to timing t10, as shown in FIG. 28(c). As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at timing t9, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 28(h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "1" at the timing when the corresponding relationship setting process is executed, "1" is stored as the correspondence relationship information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the current setting target in the correspondence relationship memory 116. ” information is stored.

Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t11 to timing t12, as shown in FIG. 28(a). As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(b), the second The output state of the signal is maintained at HI level. As a result, each type identification signal is output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, the value of the reception count counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 at each of timing t14, timing t17, timing t20, and timing t23, as shown in FIG. 28(g).

Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t25 to timing t27, as shown in FIG. 28(c). As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at timing t26, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 28(h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "10" at the timing when the corresponding relationship setting process is executed, "10" is stored as the correspondence relationship information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the current setting target in the correspondence relationship memory 116. ” information is stored.

After that, at timing t28, as shown in FIGS. 28(c), 28(d), and 28(e), the output state of the third signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal becomes LOW. level is changed to HI level. As a result, output of an identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at timing t29, the output states of the third signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t29, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S1209 of the management process (FIG. 27), thereby canceling the identification state as shown in FIG. 28(f).

In addition, in this embodiment, since information on the number of prize balls is stored as correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes the prize ball corresponding to the entered ball part that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number of objects is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, if there are multiple types of ball entry parts with the same number of prize balls, it is not possible to distinguish between the ball entry parts in the history information. Specifically, since both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 have one prize ball, it is difficult to distinguish between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls for the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 may be made different. This makes it possible to distinguish between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the historical information even in a configuration in which historical information is stored as in the second embodiment.

Further, in this embodiment, in step S801 of the history setting process, the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to "15". As a result, all of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are subject to confirmation.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the output instruction signal but also the information corresponding to whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the information corresponding to whether the high frequency support mode is in progress, and the front door Regarding the information corresponding to whether the frame 14 is open or not, the management CPU 112 can identify that the signal path corresponds to this information without receiving the correspondence information from the main CPU 63. It has become. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a is information that requires the main CPU 63 to recognize the correspondence relationship between each information and each signal path 118a to 118g from the management CPU 112. Become. When the correspondence relationship information is to be recognized by the management side CPU 112, pulse signals of the same number as the number of prize balls corresponding to each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a are sent from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 using the second signal. is output to. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration regarding transmission of correspondence information.

<Third embodiment>
The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the timing at which calculations of various parameters using history information are executed. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 29 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in this embodiment. The management IC 66 is provided with a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment. These functions are similar to those in the first embodiment.

In addition to the above, the management IC 66 is also provided with a memory 131 for calculation results. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, when a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. Then, the calculated various parameters are sequentially stored in the calculation result memory 131. Various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

The trigger for calculating various parameters occurs before the timing at which the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to vary the timing at which various parameters are calculated and the timing at which they are externally output to the reading device, making it possible to distribute the processing load.

In addition, since a calculation result memory 131 is provided to store the calculation results of various parameters, it is possible to store not only various parameters for one calculation trigger, but also various parameters for multiple calculation triggers at once. It is possible to remember it. This makes it possible to reduce the time required to calculate various parameters at each calculation occasion.

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. 2 signals are input to the third buffer 122c, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the fourth buffer 122d, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth signal is inputted, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is inputted to the seventh buffer 122g, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is inputted to the eighth buffer 122h, and the ninth signal is inputted to the seventh buffer 122g. A signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the buffer 122i, a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

In this embodiment, in addition to the various signals described above, a calculation instruction signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o. The calculation instruction signal is a signal output from the main CPU 63 in order to provide the management CPU 112 with an opportunity to calculate various parameters. The input of the calculation instruction signal to the 15th buffer 122o is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, similar to the input of the output instruction signal to the 16th buffer 122p. The management side CPU 112 can specify that each of the above-mentioned signals corresponding to the 15th to 16th buffers 122o to 122p is inputted to the 15th to 16th buffers 122o to 122p without receiving the information. On the other hand, what types of signals are input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are determined by instructions from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. Similar to the first embodiment, the process for identifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started.

Next, a processing configuration for causing the management CPU 112 to execute calculations of various parameters in response to the occurrence of a calculation trigger will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing power outage information storage processing executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the power outage information storage process is executed in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

In the power outage information storage process, if a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power cutoff is received from the power outage monitoring board 67 (step S1301: YES), output processing of a calculation instruction signal is executed (step S1302). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o at the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at HI level for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level. Thereafter, in step S1303, after executing a power outage process, an infinite loop is created and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is completely stopped. In the power outage process, the power outage flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a power outage response process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the power outage response process is executed after the external output process in the management process (FIG. 18), and in the management process, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the process is executed in step S607. The history setting process in step S608, the external output process in step S608, and the power outage response process are repeatedly executed in this order.

In the power outage response process, if the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S1401: YES), in steps S1402 to S1406, the external output in the first embodiment is Similarly to steps S1002 to S1006 of the processing (FIG. 24), calculate the number of balls entering each of the out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34. . In addition, in step S1407, similarly to step S1007 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the number of each type of entering ball in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. Further, in step S1408, various parameters are calculated similarly to step S1008 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, and in step S1409, the external output processing in the first embodiment is performed. Similar to step S1009 of the process (FIG. 24), the total time is calculated. Then, information on the calculation result in step S1408 and information on the calculation result in step S1409 are written into the calculation result memory 131 (step S1410). In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, write the calculation result information so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. conduct. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

Thereafter, in step S1411, similarly to step S1011 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the number of entering balls of each type during the opening/closing execution mode is calculated, and in step S1412, the number of balls entered in the first Similarly to step S1012 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the embodiment, the number of various types of entering balls in the opening/closing execution mode and in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. Further, in step S1413, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as step S1013 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Then, information on the calculation result in step S1414 is written into the calculation result memory 131 (step S1414). In this case, information on the calculation results is written so as not to overwrite information on other calculation results already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

Thereafter, in step S1415, similarly to step S1015 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the number of balls entering each type during the high-frequency support mode is calculated, and in step S1416, the number of balls entered in the above-mentioned Similar to step S1016 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the number of balls entering each type in the high frequency support mode and in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. Further, in step S1417, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as step S1017 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Then, information on the calculation result in step S1417 is written into the calculation result memory 131 (step S1418). In this case, information on the calculation results is written so as not to overwrite information on other calculation results already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds. Thereafter, an infinite loop occurs, and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

When the output state of the output instruction signal from the main side CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S1501: YES), output processing of the calculation result is executed (step S1502). In the output processing, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. In this case, if only the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of one calculation trigger are stored in the calculation result memory 131, only the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of the one calculation trigger are stored in the reading device. If various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of multiple calculation triggers are stored in the calculation result memory 131, the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of the multiple calculation triggers are read by the reading device. .

Thereafter, history information output processing is executed (step S1503). In the output process, all the history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, various kinds of history information stored in the history area 124 are read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. By outputting not only the various calculation results but also the historical information in this way, it becomes possible for the operator using the reading device to perform detailed analysis of the various calculation results.

After that, clearing processing is executed (step S1504). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". This brings the history area 124 into an initialized state. In addition, in the clearing process, all areas of the calculation result memory 131 are cleared to "0". This brings the calculation result memory 131 into an initialized state.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. This makes it possible to manage various parameters on a business day basis.

When the main CPU 63 determines that the supply of operating power is to be stopped, the output state of the calculation instruction signal is changed to HI level, so that the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. This allows the management CPU 112 to calculate various parameters based on instructions from the main CPU 63.

Various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are sequentially written into the calculation result memory 131. This makes it possible to accumulate various parameters in the management IC 66, and when reading various parameters with a reading device, it becomes possible to read out various parameters for multiple business days at once.

When various parameters are written into the calculation result memory 131, information that makes it possible to specify when the various parameters were calculated is written in the calculation result memory 131 along with the various parameters. This makes it possible to analyze various parameter information while grasping when various parameters were calculated.

It should be noted that the history memory 117 may be cleared to "0" when a calculation trigger occurs and the calculation results of various parameters corresponding thereto are written into the calculation result memory 131. This makes it difficult for new history information to be written into the history memory 117 in a situation where the maximum number of history information that can be stored has already been stored in the history memory 117.

Alternatively, the information to be externally outputted to the reading device may be only information on various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131, and the history information stored in the history memory 117 may not be outputted externally. . This makes it possible to suppress the amount of information output to the outside.

<Fourth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the third embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the power outage response process executed by the management CPU 112. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the third embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a power outage response process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S1601: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S1602). In the various calculation processes, steps S1402 to S1409, steps S1411 to S1413, and steps S1415 to S1417 of the power outage response process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether a predetermined parameter among the various parameters calculated in step S1602 is within the reference range (step S1603). in particular,
- Seventh parameter: (K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "General "Number of prize balls for winning into the winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34 8th parameter: K3 × "Number of prize balls received in the special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 × "Number of prize balls received in the general winning slot 31") Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the first actuation port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second actuation port 34 '') are set as parameters to be determined whether or not they are within the reference range. If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, the predetermined parameter is determined to be within the reference range, and an affirmative determination is made in step S1603.

Note that the predetermined parameters are not limited to the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter, and instead of or in addition to these, other parameters may be set as the predetermined parameters. for example,
- Second parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entering the general prize opening 31 K2/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) may be configured as a predetermined parameter. . In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which, for example, when the value of the second parameter is 0.1 or more and 0.2 or less, it is determined that the predetermined parameter is within the reference range. Alternatively, only the predetermined parameters to be determined in step S1603 may be calculated in the various calculation processes in step S1602.

If the predetermined parameter is not within the reference range (step S1603: NO), the various parameters calculated in step S1602 are written into the calculation result memory 131 (step S1604). In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, write the calculation result information so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. conduct. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

On the other hand, if the predetermined parameter is within the reference range (step S1603: YES), the process of step S1604 is not executed. As a result, only various parameters when a predetermined parameter is not within the reference range are written into the calculation result memory 131. Therefore, when an abnormal situation occurs, the history thereof can be left in the calculation result memory 131, and the storage capacity required for the calculation result memory 131 can be suppressed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, or if the process in step S1604 is executed, a process to clear the history memory 117 is executed (step S1605). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". This brings the history area 124 into an initialized state. After the process in step S1605 is executed, an infinite loop occurs and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, it is determined whether the contents of various calculated parameters are included in the reference range or not, and only the various parameters determined not to be included in the reference range are stored in the calculation result memory 131. will be written to. This makes it possible to suppress the amount of various parameters to be stored in the calculation result memory 131, and it becomes possible to suppress the required storage capacity in the calculation result memory 131.

<Fifth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the third embodiment in the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management CPU 112 to execute calculations of various parameters. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the third embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 35(a) is a flowchart showing the trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the trigger identification process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 20).

It is determined whether a game ball enters any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S1701). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, an increment process is performed for a ball entry counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S1702). In this addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated in this processing round. The identification is made based on the number of times step S705 is executed in the management output process (FIG. 20). Then, the number of the specified game balls is added to the ball entry counter.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of "500" (step S1703). If it is "500" or more (step S1703: YES), subtraction processing of the ball entry counter in the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S1704). In the subtraction process, "500" is subtracted from the value of the ball entry counter. Thereafter, output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S1705). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o at the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at HI level for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

FIG. 35(b) is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the calculation process is a process that is executed instead of the power outage response process in the third embodiment. Therefore, the arithmetic processing is configured to be executed after the external output processing in the management processing (FIG. 18), and in the management processing, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), step S607 is executed. The history setting process, the external output process of step S608, and the arithmetic process are repeatedly executed in this order.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S1801: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S1802). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power outage response process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112. In this case, since various parameters are calculated every time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, a game ball enters the game area PA within one business day. It becomes possible to manage aspects in detail.

In addition, since the configuration is such that various parameters are calculated based on whether the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters can be calculated on the condition that the game is being executed. is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent various parameter calculations from being performed meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not being played continuously.

<Sixth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fifth embodiment in the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management CPU 112 to execute calculations of various parameters. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the fifth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the trigger identification process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 20).

It is determined whether a game ball enters any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S1901). If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the continuation counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S1902). The continuation counter is a period during which a game ball does not enter any of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. This is a counter for specifying.

If the value of the continuation counter after adding 1 is equal to or greater than the stop reference value (step S1903: YES), the time measurement flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S1904). If the game ball does not enter any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 for 5 seconds, an affirmative determination is made in step S1903. The stopping reference value is set so that Further, the time measurement flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not to measure time to specify the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level. When the value of the time measurement flag is "0", the time is not measured, and when the value of the time measurement flag is "1", the time is measured. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the time measurement flag is set to "1" (step S1905).

If a negative determination is made in step S1903, if the process of step S1904 is executed, or if the process of step S1905 is executed, the condition is that the time measurement flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". Step S1906: YES), the value of the measurement counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S1907). The measurement counter is a counter used to measure the time to specify the timing to switch the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level.

It is determined whether the value of the measurement counter after adding 1 is greater than or equal to the instruction reference value (step S1908). The instruction reference value is set so that an affirmative determination is made in step S1908 when the time measured by the measurement counter reaches 10 hours. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1908, the value of the measurement counter is cleared to "0" (step S1909), and a calculation instruction signal output process is executed (step S1910). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o at the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at HI level for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, various parameters are calculated each time a predetermined period elapses, so it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of various parameters simply by adjusting the predetermined period. Become. In this case, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped in a situation where no game is being played, and when the game round is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude a situation where a game is not being played from the calculation targets of various parameters, and it becomes possible to appropriately derive various parameters in a situation where a game is being played.

Note that instead of the configuration in which whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed is measured using a measurement counter, a configuration may be adopted in which it is measured using the RTC 115.

<Seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management CPU 112 to execute calculations of various parameters is different from the first embodiment, and the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the calculation trigger has occurred. This is performed independently by the management CPU 112 instead of by the CPU 112 on the management side. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the calculation process is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S812 in the history setting process (FIG. 21).

Corresponds to the occurrence of a game ball entering any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 in the history setting process of this processing time. It is determined whether or not the history information to be stored has been stored in the history memory 117 (step S2001). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, an increment process is performed for the ball entry counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S2002). In this addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated in this processing round. This is determined based on the number of times that history information corresponding to the occurrence of a game ball being entered is stored in the history setting process. Then, the number of the specified game balls is added to the ball entry counter.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of "500" (step S2003). If it is "500" or more (step S2003: YES), subtraction processing of the ball entry counter in the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S2004). In the subtraction process, "500" is subtracted from the value of the ball entry counter. After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S2005). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power outage response process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112. In this case, since various parameters are calculated every time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, a game ball enters the game area PA within one business day. It becomes possible to manage aspects in detail.

In addition, since the configuration is such that various parameters are calculated based on whether the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters can be calculated on the condition that the game is being executed. is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent various parameter calculations from being performed meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not being played continuously.

In addition, the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA is measured by the management CPU 112, and the management CPU 112 determines whether the total number is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number. In other words, the timing for calculating various parameters is independently determined by the management CPU 112. This eliminates the need for the main CPU 63 to execute processing for determining the triggers for calculation of various parameters, so that the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

<Eighth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

In this embodiment, as in the third embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a memory 131 for calculation results (see FIG. 29). When a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117, and writes the various parameters resulting from the calculation into the calculation result memory 131. In addition, in this embodiment, a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has started, a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has ended, a signal indicating that the high-frequency support mode has started, and a signal indicating that the high-frequency support mode is A signal indicating that opening of the front door frame 14 has been completed, a signal indicating that opening of the front door frame 14 has started, and a signal indicating that opening of the front door frame 14 has been completed are individually transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. sent to.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the history setting process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112.

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2101). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blankness is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is identified, and the number of correspondence areas is identified. Set the information of the number in the confirmation target counter. In this embodiment, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g store information indicating that they correspond to any of the ball entry sections, and the eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode starts. Corresponding information is stored, the ninth correspondence area 123i stores information corresponding to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the tenth correspondence area 123j stores information corresponding to the start of the high-frequency support mode. The information corresponding to the end of the high-frequency support mode is stored in the eleventh correspondence area 123k, and the information corresponding to the start of opening of the front door frame 14 is stored in the twelfth correspondence area 123l. , information corresponding to the end of opening of the front door frame 14 is stored in the thirteenth correspondence area 123m. Therefore, in step S2101, the check target counter is set to "13".

Thereafter, it is checked whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2102). Note that when the value of the counter to be checked is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "10", the 10th buffer 122j is to be checked for numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is to be checked for numerical information. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2103). Then, writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2104). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the writing target is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S2103 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current check target counter value, and written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Note that when the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o is the target for reading the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "10", the 10th correspondence area 123j is the correspondence relation information read target, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence relation. The information is to be read.

Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the target pointer (step S2105). Specifically, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read out, and 1 is added to the numerical information. Then, it is determined whether the pointer information after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124 (step S2106).

If the maximum value is exceeded (step S2106: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2107). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S1002 to S1009, steps S1011 to S1013, and steps S1015 to S1017 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, various parameters and total time information of the calculation results are written into the calculation result memory 131 (step S2108). In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, write the calculation result information so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. conduct. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

Thereafter, status information inheritance processing is executed (step S2109). In the handover process, based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, it is determined whether the current state is in the opening/closing execution mode, whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress, and whether the front door frame 14 is open. Determine whether or not. Then, the status information is written to the management side RAM 114.

Thereafter, clearing processing of the history memory 117 is executed (step S2110). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". This brings the history area 124 into an initialized state. Further, after executing the clearing process, the state information written to the management side RAM 114 in step S2109 is read. If state information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is stored, history information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the target pointer information. At the same time as writing, 1 is added to the pointer information to be written. In addition, if status information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in effect is stored, history information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in effect is written in the history information storage area corresponding to the target pointer information. 125, and 1 is added to the pointer information to be written. In addition, if status information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is stored, history information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is written corresponding to the pointer information targeted for writing. It is written into the history information storage area 125, and the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1.

If a negative determination is made in step S2102, if a negative determination is made in step S2106, or if the process of step S2110 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S2111). Then, it is determined whether the value of the check target counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S2112). If the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S2112: NO), the process from step S2102 onwards is executed for the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

According to the embodiment described in detail above, various parameters are calculated when the number of history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit that can be stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which history information exceeds the upper limit that can be stored in the history memory 117 and becomes a storage target, making it impossible to accurately calculate various parameters.

Furthermore, when various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized and all history information is erased. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has already been subjected to calculations of various parameters from becoming a calculation target of various parameters again.

Furthermore, even if the history memory 117 is initialized, the state information inheritance process is executed. This makes it possible to appropriately manage state information.

<Ninth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of the history memory 117 and the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. First to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, and 144a to 144o are provided in each of these areas 141 to 144, respectively. The first counters 141a to 144a of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from LOW level to HI level. The second counters 141b to 144b of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from LOW level to HI level. The third counters 141c to 144c of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fourth counters 141d to 144d of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifth counters 141e to 144e of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from LOW level to HI level. The sixth counters 141f to 144f of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f has changed from LOW level to HI level. The seventh counters 141g to 144g of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from LOW level to HI level. The eighth counters 141h to 144h of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from LOW level to HI level. The ninth counters 141i to 144i of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from LOW level to HI level. The tenth counters 141j to 144j of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from LOW level to HI level. The eleventh counters 141k to 144k of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has changed from LOW level to HI level. The twelfth counters 141l to 144l of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from LOW level to HI level. The thirteenth counters 141m to 144m of the respective areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourteenth counters 141n to 144n of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifteenth counters 141o to 144o of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

However, the objects to be measured using the first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, and 144a to 144o are the output opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operation. These are the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g into which signals corresponding to the result of the ball entering either the opening 33 or the second operating opening 34 are input. Therefore, signals corresponding to status information such as whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress, and whether the front door frame 14 is open or not are input to the eighth to eighth channels. The 10 buffers 122h to 122j are excluded from the above measurement targets. The determination as to whether or not it is a measurement target is made based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the history setting process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112.

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2201). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blankness is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is identified, and the number of correspondence areas is identified. Set the information of the number in the confirmation target counter. As already explained in this pachinko machine 10, since information other than information indicating blankness is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j, "10" is set in the check target counter in step S2201. do.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the buffers 122a to 122o corresponding to the current counters to be checked are buffers to which the status information signal is input (step S2202). Specifically, in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in effect, and It is determined whether any of the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, a state information setting process is executed (step S2203). In this setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress switches from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the first state indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is sent to the management side. The information on the first state is stored in the RAM 114, and when the output state of the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the first state is erased from the management side RAM 114. In addition, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the second state indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is stored in the management side RAM 114. When the output state of the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the second state is erased from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the 10th signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the third state indicating that the front door frame 14 is open. is stored in the management side RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the third state is erased from the management side RAM 114.

If a negative determination is made in step S2202, the buffer is stored in one of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o that corresponds to the value of the current check target counter and into which a signal of information different from the status information is input. By checking whether the numerical information displayed has been changed from "0" to "1", it can be determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from LOW level to HI level. It is determined whether or not (step S2204). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, addition processing of the corresponding total counter is executed (step S2205). In the addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth total counters 141a to 141o in the total area 141 of the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 141e for totaling will be the target of addition, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first counter 141a for totaling will be the target of addition. .

Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode (step S2206). If the state is the first state (step S2206: YES), addition processing of the counter for the corresponding first state is executed (step S2207). In this addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth counters 142a to 142o for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 142e for the first state becomes the addition target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first counter 142a for the first state becomes the addition target. It is subject to addition.

Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether it is in the high-frequency support mode (step S2208). In the case of the second state (step S2208: YES), addition processing of the counter for the corresponding second state is executed (step S2209). In this addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth counters 143a to 143o for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 143e for the second state becomes the addition target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first counter 143a for the second state becomes the addition target. It is subject to addition.

Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether the third state is reached, that is, whether the front door frame 14 is open (step S2210). If the state is the third state (step S2210: YES), addition processing of the counter for the corresponding third state is executed (step S2211). In this addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth counters 144a to 144o for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 144e for the third state becomes the addition target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first counter 144a for the third state becomes the addition target. It is subject to addition.

If the process of step S2203 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S2204, if a negative determination is made in step S2210, or if the process of step S2211 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management side RAM 114 is set to 1. Subtract (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether the value of the check target counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S2213). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2213: NO), the process from step S2202 onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the entry history of game balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is set as described above. Rather than being stored as history information as in the first embodiment, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball has been detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

Since the information is stored as information on the number of times a game ball is detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, in the external output process (FIG. 24) in this embodiment, the output port 24a such as step S1002 is stored. A process of calculating the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 such as step S1004, a process of calculating the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 such as step S1005. The process of calculating and the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34, such as step S1006, become unnecessary. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

In addition, in the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the general winning hole 31 such as step S1003, the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c are all in the general winning hole. 31, it is necessary to perform a process of summing the values of the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c. Furthermore, it is not possible to distinguish the number of balls that enter the ball in a situation where the front door frame 14 is open during the opening/closing execution mode from the number of balls that enter the ball in other situations. Therefore, in the external output process (FIG. 24) in this embodiment, the process of step S1012 is not executed. Similarly, it is not possible to distinguish the number of balls that enter the system in a situation where the front door frame 14 is open during the high-frequency support mode from the number of balls that enter the ball that occurs in other situations. Therefore, in the external output process (FIG. 24) in this embodiment, the process of step S1016 is not executed.

<Tenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the storage means in which history information is stored. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 41 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the MPU 62 in this embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I/F 101, and a reading terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. Further, the management IC 66 is provided with a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, and a management RAM 114, as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117. Instead, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131 as in the third embodiment. Since the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117, history information is not stored in the management IC 66 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the entry history of balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is stored in the main RAM 65. In other words, the main RAM 65, in which information necessary for executing a program in the main CPU 63 is temporarily stored, is also used as a memory for storing ball entry history. The management IC 66 can access the main side RAM 65 through the management side I/F 111, and when an opportunity to calculate various parameters occurs, it accesses the main side RAM 65 and reads out the ball entry history. Various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history. The calculated various parameters are stored in the calculation result memory 131. When a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, various parameters are provided to the reading device from the calculation result memory 131, but the ball entry history stored in the main side RAM 65 is not provided to the reading device. .

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing ball entry detection processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the ball entry detection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

When it is confirmed that the situation has changed from the situation where the information of “0” is stored to the situation where the information of “1” is stored for the 0th bit D0, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a It is determined that three game balls have been detected (step S2301: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2302). The general prize winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the general winning hole 31 as a ball entering history. The value of the general winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. By the way, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the general winning counter will not change even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Memory is retained. Thereafter, the value of the 10 award balls counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2303).

When it is confirmed that the first bit D1 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a It is determined that three game balls have been detected (step S2304: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2305). Thereafter, the value of the 10 award balls counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2306).

When it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has changed from the situation where the information of "0" is stored to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a detects the state of "1". It is determined that three game balls have been detected (step S2307: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2308). Thereafter, the value of the 10 award balls counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2309).

When it is confirmed that the third bit D3 has changed from the situation where information of "0" is stored to the situation where information of "1" is stored, one game is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that a ball has been detected (step S3210: YES). In this case, the special electric winning flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2311). Further, the value of the special electric winning prize counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2312). The special electric winning prize counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 as a ball entering history. The value of the special electric prize winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 with the reading device. By the way, backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, so even if the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state, the value of the special electric winning counter will not change. Memory is retained. Thereafter, the value of the 15 prize balls counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2313).

When it is confirmed that the fourth bit D4 has changed from the state where the information of "0" is stored to the state where the information of "1" is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a detects the state of "1". It is determined that three game balls have been detected (step S2314: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2315). Further, the value of the first operation counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2316). The first operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the first operation port 33 as a ball entry history. The value of the first operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 with the reading device. . By the way, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the first operation counter will not change even if the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state. is retained in memory. Thereafter, the value of the one prize ball counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2317).

When it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has changed from the state where the information of "0" is stored to the state where the information of "1" is stored, the second operating port detection sensor 47a detects the state of "1". It is determined that three game balls have been detected (step S2318: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2319). Further, the value of the second operation counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2320). The second operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 as a ball entry history. The value of the second operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 with the reading device. . By the way, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the second operation counter will not change even if the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state. is retained in memory. Thereafter, the value of the one prize ball counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2321).

When it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the output detection sensor 48a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S2322: YES). In this case, the value of the out counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2323). The out counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the out port 24a as a ball entry history. The value of the out counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 with the reading device. By the way, backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, so even if the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state, the value of the out counter will not be memorized. Retained.

When it is confirmed that the seventh bit D7 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the gate detection sensor 49a detects one game. It is determined that a ball has been detected (step S2324: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2325).

By executing the ball entry detection process as described above, the entry history of balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is determined by each ball entering section. The number of balls entered is stored in the main side RAM 65. As a result, each time a ball enters any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a signal is sent from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112. No need to output. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration for outputting signals from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112.

In this embodiment, when a calculation trigger occurs, the management side CPU 112 reads the number of balls that entered the general winning hole 31 from the general winning counter in the main side RAM 65, and reads the number of balls that entered the general winning hole 31 from the special winning prize counter in the main side RAM 65 to the special electric winning prize device 32. Read the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 from the first operating counter of the main side RAM 65, read the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 from the second operating counter of the main side RAM 65, The number of balls entering the out port 24a is read from the out counter in the main side RAM 65. Then, the first to eighth parameters described in the first embodiment are calculated using each of the read numbers of entering balls. However, the number of each entering ball is not measured while distinguishing between the number of entering balls when the front door frame 14 is open and the number of entering balls when the front door frame 14 is closed. Therefore, the first to eighth parameters are calculated including the number of balls that enter the ball when the front door frame 14 is open. In addition, each number of balls entering during the opening/closing execution mode and each number of balls entering during the high-frequency support mode are not measured individually, so the first to 18th parameters and the 21st parameter described in the first embodiment are ~The 26th parameter is not calculated. The calculated first to eighth parameters are written into the calculation result memory 131. Then, when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, all parameters currently written in the calculation result memory 131 are provided to the reading device. At this time, the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to "0".

Note that the management IC 66 does not access the main RAM 65 independently, but the information on the number of balls entered, which is stored as the entry history in the main RAM 65, is transmitted to the management IC 66 under transfer control by the main CPU 63. It is also possible to have a configuration in which In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 from accessing the main RAM 65 at the same time.

<Eleventh embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the main control board 61, the type of signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112, and the way the ball entry history is stored in each ball entry section. ing. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 43 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control board 61 in this embodiment. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62 as in the first embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I/F 101, and a reading terminal 102 as in the first embodiment. Further, the management IC 66 is provided with a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, unlike the first embodiment. Also. The main control board 61 is provided with a notification light emitting section 151 in addition to the MPU 62 . The notification light emitting section 151 is directly controlled to emit light by the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 can access the history memory 117 of the management IC 66, and calculates various parameters using information about the history of ball entry into each ball entry section read from the history memory 117. Then, the light emitting state of the notification light emitting section 151 is controlled according to the contents of the various calculated parameters. The notification light emitting unit 151 is housed in the accommodation space of the board box 60a of the main controller 60, but the board box 60a is formed transparent and the light emitting state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is not visible outside the board box 60a. A notification light emitting unit 151 is provided so that visual confirmation can be made from the outside. As a result, by opening the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 and making it possible to visually check the main control device 60, the notification light emitting section 151 can be opened without the need for opening the board box 60a. It becomes possible to visually confirm the light emitting state of the light.

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the second buffer 122b receives a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. A signal is input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is inputted as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is inputted as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i, Although the configuration is such that the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input as the tenth signal to the tenth buffer 122j, in this embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and the front A signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is not input to the input port 121. In other words, signals related to ball entry history are not input to the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o.

The types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are determined by receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. It is specified by the management CPU 112. Similar to the first embodiment, the process for identifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started. On the other hand, it is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 outputs the output to the 16th buffer 122p without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is possible to specify that an instruction signal is input.

FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o. The first buffer counter 152a stores information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from a LOW level to a HI level. The second buffer counter 152b stores information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from LOW level to HI level. The third buffer counter 152c stores information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fourth buffer counter 152d stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifth buffer counter 152e stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from a LOW level to a HI level. The sixth buffer counter 152f stores information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from LOW level to HI level. The seventh buffer counter 152g stores information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from LOW level to HI level. The eighth buffer counter 152h stores information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from LOW level to HI level. The ninth buffer counter 152i stores information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from a LOW level to a HI level. The tenth buffer counter 152j stores information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from LOW level to HI level. The eleventh buffer counter 152k stores information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is changed from a LOW level to a HI level. The twelfth buffer counter 152l stores information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from LOW level to HI level. The 13th buffer counter 152m stores information on the number of times the output state of the 13th signal input to the 13th buffer 122m is changed from LOW level to HI level. The 14th buffer counter 152n stores information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 122n is changed from LOW level to HI level. The 15th buffer counter 152o stores information on the number of times the output state of the 15th signal input to the 15th buffer 122o is changed from LOW level to HI level.

However, the objects to be measured using the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. These are the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g into which signals corresponding to the result of the ball entering the corner are input. Therefore, the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o are excluded from the measurement targets. The determination as to whether or not it is a measurement target is made based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 18).

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2401). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blankness is stored is identified, and the number of correspondence areas is identified. Set the information of the number in the confirmation target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, as already explained, information other than the information indicating blankness is stored in the first to seventh reception related areas 123a to 123j, so in step S2401, the counter to be checked is set to "7". do.

Thereafter, it is checked whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2402). Note that when the value of the counter to be checked is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is to be checked for numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first buffer 122a is to be checked for numerical information. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2402, addition processing for the corresponding buffer counters 152a to 152o is executed (step S2403). In this addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth buffer counter 152e is to be added, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first buffer counter 152a is to be added.

If a negative determination is made in step S2402, or if the process in step S2403 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S2404). Then, it is determined whether the value of the check target counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S2405). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2405: NO), the process from step S2402 onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the entry history of game balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is set as described above. Rather than being stored as history information as in the first embodiment, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball has been detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing external output processing in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2501: YES), the output target counters provided in the management RAM 114 include the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152a. 152o, the number of counters to which count information is output is set in the management CPU 112 (step S2502). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blankness is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is identified, and the number of correspondence areas is identified. Set the information of the number in the confirmation target counter. In this embodiment, as already explained, since information other than information indicating blankness is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, "7" is set in the output target counter in step S2502. .

Thereafter, the correspondence information stored in the area corresponding to the current output target counter value among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is read out (step S2503), and the history The number information stored in the counter corresponding to the current output target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o in the memory 117 is read out (step S2504). In this case, when the value of the output target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o becomes the target of reading the correspondence information, and the n-th buffer counter 152a to 152o reads the number of times information. Targeted. For example, if the value of the output target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e becomes the target for reading the correspondence information, the fifth buffer counter 152e becomes the target for reading the number information, and the value of the output target counter becomes the target for reading the correspondence information. If it is "1", the first correspondence area 123a becomes the object of reading the correspondence information, and the first buffer counter 152a becomes the object of reading the number information.

After that, information output processing is executed (step S2505). In the information output process, a combination of the correspondence information read in step S2503 and the number of times information read in step S2504 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads the number of times information regarding the correspondence information that is currently being output.

Thereafter, the value of the output target counter in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S2506). Then, it is determined whether the value of the output target counter after being subtracted by 1 is "0" (step S2507). If the value of the output target counter is 1 or more (step S2507: NO), the processes from step S2503 onwards are executed for the output target corresponding to the new output target counter value. Note that when an affirmative determination is made in step S2507, the values of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are cleared to "0".

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the parameter management process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the parameter management process is executed after the management output process of step S219 is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

First, it is determined whether an opportunity to calculate various parameters has occurred (step S2601). The calculation trigger is when the parameter management process is executed for the first time after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and similarly to the fifth embodiment, the output opening 24a, the general prize opening 31, and the special prize winning This occurs every time the total number of game balls entering the device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 exceeds 500, which is the trigger reference number. Since the first time the parameter management process is executed after the supply of operating power is started is set as the calculation trigger, various parameters can be calculated by turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10 and then turning it on again. It becomes possible to easily generate an opportunity. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, notifications corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters are executed as described later. It becomes possible to grasp the manner in which the game ball enters the ball. In addition, by configuring a configuration in which a calculation trigger occurs every time the total number of game balls entering the game reaches the trigger standard number of 500 or more, it is possible to finely manage the manner in which game balls enter the game area PA. becomes.

When a calculation trigger occurs (step S2601: YES), the ball entry history is read from the counter that is the storage target of the ball entry history among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o of the history memory 117. Specifically, the numerical information of the first to seventh buffer counters 152a to 152g is read. In this case, the main CPU 63 is able to recognize the buffer counters 152a to 152o from which the ball entry history is read based on the program and data stored in the main ROM 64.

After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S2603). In the various calculation processes, various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history read out in step S2602 and information on the number of prize balls corresponding to the ball entry history. The main side CPU 63 uses the program and data stored in the main side ROM 64 so that each ball entry history read out in step S2602 is set to the out hole 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the first operating hole 33. It is possible to specify which one of the two operating ports 34 corresponds to, and it is also possible to specify information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each ball entry history read in step S2602. .

Specifically regarding the various parameters calculated in step S2603,
- Seventh parameter: (K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "General "Number of prize balls for winning into the winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34 8th parameter: K3 × "Number of prize balls received in the special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 × "Number of prize balls received in the general winning slot 31") Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the first actuation port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second actuation port 34 ”) is calculated.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the various calculated parameters are within the first range (step S2604). If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, the calculated various parameters are determined to be within the first range, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2604. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2604, a first notification state setting process is executed (step S2605). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to enter the first notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting section 151 emits blue light.

If a negative determination is made in step S2604, it is determined whether the various calculated parameters are within the second range (step S2606). If only one of the conditions that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 or the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the various calculated parameters 2 range, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2606. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, a second notification state setting process is executed (step S2607). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to enter the second notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting section 151 emits yellow light.

If a negative determination is made in step S2606, it means that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. In this case, a third notification state setting process is executed (step S2608). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to enter the third notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting section 151 emits red light.

The light emitting state set in step S2605, step S2607, or step S2608 is changed until a new notification state is set for the notification light emitting unit 151, or the supply of operating power to the notification light emitting unit 151 is stopped. Continue until. Furthermore, since the notification state of the notification light emitting section 151 is stored and held in the main side RAM 65 and backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65, the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is stopped and the notification state of the notification light emitting section 151 is stored and held. 151 is once turned off, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed, the light emitting state corresponds to the type of notification state information stored in the main RAM 65. Light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 is executed.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The entry history of game balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is stored as history information as in the first embodiment. Instead, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball is detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

A notification light emitting unit 151 is provided to notify contents corresponding to various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112. As a result, the contents corresponding to various parameters are notified by the pachinko machine 10 itself, so the game hall manager etc. do not have to read out the information stored in the history memory 117. It becomes possible to grasp the manner in which the ball enters the ball.

The main control board 61 housed in the board box 60a is provided with a notification light emitting section 151 together with the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the MPU 62 and the notification light emitting section 151.

Calculations of various parameters and light emission control of the notification light emitting section 151 are executed not by the management CPU 112 but by the main CPU 63. This makes it possible to increase the reliability of the notification content in the notification light emitting section 151.

When the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the first range, the first notification state is entered, and when the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the second range, the second notification state is entered, and the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the second range. A third notification state is entered when the device does not correspond to either the first range or the second range. In other words, the various parameters are not reported as they are, but the content corresponding to the range in which the various parameters are included is reported. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification light emitting section 151 from becoming too large, and it becomes possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification light emitting section 151.

Note that even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the power supply to the notification light emitting unit 151 is continued, so that immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. A configuration may be adopted in which the light emitting state in is maintained. In this case, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, by checking the notification light emitting unit 151, it is possible to understand the manner in which the game ball enters the game area PA. .

In addition, instead of this configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the notification light emitting section 151 is turned off, but when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, Alternatively, the notification light emitting section 151 may be controlled to emit light so as to be in a light emitting state corresponding to the results of various parameters calculated before the supply of operating power is stopped. In this case, for example, by checking the notification light emitting unit 151 in the gaming hall before the start of business, it is possible to grasp the state of ball entry on the immediately preceding business day.

The notification means for notifying the calculation results of various parameters is not limited to the notification light emitting section 151, and may be a display device having a display surface such as the symbol display device 41, and the speaker section 54. It may be. Further, a configuration may also be adopted in which signals corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters are externally outputted to the hall computer HC of the game hall through the external terminal board 97.

The special figure display section 37a of the special figure unit 37 or the ordinary figure display section 38a of the ordinary figure unit 38 may also have a function as the notification light emitting section 151. For example, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, various parameters are calculated, and depending on whether the calculation result is included in the first range, second range, or other range as in the above embodiment, A configuration may also be adopted in which notification corresponding to the calculation result is executed on the special figure display section 37a or the regular figure display section 38a immediately after the start of supply of operating power. In this case, the notification may be configured to end when a condition for starting the variable display of the symbol in the special symbol display section 37a or a condition for starting a variable display of the symbol in the regular symbol display section 38a is satisfied. It may be configured such that the process is temporarily interrupted when the start condition for the variable display is satisfied, and resumed when the variable display of the pattern is completed. According to this configuration, it becomes possible to use the special figure display section 37a or the regular figure display section 38a as a notification means for notifying the manner in which the game ball enters the game area PA.

The notification light emitting section 151 may be provided at a position where it can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 when the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are closed. For example, the notification light emitting part 151 may be provided at a position behind the pachinko machine 10 from the window panel 52 and visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. In this case, it becomes possible to check the notification contents corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters without requiring an opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14.

<Twelfth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for providing information on each ball entry result to the management IC 66. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a signal path for inputting the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

The detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. In addition, the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. In addition, the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. Further, the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is inputted to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. Further, the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. Furthermore, the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

A first branch route SL21 is formed so as to branch from a midway position of the first signal route SL11, and the first branch route SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a second branch route SL22 is formed so as to branch from a midway position of the second signal route SL12, and the second branch route SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a third branch route SL23 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the third signal route SL13, and the third branch route SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fourth branch route SL24 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fourth signal route SL14, and the fourth branch route SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fifth branch route SL25 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fifth signal route SL15, and the fifth branch route SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a sixth branch route SL26 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the sixth signal route SL16, and the sixth branch route SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a seventh branch route SL27 is formed so as to branch from a midway position of the seventh signal route SL17, and the seventh branch route SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

With the above configuration, the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without intervening processing by the main CPU 63. As a result, the main side CPU 63 executes a process for making the management side CPU 112 recognize the ball entry results of the out hole 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34. Since there is no need to do this, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63.

Further, the branch points of each of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from each of the signal paths SL11 to SL17 exist within the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to access the branch point and each branch route SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and prevents fraudulent activity in which an abnormal ball entry result is input only to the management IC 66. .

<Thirteenth embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 was provided with the management IC 66, but in this embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided. Instead, the main CPU 63 executes processing for managing the ball entry history into each ball entry section 24a, 31-34. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 50 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control device 60 and the audio/emission control device 81 in this embodiment.

As in the first embodiment, the main control board 61 of the main control device 60 is provided with an MPU 62. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and an I/F 101 as in the first embodiment, but is not provided with a management IC 66. The I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via an internal bus 103. Detection results from sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a and commands from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I/F 101, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands, As already explained, various processes are executed by the main CPU 63. Furthermore, as a result of various processes being executed by the main CPU 63, when a signal is output to devices such as the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101. At the same time, as a result of various processes being executed by the main side CPU 63, when a command is output to the payout side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81, the command output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101.

The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the hall computer HC via an external terminal board 97 as in the first embodiment. Here, in the first embodiment, a signal is externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC, but a signal is not output from the hall computer HC to the main CPU 63, but in this embodiment, the main CPU 63 A signal is externally output from the hall computer HC to the hall computer HC, and a signal is output from the hall computer HC to the main CPU 63. The type of signal externally output from the main side CPU 63 to the hall computer HC, that is, the content of the information externally output from the main side CPU 63 to the hall computer HC is the same as in the first embodiment. Although the details will be described later, the hall computer HC instructs the main CPU 63 to calculate various parameters using the ball entry history into each ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34, and to notify the results of the calculations. An instruction signal to start checking is output.

During the execution of calculations using this ball entry history and the notification of the calculation results, the display control execution mode of the symbol display device 41 becomes a mode corresponding to the execution mode. This display control execution instruction is executed by the audio light emission control device 81 based on a command transmitted from the main side CPU 63. More specifically, the audio emission control device 81 includes an audio emission control board 161 on which an MPU 162 is mounted. The MPU 162 of the audio/light emission control board 161 includes, in addition to the audio/optical CPU 163 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control section and a calculation section, an audio/optical ROM 164, an audio/optical RAM 165, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and data input/output. It has built-in circuits.

The audio-optical side ROM 164 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory (that is, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for reading only. The sound-light side ROM 164 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the sound-light side CPU 163.

The audio-optical RAM 165 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (ie, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The audio-optical side RAM 165 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than the audio-optical side ROM 164. The audio-optical RAM 165 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the audio-optical ROM 164.

While the sound and light side CPU 163 receives commands from the main side CPU 63, it does not transmit commands to the main side CPU 63. The sound and light side CPU 163 receives a variation command, a type command, and an opening command from the main side CPU 63 as in the first embodiment. When the sound and light side CPU 163 receives these commands, it executes the process of determining the effect corresponding to the received command, and executes the light emission control of the display light emitting section 53 and the sound output control of the speaker section 54 according to the determined contents. . Further, a command corresponding to the determined content is transmitted to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 according to the contents of the received command.

In addition to the above-mentioned commands, the sound-light side CPU 163 receives a demonstration start command and a check start command from the main side CPU 63. The demonstration start command is a command that instructs to start a demonstration performance. The demonstration effect is a start that is started by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the previous game round. It refers to a waiting performance. In the start waiting performance, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 perform a performance different from the performance for the game round and the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. The check start command, which will be described in detail later, is used to change the display control execution mode of the symbol display device 41 to correspond to the execution mode of the display control of the symbol display device 41 during the execution of calculations using the management results of this ball entry history and the notification of the calculation results. This is a command that instructs the mode to be set.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63.

In steps S2701 to S2705, the same processes as steps S201 to S205 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) in the first embodiment are executed. Thereafter, a check process is executed (step S2706). In the checking process, which will be described in detail later, calculations of various parameters are performed using the history of ball entry into each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34, and processing is also performed to notify the results of the calculations.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the game is stopped or the check result display period is in progress (step S2707). Similarly to the first embodiment, when it is confirmed in the fraud detection process (step S2705) that a predetermined event (for example, detection of fraudulent radio waves or detection of fraudulent vibrations) has occurred, the main side RAM 65 By setting the game stop flag to "1", it is determined in step S2707 that the game is being stopped. Note that when it is confirmed that the occurrence of the predetermined event has been canceled, the game stop flag is cleared to "0", so that it is no longer determined that the game is being stopped in step S2707. The check result display period is a period during which calculation results of various parameters executed using the history of ball entry into each ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 are reported, and the relevant notification is performed in step S2706. The check result display period is set when the notification is started, and the check result display period is canceled when the notification is ended in step S2706.

If a negative determination is made in step S2707, steps S2708 to S2719 are executed to advance the game. Specifically, in step S2708, a port output process is executed as in step S207 in the first embodiment, in step S2709 a read process is executed as in step S208 in the first embodiment, and in step S2710 In step S2711, a timer update process is executed as in step S210 in the first embodiment, and in step S2712, a firing control process is executed as in step S211 in the first embodiment. In step S2713, the input state monitoring process is executed in the same manner as step S212 in the first embodiment, in step S2714, the special map special electric train control process is executed, and in step S2715, the process in step S214 in the first embodiment is executed. In step S2716, display control processing is executed in the same manner as in step S215 in the first embodiment, and in step S2717, in the same manner as in step S216 in the first embodiment, A payout status reception process is executed, a payout output process is executed in step S2718 as in step S217 in the first embodiment, and an external information setting process is executed in step S2719 as in step S218 in the first embodiment. Execute.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2707, the processes in steps S2708 to S2719 are not executed. As a result, if the game is set to be stopped in the fraud detection process in step S2705, or if the check result display period is set in the check process in step S2706, the game is allowed to proceed. Some of the necessary processes will no longer be executed.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process executed in step S2714.

First, it is determined whether it is time to start displaying a demonstration (step S2801). If the demo display is not being performed and a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the previous game round, it is determined that it is time to start the demo display. If it is the timing to start displaying a demonstration (step S2801: YES), a demonstration start command is sent to the audio-light side CPU 163 (step S2802).

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the production control process executed by the sound and light side CPU 163. Note that the production control process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec). When the sound and light side CPU 163 receives the demonstration start command from the main side CPU 63 (step S2902: YES), it executes a demonstration effect determination process (step S2903). In the demonstration performance determination process, the data table of the demonstration performance is read from the sound and light side ROM 164 to the sound and light side RAM 165. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting section 53 and sound output control of the speaker section 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, a demonstration effect is executed in the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54. Thereafter, a demonstration start command is sent to the display control device 82 (step S2904). By receiving the demonstration start command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect for the demonstration effect is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure special electric train control process (FIG. 52), when a negative determination is made in step S2801 or when the process of step S2802 is executed, a reservation information acquisition process is executed (step S2803). In the reservation information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, and if a winning has occurred, the number of pending in the pending storage area 65a is the upper limit. It is determined whether the value is less than the value (“4” in this embodiment). If the number of reservations is less than the upper limit value, the number of reservations is increased by 1, and the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S2702 is set for reservation. It is stored in the first reservation area among the vacant reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of area RE. In addition, if winnings to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 occur at the same time, the process for acquiring the pending information is executed within the range of executing the pending information obtaining process once. Run multiple times.

Moreover, when new acquisition of pending information is performed, a corresponding acquisition command is transmitted to the sound-light side CPU 163. When the sound and light side CPU 163 receives the command at the time of acquisition, it transmits a command corresponding to the command at the time of acquisition to the display control device 82 in other processing (step S2914) in the production control process (FIG. 53). The display control device 82 that has received the command changes the display mode in the hold display area Ga (FIG. 66(b)) on the symbol display device 41 to a display mode corresponding to the increase in the hold information. Details of the hold display area Ga will be explained later.

Thereafter, the information of the special figure special electric line counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is read out (step S2804), and the special figure special electric line address table provided in the main side ROM 64 is read out (step S2805). Then, the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure/special electric line counter is acquired from the special figure/special electric line address table (step S2806), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address among the processes of steps S2808 to S2814 (step S2807). ). The special figure special electric line counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to grasp which of the various processes from step S2808 to step S2814 should be executed, and the special figure special electric line address table is a counter for the special figure special electric line counter. The start address of the program for executing the processes from step S2808 to step S2814 is set in correspondence with the numerical information.

In step S2808, special figure fluctuation start processing is executed. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing special figure fluctuation start processing.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, data setting process is executed (step S3002) on the condition that the number of pieces of reservation information stored in the reservation area RE is 1 or more (step S3001: YES). In the data setting process, first, the number of reservations is subtracted by 1, and the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process is executed to shift the data stored in each of the reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of the reservation area RE. This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reservation area RE1 and The data in each area is shifted in the following order: reservation area RE2 → first reservation area RE1, third reservation area RE3 → second reservation area RE2, fourth reservation area RE4 → third reservation area RE3. At this time, a shift command is sent to the audio and optical side CPU 163 to make it aware that the data in the reservation area has been shifted. When the sound and light side CPU 163 receives the shift command, it transmits a command corresponding to the shift command to the display control device 82 in other processing (step S2914) in the production control process (FIG. 53). The display control device 82 that has received the command changes the display mode in the pending display area Ga (FIG. 66(b)) on the symbol display device 41 to a display mode corresponding to the decrease in pending information. Details of the hold display area Ga will be explained later.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 54), after executing the data setting process, the validity determination process is executed (step S3003). In the win/fail determination process, it is first determined whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, a high probability mode win/fail table provided in the main side ROM 64 is referred to, and information for the win/fail judgment among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, information related to the win random number counter C1. It is determined whether the numerical information matches the high probability jackpot numerical information. In addition, when the mode is low probability mode, by referring to the low probability mode win/fail table provided in the main side ROM 64, the numerical information related to the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot numerical information.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot winning result (step S3004: YES), a distribution determination process is executed (step S3005). In the distribution determination process, information for distribution determination, that is, numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2, is read out of the information stored in the execution area AE. Then, with reference to the distribution table provided in the main side ROM 64, it is specified to which jackpot result the numerical information related to the read jackpot type counter C2 corresponds. Specifically, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to a low-probability jackpot result, a low-win high-probability jackpot result, and a most profitable jackpot result.

Thereafter, a stop result setting process for jackpot results is executed (step S3006). Specifically, information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a in the game round related to the start of the current variation is obtained from the stop result table for jackpot results stored in advance in the main side ROM 64. The identified information is written to the main RAM 65. In this stop result table for jackpot results, information on the mode of the picture that is stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a is set differently for each type of jackpot result.

Thereafter, flag setting processing corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S3007). Specifically, the main RAM 65 is provided with flags corresponding to the types of jackpot results, and in step S3007, among the flags corresponding to the types of jackpot results, the flags used in the distribution determination process of step S3005 are selected. Set "1" to the flag corresponding to the result.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3004 that the result is not a jackpot winning result, a stop result setting process for a winning result is executed (step S3008). Specifically, information on the mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a in the game round related to the start of the current variation is obtained from the stop result table for miss results stored in advance in the main side ROM 64. The identified information is written to the main RAM 65. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result.

After executing either step S3007 or step S3008, a process for determining the duration of the game round is executed (step S3009). In this process, numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Furthermore, it is determined whether or not a ready-to-reach display will occur on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, if the game round related to the start of the current variation is a low-probability jackpot result or a most advantageous jackpot result, it is determined that the reach display will occur. Moreover, if it is not any jackpot result and the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach display occurs.

When it is determined that a reach display will occur, the duration of the game round corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the reach occurrence duration table stored in the main side ROM 64. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the continuation of the game round corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is continued by referring to the continuation period table for non-reach occurrence stored in the main side ROM 64. Get the period. Incidentally, the continuation period of a gaming session that can be obtained by referring to the continuation period table for non-reach occurrence is different from the continuation period of a gaming session that can be obtained by referring to the continuation period table for non-reach occurrence.

The duration of the game round when no reach occurs is set such that the longer the number of reservation information stored in the reservation area RE, the shorter the duration of the game round. Also, in situations where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, a shorter game duration is selected than in situations where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, compared to cases where the number of pending information is the same. A duration table for reach non-occurrence is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the duration of a game round does not vary depending on the number of pending information or the support mode, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the duration of the game round when the reach occurs. Further, in the case of various jackpot results, separate duration tables may be set for each of the case of a losing reach and the case of a losing result in which no reach occurs. In this case, the duration of the game round will be allocated according to each game result.

Thereafter, the information on the duration of the game round acquired in step S3009 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S3010). The numerical information set in the special figure special electric timer counter is updated in the timer update process (step S2711). Incidentally, as a performance for the game round, a fluctuating display of symbols on the special symbol display section 37a and a fluctuating display of symbols on the symbol display device 41 are performed, but when each of these fluctuating displays is ended, the game cycle The final stop display is performed for a final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec) in a state in which the stop result is displayed (a state in which a predetermined combination of symbols is on standby on the active line in the symbol display device 41). In this case, the duration of the game round acquired in step S3009 is the total time of one game round.

Thereafter, a variation command and a type command are transmitted to the sound and light side CPU 163 (step S3011). The variation command includes information about the duration of the game. Here, as mentioned above, the duration of the gaming session obtained by referring to the non-reach duration table is different from the duration of the gaming session obtained by referring to the duration table for reach occurrence. Even if the variation command does not include information on whether or not a reach has occurred, the sound-light side CPU 163 can identify whether or not a reach has occurred from the information on the duration of the game round. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating the presence or absence of reach. Note that the variation command may include information that directly indicates the presence or absence of reach. Further, the type command includes information on game results.

When the sound and light side CPU 163 receives the variation command and the type command from the main side CPU 63, it executes the effect determination process for the game round by making an affirmative determination in step S2905 of the effect control process (FIG. 53) (step S2906). In the performance determination process for the game round, a performance lottery process is executed according to the contents of the variation command and type command received this time. Further, a data table corresponding to the combination of the contents of the variation command and type command received this time and the result of the performance lottery process is read from the sound and light side ROM 164 to the sound and light side RAM 165. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting section 53 and sound output control of the speaker section 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 execute the performance for the game round for the duration of the game round currently determined by the main CPU 63. Thereafter, a variation pattern command corresponding to the type of data table read out in step S2906 is transmitted to the display control device 82 (step S2907). By receiving the variable pattern command, the display control device 82 starts the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 to start the performance of the game round on the symbol display device 41, and also starts the production of the game round on the symbol display device 41. The display of the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the performance of the game round corresponding to is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 54), after executing the process of step S3011, the variable display of the symbols on the special figure display section 37a is started (step S3012). Then, the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step S3013). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric line counter is "0" when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric line counter is "1" when the process of step S3013 is executed. ”.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 52), in step S2809, a process during special figure variation is executed. In the special figure variation processing, it is determined whether the timing is during the duration of the game round and before the final stop display, and if it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the symbols in the special figure display section 37a is set as a rule. Execute processing to change the When it is time to display the final stop, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter changes from the one corresponding to the process during special figure fluctuation to the one corresponding to the process during special figure confirmation. Update things. In addition, in this embodiment, the final stop command is not transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163.

In step S2810, special figure confirmation processing is executed. In the special figure confirmation process, the display mode of the symbols in the special figure display section 37a is set to a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round. In addition, in the special figure confirmation process, it is determined whether or not the final stop period has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not a transition to the opening/closing execution mode will occur. If the transition to the opening/closing execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0". When a transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter changes from the one corresponding to the process during special figure confirmation to the one corresponding to the special electric line start process. Update.

In step S2811, special call start processing is executed. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing special call start processing.

In the special electric train start process, if the process for starting the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode has not been executed yet (step S3101: NO), the opening period setting process is executed (step S3102). In the setting process, information on the opening period (for example, 5 seconds) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 65. Furthermore, an opening command is transmitted to the sound-light side CPU 163 (step S3103).

When the sound and light side CPU 163 receives the opening command from the main side CPU 63, it executes the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode by making an affirmative determination in step S2908 of the effect control process (FIG. 53) (step S2909). In the performance determination process for the opening/closing execution mode, the data table for the opening/closing execution mode is read from the sound/light side ROM 164 to the sound/light side RAM 165. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting section 53 and sound output control of the speaker section 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 perform the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Thereafter, an opening command is sent to the display control device 82 (step S2910). By receiving the opening command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect for the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

In addition, the effects for the opening/closing execution mode include an opening period effect that occurs when the opening/closing execution mode is started, an opening/closing period effect in which the special electric prize winning device 32 is repeatedly opened and closed after that, and an effect when the opening/closing execution mode ends. It includes the effects of the ending period that occur when the game is played. For example, in the symbol display device 41, an image indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has been started is displayed during the opening period, and an image indicating that the special electric prize winning device 32 is to be opened and closed is displayed during the opening/closing period. During the ending period, an image indicating the end of the opening/closing execution mode is displayed. In addition, the opening command includes information indicating the type of jackpot result that triggered the start of the current opening/closing execution mode, and the sound and light side CPU 163 and display control device 82 refer to this information to determine the jackpot result. The performance for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the special electric start process (FIG. 55), if the opening period has elapsed (step S3104: YES), a start process for starting the first round game is executed (step S3105). In the start processing, the special electric winning device 32 is opened, and conditions for ending the round game are set. When setting this end condition, set the upper limit duration time for keeping the special electric winning device 32 in the open state in the first round of the game in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 65, and The upper limit number of game balls that can be won in the special electric winning device 32 in a game is set in a winning number counter provided in the main side RAM 65. The upper limit duration time set in the special figure special electric timer counter is updated in the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), and the upper limit number set in the prize winning number counter is updated by the winning number in the special electric prize winning device 32. 1 is subtracted each time this occurs. Thereafter, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special electric line counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from that corresponding to the special electric line start process to that corresponding to the special electric line opening process (step S3106).

Returning to the explanation of the special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 52), in step S2812, a special electric line open process is executed. In the special electricity release process, it is determined whether the end condition of the round game is satisfied or not. If the termination condition is satisfied, the special electric prize winning device 32 is brought into a closed state. If the round game that has ended this time is the round game of the last run, then by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter will be changed from that corresponding to the special electric line open process to the special electric line closed process. If the round game that ended this time is the last round game to be played, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is added by 2 to make the numerical information of the counter correspond to the special electric current open process. Update from a new version to one that supports special call termination processing.

In step S2813, special electric train closure processing is executed. In the special train closing process, it is determined whether or not the interval period between round games has elapsed. The interval period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 65 when the previous round game ends, and the set value is updated in the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51). Ru. When the interval period has elapsed, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and conditions for ending the round game are set. Then, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special train special train counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from that corresponding to the special train closed process to that corresponding to the special train open process.

In step S2814, special call termination processing is executed. In the special train end processing, if the process for starting the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode has not been executed yet, information on the ending period (for example, 5 seconds) is set in the special train special train timer counter of the main side RAM 65, The ending command is sent to the sound-light side CPU 163. When the sound and light side CPU 163 receives the ending command from the main side CPU 63, it transfers the data table for the ending period from the sound and light side ROM 164 to the sound and light side RAM 165 in other processing (step S2914) of the production control process (FIG. 53). read out. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting section 53 and sound output control of the speaker section 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 perform the effect of the ending period. Thereafter, an ending command is sent to the display control device 82. By receiving the ending command, the display control device 82 controls the symbol display device 41 to display the ending period display effect.

Next, the ball entry detection process executed in step S2710 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) in the main CPU 63 will be described.

First, the normal counter area 171, opening/closing execution mode counter area 172, and high frequency support mode counter area 173 provided in the main side RAM 65 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. Each of these areas 171 to 173 includes general winning counters 171a, 172a, 173a, special electric winning counters 171b, 172b, 173b, first operating counters 171c, 172c, 173c, second operating counters 171d, 172d, 173d, and Out counters 171e, 172e, and 173e are provided. The general prize winning counters 171a, 172a, and 173a are counters for counting the number of game balls entering the general prize winning hole 31 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The special electric winning counters 171b, 172b, and 173b are counters for counting the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The first operation counters 171c, 172c, and 173c are counters for counting the number of game balls entering the first operation port 33 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The second operation counters 171d, 172d, and 173d are counters for counting the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The out counters 171e, 172e, and 173e are counters for counting the number of game balls entering the out port 24a from a predetermined measurement start timing.

Each of the counters 171a to 171e in the normal counter area 171 corresponds to the ball entry section 24a, which is the target when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and neither the opening/closing execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode is in effect. It is used to count the number of game balls that have entered balls 31 to 34. Each of the counters 172a to 172e in the counter area 172 for the opening/closing execution mode is set to each counter 172a to 172e when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the opening/closing execution mode is set. It is used to count the number of game balls hit. Each of the counters 173a to 173e in the high frequency support mode counter area 173 corresponds to the target ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 in the high frequency support mode when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. It is used to count the number of game balls that have entered the game. Note that the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is not included in the measurement because a game ball enters the ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 due to maintenance while the front door frame 14 is open. This is to exclude from the measurement object the number of balls that enter the ball when the ball is thrown.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed in step S2710 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) in the main CPU 63.

In the ball entry detection process, if the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step S3201: YES), the normal ball entry detection process (step S3204), the ball entry detection process in the opening/closing execution mode (step S3205), and None of the ball entry detection processing (step S3206) in the high-frequency support mode is executed. Since the gaming area PA is formed by a space divided into the front and back by the back side of the window panel 52 provided on the front door frame 14 and the front side of the game board 24, when the front door frame 14 is in an open state, Even if the game area PA is opened forward and a game ball is launched toward the game area PA in that situation, the game ball cannot normally flow down the game area PA. In addition, if a game ball enters the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 when the front door frame 14 is open, the game hall manager may This is a case where the front door frame 14 is left open and game balls enter the game ball due to maintenance or the like. Since such entering of a game ball is not an entering of a game ball in the execution situation of a regular game, it is not necessary to manage such entering of a game ball. Therefore, in the ball entry detection process, if the front door frame 14 is in the open state as described above, none of steps S3204 to S3206 are executed.

If the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and neither the opening/closing execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode is in effect (steps S3201 to S3203: NO), normal ball entry detection processing is executed (step S3204). Further, when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the opening/closing execution mode is in effect (step S3201: NO, step S3202: YES), ball entry detection processing in the opening/closing execution mode is executed (step S3205). Further, when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the high-frequency support mode is in effect (step S3201: NO, step S3203: YES), ball entry detection processing in the high-frequency support mode is executed (step S3206).

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing normal ball entry detection processing in step S3204.

If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a (step S3301: YES), if it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a ( Step S3304: YES), or if it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a (Step S3307: YES), add 1 to the value of the general winning counter 171a (Step S3302, step S3305, step S3308). Further, the value of the 10 award balls counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3303, step S3306, step S3309). In addition, if it is the ball entry detection process during the opening/closing execution mode, the value of the general winning counter 172a for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S3302, step S3305, and step S3308. If it is a ball detection process, the value of the general winning counter 173a for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to steps S3302, S3305, and S3308.

If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the special electric current detection sensor 45a (step S3310: YES), after setting the special electric winning flag in the main side RAM 65 to "1" (step S3311), the ordinary special electric winning prize is displayed. The value of the counter 171b is incremented by 1 (step S3312). Further, the value of the 15 award balls counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3313). Note that if the ball entering detection process is in the open/close execution mode, the value of the special electric winning counter 172b for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S3312, and if the ball entering detection process is in the high frequency support mode, As a process corresponding to step S3312, 1 is added to the value of the special electric prize winning counter 173b for the high frequency support mode.

If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a (step S3314: YES), after setting the first operation winning flag in the main side RAM 65 to "1" (step S3315), The value of the first normal operation counter 171c is incremented by 1 (step S3316). Further, the value of the one prize ball counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3317). Note that if the ball entry detection process is in the opening/closing execution mode, the value of the first operation counter 172c for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S3316, and if the ball entry detection process is in the high-frequency support mode, For example, as a process corresponding to step S3316, the value of the first operation counter 173c for high frequency support mode is incremented by one.

If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a (step S3318: YES), after setting the second operation winning flag in the main side RAM 65 to "1" (step S3319), The value of the second normal operation counter 171d is incremented by 1 (step S3320). Further, the value of the one prize ball counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3321). Note that if the ball entry detection process is in the opening/closing execution mode, the value of the second operation counter 172d for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S3320, and if the ball entry detection process is in the high frequency support mode, For example, as a process corresponding to step S3320, the value of the second operation counter 173d for high-frequency support mode is incremented by one.

When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the out exit detection sensor 48a (step S3322: YES), the value of the normal out counter 171e is incremented by 1 (step S3323). Note that if the ball entry detection process is in the opening/closing execution mode, the value of the out counter 172e for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S3323, and if the ball entry detection process is in the high frequency support mode, step S3323 is performed. As a process corresponding to S3323, the value of the out counter 173e for high frequency support mode is incremented by 1.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a (step S3324: YES), the gate winning flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3325).

By executing the ball entry detection process as described above, the number of game balls entering the general winning hole 31 is measured using the general winning counters 171a, 172a, 173a, and the game ball entering the special electric winning device 32 is counted. The number of balls entering the game ball is measured using the special electric prize counters 171b, 172b, and 173b, and the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 is measured using the first operating counters 171c, 172c, and 173c. , the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 is measured using the second operating counters 171d, 172d, 173d, and the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is measured using the out counters 171e, 172e, 173e. It is measured using. This allows the main CPU 63 to grasp the history of ball entry into each ball entry section 24a, 31-34. In addition, since the normal counter area 171, the counter area 172 for opening/closing execution mode, and the counter area 173 for high-frequency support mode are each provided separately, it is possible to avoid situations in which neither opening/closing execution mode nor high-frequency support mode exists. It becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to grasp the history of ball entry into each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 by distinguishing between the opening/closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode.

Next, the checking process executed in step S2706 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 59.

If it is neither the check result display period nor the check waiting period (step S3401 and step S3402: NO), it is determined whether a check start instruction signal has been received from the hall computer HC via the external terminal board 97 ( Step S3403). As already explained, the instruction signal for starting the check is sent to the hall to instruct to calculate various parameters using the history of ball entry into each ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 and to notify the results of the calculation. Output from computer HC. Note that the timing for the hall computer HC to output the check start instruction signal is arbitrary; for example, the administrator of the game hall performs a predetermined operation on the hall computer HC to check all the pachinko machines 10 in the game hall. A configuration may be adopted in which a start instruction signal is output, or a configuration in which a check start instruction signal is output from the hall computer HC to all pachinko machines 10 when a predetermined time has arrived. A configuration may also be adopted in which a check start instruction signal is output from the hall computer HC to all pachinko machines 10 when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the last time the check start instruction signal was transmitted.

If an instruction signal to start checking has been received (step S3403: YES), a game ball firing prohibition process is executed (step S3404). As a result, even if the firing operation device 28 performs an operation to fire the game balls in a situation where the game balls are normally stored in the upper tray 55a, the game balls will not be fired from the game ball firing mechanism 27. It becomes a state where it cannot be used. This state in which the firing of game balls is prohibited is canceled when the notification of the calculation results of various parameters using the ball entry history into each ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 is completed.

Thereafter, a game session interruption process is executed (step S3405). In the game session interruption process, if a game session is not being executed, the start of a new game session and the new start of a demo display are prohibited. Thereby, even if pending information is newly acquired in a situation where no gaming session is being executed, the starting of the gaming session triggered by the pending information is put on hold, and the new start of the demonstration display is also put on hold. Note that by blocking the execution of step S2802 of the special figure special electric train control process (FIG. 52), a new start of the demonstration display is prohibited.

In addition, in the gaming session interruption process, if the gaming session is being executed, the main CPU 63 stops measuring the duration of the gaming session. Specifically, during the execution of a game round, the duration of the game round is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 65, and the value of this special figure special electric timer counter is set to the timer of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 51). Although it will be updated periodically in the update process (step S2711), the update of the special figure special electric timer counter by this timer update process is stopped. In addition, when the game round interruption process is executed, the process for starting the game round and the process for advancing the game round are not executed in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 52). However, even if the game round interruption process is executed, the reservation information acquisition process (step S2803) in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 52) is executed.

Thereafter, the opening/closing execution mode interruption process is executed (step S3406). In the process of interrupting the opening/closing execution mode, if the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, starting a new opening/closing execution mode is prohibited. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode interruption process, if the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the main CPU 63 stops measuring the opening period, the upper limit duration of the round game, the interval period, or the ending period. . Specifically, during the opening period, the opening period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 65, and during the execution of the round game, the upper limit duration of the special electric winning device 32 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 65. Between multiple round games, the interval period is set to the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 65, and during the ending period, the ending period is set to the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 65. The value of this special figure special electric train timer counter will be periodically updated in the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51). Stop. In addition, in the interruption process of the opening/closing execution mode, if the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state, the special electric winning device 32 is brought into the closed state. In addition, when the interruption process of the opening/closing execution mode is executed, the process for starting the opening/closing execution mode and the process for advancing the opening/closing execution mode are not executed in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 52). . However, even if the opening/closing execution mode interruption process is executed, the reservation information acquisition process (step S2803) in the special figure special electric train control process (FIG. 52) is executed.

Thereafter, a process of interrupting the general electric power control is executed (step S3407). In the process of interrupting the general electric power control, if the general electric power display section 38a is not in the middle of a variable display and the general electric utility accessory 34a is not in the open state, a new fluctuation display time of the general electric power display section 38a is started. Prohibit start. As a result, even if the value of the general utility object release counter C4 is newly acquired in a situation where control of the general electric utility grid is not being executed, the new variable display time of the general electric utility figure display section 38a is triggered by that value. The start of is awaited. In addition, in the interruption process of the general figure/general electric power control, if the general figure display section 38a is in the process of variable display, the update of the timer in the main side RAM 65 that measures the variable display period is stopped. In addition, in the interruption process of the common electric utility object 34a, if the general electric utility object 34a is in an open state, the general electric utility object 34a is brought into a closed state and the update of the opening time of the general electric utility object 34a is stopped. Note that even if the interruption process of the general electric utility grid control is executed, the value of the general electric utility object release counter C4 is stored in the general electric power holding area 65c in response to the occurrence of a game ball entering the second operating port 34. Processing is executed.

Thereafter, storage processing of the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a is executed (step S3408). In the storage process, data indicating the current display content in the special figure display section 37a is stored in the main side RAM 65, and data indicating the current display content in the regular figure display section 38a is stored in the main side RAM 65. Thereafter, a process for starting the check waiting display of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a is executed (step S3409). In the process of starting the check waiting display, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are changed to display contents for notifying that the current status is the check waiting period. The check waiting period refers to the calculation of various parameters using the history of ball entry into each ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 in response to reception of the instruction signal after receiving an instruction signal to start checking from the hall computer HC. This is the waiting period before starting notification of results.

Here, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a will be explained.

First, the special figure display section 37a will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 60(a). FIG. 60(a) is a front view of the special figure display section 37a. The special figure display section 37a is provided with seven display segments 181 to 187. Each of the display segments 181 to 187 has an individual light source made of an LED, and by controlling on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up only one arbitrary display segment 181 to 187. In addition, any combination of display segments 181 to 187 can be lit. Since all of the above-mentioned individual light sources emit light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments 181 to 187, but the display is not limited to this. , a configuration may be adopted in which different colors are displayed in each display segment 181 to 187, or a configuration in which each display segment 181 to 187 is capable of displaying a plurality of types of colors may be adopted. The first to seventh display segments 181 to 187 are all linear display segments, and the first to seventh display segments 181 to 187 are arranged to form a so-called 7-segment display. Thereby, in the special figure display section 37a, it is possible to display a plurality of types, such as numbers "1" to "9" and alphabets "H" and "L".

FIG. 60(A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display section 37a. When the special figure display section 37a displays a changing pattern during the execution of a game round, only the second display segment 182 and the fifth display segment 185 are turned on in the special figure display section 37a. A series of lighting states in which only the first display segment 181 is lit → only the third display segment 183 and the sixth display segment 186 are lit → only the seventh display segment 187 is lit is repeated. In addition, in the special figure display section 37a, only the fourth display segment 184 is lit as a stop result in a game round with a winning result, and "2" or "4" is displayed as a stop result in a game round with a low probability jackpot result. It will be in a lighting state where "6" or "9" will be displayed as the stop result in the game round with low winnings and high probability jackpot results, and "L" or "9" will be displayed as the stop result in the game round with the most profitable jackpot result. The lighting state is such that "H" is displayed.

On the other hand, during the check waiting period, all of the first to seventh display segments 181 to 187 are lit. The display contents corresponding to this check waiting period do not match any of the display contents in the situation in which the symbols are displayed on the special figure display section 37a during the execution of the game round, and furthermore, the display contents corresponding to the check waiting period do not match with any display contents of the situation in which the symbols are displayed on the special figure display section 37a during the execution of the game round. It also does not match all display contents that can be displayed as . This makes it possible for the game hall manager to clearly understand whether or not the current status is in the check waiting period by visually observing the special figure display section 37a.

After the check waiting period ends, the special figure display section 37a will be used to notify the calculation results of various parameters using the ball entry history into each ball entry section 24a, 31-34. At the time of this notification, the special figure display section 37a enters a lighting state in which "3", "5" or "7" is displayed. The display contents corresponding to the display period of these check results do not match any of the display contents in the situation where the symbol change display is performed on the special figure display section 37a during the execution of the game round, and furthermore, This does not match all display contents that may be displayed as a result of the stoppage. Further, the display content corresponding to the check result display period does not match the display content corresponding to the check waiting period. As a result, the administrator of the game hall can not only clearly understand whether or not the current status is in the check waiting period by visually observing the special figure display section 37a, but also the current status can be in the check result display period. It becomes possible to clearly understand whether or not it is.

Next, the ordinary figure display section 38a will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 60(b). FIG. 60(b) is a front view of the ordinary figure display section 38a. The ordinary figure display section 38a is provided with seven display segments 191 to 197. Each of the display segments 191 to 197 has an individual light source made of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up only one arbitrary display segment 191 to 197. In addition, any combination of display segments 191 to 197 can be lit. Since all of the above-mentioned individual light sources emit light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments 191 to 197, but the display is not limited to this. , a configuration may be adopted in which different colors are displayed in each of the display segments 191 to 197, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors can be displayed in each of the display segments 191 to 197 may be adopted. The first to seventh display segments 191 to 197 are all linear display segments, and the first to seventh display segments 191 to 197 are arranged to form a so-called 7-segment display. Thereby, it is possible to display a plurality of types of numbers, such as numbers "1" to "9" and alphabets "H" and "L", on the general figure display section 38a.

FIG. 60(B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the ordinary figure display section 38a. When a variable display of the picture is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a, only the second display segment 192 and the fifth display segment 195 are lit → only the first display segment 191 in the ordinary figure display section 38a A series of lighting states is repeated, such as the lighting state → only the third display segment 193 and the sixth display segment 196 are lighting → only the seventh display segment 197 is lighting. In addition, in the utility map display section 38a, only the fourth display segment 194 is turned on as a result of the stop of the variable display times that resulted in a losing result in the utility lottery, and the variable display that resulted in a winning result in the utility distribution lottery. As a result of the stoppage, the lighting state is such that "H" is displayed.

On the other hand, during the check waiting period, all of the first to seventh display segments 191 to 197 are lit. The display content corresponding to this check waiting period does not match any display content in the situation where the fluctuating display of the symbol is performed on the common figure display section 38a, and furthermore, the display content corresponding to the check waiting period does not match any display content in the situation where the fluctuating display of the symbol is performed, and furthermore, all of the display content that may be displayed as a result of the stop of the fluctuating display It also does not match the displayed content. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can clearly grasp whether the current status is in the check waiting period by visually observing the general map display section 38a.

Furthermore, the display content corresponding to the check waiting period in the regular figure display section 38a matches the display content corresponding to the check waiting period in the special figure display section 37a. That is, during the check waiting period, the same corresponding display contents are displayed on both the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a. This makes it easier for the game hall manager to understand whether or not the current status is the check waiting period.

After the check waiting period ends, the calculation results of various parameters using the history of ball entry into each ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 are announced using not only the special symbol display section 37a but also the regular symbol display section 38a. It will be done. In this case, at the time of this notification, the standard figure display section 38a enters a lighting state in which "2", "3", or "4" is displayed. The display contents corresponding to the display period of these check results do not match any of the display contents in the situation where the fluctuating display of the picture is performed on the ordinary figure display section 38a, and furthermore, It does not match all possible display contents. Furthermore, the display content corresponding to the check result display period does not match the display content corresponding to the check waiting period. As a result, the manager of the game hall can not only clearly understand whether the current status is in the check waiting period by visually observing the general map display section 38a, but also can make it possible to clearly understand whether the current status is in the check result display period. It becomes possible to clearly understand whether or not it is.

Returning to the explanation of the check process (FIG. 59), after executing the process of step S3409, a process of setting the check waiting counter is executed (step S3410). In the setting process, information corresponding to the check waiting period is set in the check waiting counter provided in the main side RAM 65. Specifically, the check waiting period is set to 5 seconds. During this period, after a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism 27 in response to the operation of the firing operation device 28, the fired game ball enters one of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 in the game area PA. This is sufficiently longer than the maximum time required for the main CPU 63 to specify that a ball has entered the ball and that it has been detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a corresponding to the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 into which the ball has entered. The time is set. Then, as already explained, when an instruction signal to start checking is received from the hall computer HC, firing of game balls is prohibited in step S3404. As a result, all the game balls flowing down the gaming area PA will disappear before the check waiting period elapses, and the ball entering history into each ball entering section 24a, 31 to 34 will disappear before the check waiting period elapses. are all acquired.

Thereafter, the check wait flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3411). The check wait flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that it is a check wait period. Further, in step S3412, a check start command is transmitted to the audio-optical side CPU 163.

When the sound and light side CPU 163 receives the check start command, it sets "1" to the end standby flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 165 by making an affirmative determination in step S2911 of the production control process (FIG. 53) ( Step S2912). The end standby flag is a flag used by the sound-light side CPU 163 to specify that the end standby state is in effect, and if the end standby flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S2901. becomes. Note that the control contents in the completion standby state will be explained in detail later. Further, a check display command is sent to the display control device 82 in step S2913. When the display control device 82 receives the check display command, it causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image corresponding to the end standby state. This display content will be explained later.

Returning to the explanation of the check process (FIG. 59), in step S3411, the check wait flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1", thereby entering a check wait period. Therefore, an affirmative determination is made in step S3402, and the check waiting process is executed (step S3413). FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the check waiting process.

First, the value of the check waiting counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S3501). If the value of the check wait counter after the subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S3502: YES), the check wait flag in the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3503). This ends the check waiting period.

Thereafter, aggregation processing is executed (step S3504). In the aggregation process, various counters 171a to 171e in the normal counter area 171 are used to calculate the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter, and various counters 172a to 172e in the open/close execution mode counter area 172 are used to calculate the seventh parameter. and an eighth parameter, and calculates a seventh parameter and an eighth parameter using various counters 173a to 173e in the high-frequency support mode counter area 173. Regarding these seventh and eighth parameters, in detail, the values of the out counters 171e, 172e, 173e are K1, the values of the general winning counters 171a, 172a, 173a are K2, and the values of the special electric winning counters 171b, 172b, 173b. is K3, the values of the first operation counters 171c, 172c, 173c are K4, and the values of the second operation counters 171d, 172d, 173d are K5,
- Seventh parameter: (K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "General "Number of prize balls for winning into the winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34 8th parameter: K3 × "Number of prize balls received in the special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 × "Number of prize balls received in the general winning slot 31") Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the first actuation port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second actuation port 34 ”).

The seventh and eighth parameters calculated using the various counters 171a to 171e in the normal counter area 171 correspond to the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and whether the opening/closing execution mode or the high-frequency support mode is selected. These are the seventh and eighth parameters in a normal situation (hereinafter also referred to as various parameters in normal times). Further, the seventh and eighth parameters calculated using the various counters 172a to 172e in the counter area 172 for opening/closing execution mode are the conditions in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the opening/closing execution mode is in effect. (hereinafter also referred to as various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode). Furthermore, the seventh and eighth parameters calculated using the various counters 173a to 173e in the high-frequency support mode counter area 173 are for the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and in the high-frequency support mode. These are the seventh and eighth parameters in a certain situation (hereinafter also referred to as various parameters in high-frequency support mode).

In addition, in the aggregation process, the same process as the parameter management process (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is performed for each of the various parameters in normal mode, the various parameters in opening/closing execution mode, and the various parameters in high-frequency support mode. Execute against. In other words, if the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, the calculated various parameters are considered to be in the first range, and the value of the seventh parameter is 0. If only one of the conditions that the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 7 or the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the calculated various parameters are considered to be in the second range, and the value of the seventh parameter is determined to be within the second range. When the value of the parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, the various parameters calculated are determined to be in the third range. It is executed for each of the various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode and the various parameters in the high-frequency support mode. Then, information on the determination result is written into the main side RAM 65.

After executing the aggregation process in step S3504, a check result display start process is executed (step S3505). In the check result display start process, after the display contents of the check waiting period are finished being displayed in the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a, the display corresponding to the result of the aggregation process in step S3504 is started on the special figure display section. 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a. In this case, the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a do not continue to display the same display during the display period of the check results, but display the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the above judgment results for various parameters during normal times. A display corresponding to the above-mentioned judgment results for various parameters during the time, and a display corresponding to the above-mentioned judgment result for various parameters during the high-frequency support mode are sequentially displayed in this order, and the sequential display in this order is repeated. The display of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a is controlled as follows.

Specifically, the general map display section 38a displays a display corresponding to the above-mentioned determination results for various parameters during normal operation, a display corresponding to the above-described determination result for various parameters during opening/closing execution mode, and a display corresponding to the above-described determination result regarding various parameters during the opening/closing execution mode. A display is performed indicating which one of the displays corresponding to the above determination results for the various parameters is to be displayed. As already explained, the lighting state in which "2", "3", and "4" are displayed is set as the display content corresponding to the display period of the check result on the general map display section 38a. Among these, when the display corresponding to the above-mentioned judgment results for various parameters in normal time is to be displayed, "2" is displayed on the general figure display section 38a, and the above-mentioned judgment results for various parameters in opening/closing execution mode are displayed. When the display corresponding to the above is to be displayed, "3" is displayed on the general figure display section 38a, and when the display corresponding to the above judgment results for various parameters in the high frequency support mode is to be displayed, ``4'' is displayed on the ordinary figure display section 38a.

In addition, in the special figure display section 37a, displays corresponding to the above-mentioned determination results are performed for each of the various parameters in the normal time, the various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode, and the various parameters in the high-frequency support mode. As already explained, the lighting state in which "3", "5", and "7" are displayed is set as the display content corresponding to the display period of the check result on the special figure display section 37a. Among these, when the above judgment result corresponds to the first range, "3" is displayed on the special figure display section 37a, and when the above judgment result corresponds to the second range, the special figure display section 37a is displayed, and if the above determination result corresponds to the third range, "7" is displayed on the special figure display section 37a.

When the check result display period starts, the display corresponding to the above-mentioned determination results for various parameters in normal times is to be displayed, so "2" is first displayed on the general map display section 38a. During this normal target period, the special figure display section 37a displays a display corresponding to the above-mentioned determination results regarding various parameters during normal times. In other words, when the judgment result corresponds to the first range, "3" is displayed on the special figure display section 37a, and when the judgment result corresponds to the second range, the special figure display section 37a is displayed, and when the determination result corresponds to the third range, "7" is displayed on the special figure display section 37a. For example, if the determination result is in the first range, "2" is continuously displayed in the regular pattern display section 38a and "3" is continuously displayed in the special pattern display section 37a during the normal target period. The normal target period continues for 5 seconds.

When the normal target period has elapsed, the display corresponding to the above-mentioned determination results regarding the various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode is subsequently displayed, so "3" is displayed on the general figure display section 38a. During this opening/closing execution mode target period, the special figure display section 37a displays a display corresponding to the above-mentioned determination results regarding various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, when the judgment result corresponds to the first range, "3" is displayed on the special figure display section 37a, and when the judgment result corresponds to the second range, the special figure display section 37a is displayed, and when the determination result corresponds to the third range, "7" is displayed on the special figure display section 37a. For example, if the determination result is in the second range, "3" is continuously displayed in the regular pattern display section 38a, and "5" is continuously displayed in the special pattern display section 37a during the opening/closing execution mode target period. . The opening/closing execution mode target period continues for 5 seconds like the normal target period.

When the opening/closing execution mode target period has elapsed, the display corresponding to the above-mentioned determination results for various parameters during the high-frequency support mode will be displayed, so "4" will be displayed on the general map display section 38a. . During this high-frequency support mode target period, the special figure display section 37a displays a display corresponding to the above-mentioned determination results regarding various parameters during the high-frequency support mode. In other words, when the judgment result corresponds to the first range, "3" is displayed on the special figure display section 37a, and when the judgment result corresponds to the second range, the special figure display section 37a is displayed, and when the determination result corresponds to the third range, "7" is displayed on the special figure display section 37a. For example, if the determination result is in the third range, "4" will continue to be displayed in the regular pattern display section 38a and "7" will continue to be displayed in the special pattern display section 37a during the period covered by the high frequency support mode. Ru. The high-frequency support mode target period continues for 5 seconds, similar to the normal target period and the opening/closing execution mode target period.

The display period of the check result is set to a period in which each of the normal target period, the opening/closing execution mode target period, and the high-frequency support mode target period occurs at least once. Specifically, the check result display period is set to 30 seconds so that each of the normal target period, opening/closing execution mode target period, and high-frequency support mode target period occurs twice. Then, during the display period of the check results, the period changes from the normal target period to the opening/closing execution mode target period to the high-frequency support mode target period are repeatedly executed.

After executing the process of step S3505 in the check waiting process (FIG. 61), information corresponding to the check result display period (specifically, 30 seconds) is set in the display counter provided in the main side RAM 65 ( Step S3506). Thereafter, the display flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3507). The display flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that it is the check result display period.

When the display flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S2707 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 51) of the main side CPU 63. In this case, steps S2708 to S2719 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) are not executed. For example, by not executing the ball entry detection process (step S2710), even if a game ball enters the ball entry section 24a, 31-34, it is invalidated. However, as already explained, before the check result display period starts, there are no legally fired game balls in the gaming area PA, so the legally fired game balls are not checked. During the result display period, no ball enters any of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34. Further, since the special figure special electric line control process (step S2714) is no longer executed, all control of the special figure special electric line including the reservation information acquisition process (step S2803) is stopped. In addition, all the control of the general purpose electricity is stopped because the general purpose electric power control process (step S2715) is no longer executed. In addition, since the payout output process (step S2718) is no longer executed, all instructions for paying out game balls to the payout side CPU 92 are stopped. However, the payout of game balls based on the prize ball command that has already been output to the payout side CPU92 is continued under drive control by the payout side CPU92.

When the displaying flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1", in the check process (FIG. 59), an affirmative determination is made in step S3401, and the check result display process is executed (step S3414). FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing processing during display of check results.

First, the value of the displaying counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S3601). Then, it is determined whether the value of the displaying counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S3602).

If the value of the displayed counter is not "0" (step S3602: NO), any one of the normal target period, opening/closing execution mode target period, and high-frequency support mode target period is included in the display period of the check result. It is determined whether it is the timing to end and switch to the next sequential target period (step S3603). A determination as to whether it is time to switch the target period is made based on the value of the displaying counter. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3603, a display content update process is executed (step S3604). In the update process, the special figure display section 37a and the general display are set so that the display contents correspond to the next target period for the current target period among the normal target period, opening/closing execution mode target period, and high-frequency support mode target period. Display control is performed on the diagram display section 38a. In this case, display control is executed for the general map display section 38a so that the display content corresponds to the target period of switching destination, and for the special map display section 37a, the aggregation process (step In S3504), display control is performed so that the display content of the judgment result information corresponding to the target period of the current switching destination is displayed among the judgment result information written in the main side RAM 65.

If it is determined in step S3602 that the value of the displaying counter in the main side RAM 65 is "0", display return processing for the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a is executed (step S3605). In the display restoration process, these special figures are changed so that the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a become the display contents stored in the main side RAM 65 in step S3408 of the check process (FIG. 59). Display control is performed on the display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a. As a result, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a return to the display contents immediately before the start of the check waiting period.

Thereafter, the display flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3606). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S2707 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), and the process returns to the state in which the processes of steps S2708 to S2719 are executed. Furthermore, when the process of step S3606 is executed, each counter 171a to 171e in the normal counter area 171, each counter 172a to 172e in the open/close execution mode counter area 172, and each counter 173a in the high frequency support mode counter area 173 Clear the value of ~173e to "0". As a result, the ball entry history of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 is initialized, and it becomes possible to newly start managing the ball entry history. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the process of step S3606 is executed, each counter 171a to 171e in the normal counter area 171, each counter 172a to 172e in the open/close execution mode counter area 172, and high frequency support The configuration may be such that the values of each of the counters 173a to 173e in the mode counter area 173 are maintained as they are. In this case, the ball entry histories of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 are accumulated in such a way that the notification of the calculation result using the ball entry history is executed a plurality of times. In addition, in this configuration, based on the reception of a history deletion signal from the hall computer HC or the occurrence of a deletion operation using the operation unit provided in the pachinko machine 10, the ball entry history of the ball entry parts 24a, 31 to 34 is may be deleted.

Thereafter, a game round restart process is executed (step S3607). As a result, a new start of a game round is allowed, and if a check waiting period is started during the execution of a game round, the progress of the once stopped game round is resumed. Specifically, the display control of the special figure display section 37a corresponding to the game round that was temporarily stopped is restarted. Furthermore, by restarting the updating of the special figure special electric timer counter, the measurement of the duration of the game round is restarted. In addition, in the game round restart process, the state where the new start of demonstration display is prohibited is also released. That is, the state in which execution of step S2802 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 52) is prohibited is released.

Thereafter, the opening/closing execution mode restart processing is executed (step S3608). As a result, a new start of the opening/closing execution mode is allowed, and if the check waiting period is started while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the once stopped progress of the opening/closing execution mode is restarted. Specifically, updating of the special figure special electric timer counter is restarted. Further, when the check waiting period is started during the execution of the round game, the special electric prize winning device 32 becomes in an open state. In this case, in the restarted round game, the upper limit duration of the open state of the special electric winning device 32 is not measured from the beginning, but the measurement is restarted from the remaining upper limit duration when the round game was once stopped. do.

Thereafter, a process for restarting general electric power control is executed (step S3609). As a result, the start of a new variable display time of the general-purpose electric power display unit 38a is allowed, and if the check waiting period starts while the ordinary electric power control is being executed, the general electric power control that has been stopped once is allowed. progress will be resumed. Specifically, if the check waiting period is started during the variable display of the general figure display section 38a, the display control of the ordinary figure display section 38a is restarted, and the measurement of the duration of the corresponding variable display time is restarted. be done. Moreover, when the check waiting period is started in a situation where the general electric utility object 34a is in the open state, the general electric utility object 34a is in the open state. In this case, for the restarted open state, the upper limit duration of the open state of the utility appliance 34a is not measured from the beginning, but is measured from the remaining upper limit duration when the open state was once stopped. resume.

Thereafter, a game ball firing prohibition canceling process is executed (step S3610). As a result, by performing a game ball firing operation on the firing operation device 28 in a situation where game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a, the state returns to a state where game ball firing is executed.

Next, the progression of the check waiting period and the check result display period will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 63. FIG. 63(a) shows the timing of outputting the check start instruction signal from the hall computer HC, FIG. 63(b) shows the execution period of the game round, and FIG. 63(c) shows the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode. , FIG. 63(d) shows the execution period of general electricity control, FIG. 63(e) shows the prohibition period of firing the game ball, FIG. 63(f) shows the check waiting period, and FIG. ) indicates the display period of the check results.

First, a case will be described in which a check start instruction signal is output during the game round and during the execution of the general map and general electric power control.

As shown in FIG. 63(b), a game round is being executed, and as shown in FIG. 63(d), at timing t1, when the general electric power control is being executed, a hole is generated as shown in FIG. 63(a). By outputting an instruction signal to start checking from the computer HC, the game round is interrupted as shown in FIG. 63(b), and the regular power supply control is interrupted as shown in FIG. 63(d). Further, at the timing of t1, firing of game balls is prohibited as shown in FIG. 63(e), and a check waiting period begins as shown in FIG. 63(f). In this case, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a become display contents for notifying that it is a check waiting period.

Thereafter, at timing t2, the fixed time period T1 elapses from timing t1, and the check waiting period ends. At the timing t2, calculations are performed using the management results of the ball entry history into each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34. In this case, the time T1 starts from the time when a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism 27 in response to the operation of the firing operation device 28, until the fired game ball reaches one of the ball entry parts 24a, From the longest time required for the main CPU 63 to specify that a ball has entered the ball into the ball entry portions 24a and 31 to 34 and has been detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a corresponding to the ball entry portions 24a and 31 to 34. It is also set to a long enough time. As already explained, firing of game balls is prohibited at the timing t1. Therefore, by the time the check waiting period elapses, all the game balls flowing down the gaming area PA will no longer exist, and by the time the check waiting period has elapsed, the history of balls entering each ball entering section 24a, 31 to 34 will be All have been acquired.

As shown in FIG. 63(g), the check result display period starts at the timing t2. During the display period of the check results, as already explained, the display corresponding to the determination results for various parameters during normal times is displayed in the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a, and the normal target period and the opening/closing execution mode. Displays corresponding to the determination results for various parameters during the opening/closing execution mode target period executed in the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a and the determination results for various parameters during the high-frequency support mode are displayed. A high-frequency support mode target period in which the display is executed on the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a occurs sequentially.

Thereafter, at timing t3, a fixed time period T2 elapses from timing t2, and the check result display period ends as shown in FIG. 63(g). As a result, at the timing t3, the state where the firing of game balls is prohibited is canceled as shown in FIG. 63(e). Further, at the timing of t3, the game round is restarted as shown in FIG. 63(b), and the general electric grid control is restarted as shown in FIG. 63(d).

Next, a case will be described in which a check start instruction signal is output during the opening/closing execution mode and the general electric power control.

As shown in FIG. 63(a), at timing t4, when the opening/closing execution mode is being executed as shown in FIG. 63(c) and the utility power control is being executed as shown in FIG. 63(d), When the instruction signal to start checking is output from the hall computer HC, the opening/closing execution mode is interrupted as shown in FIG. 63(c), and the general electricity control is interrupted as shown in FIG. 63(d). Ru. Further, at the timing t4, firing of game balls is prohibited as shown in FIG. 63(e), and a check waiting period begins as shown in FIG. 63(f). In this case, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a become display contents for notifying that it is a check waiting period.

Thereafter, at timing t5, the fixed time T1 elapses from timing t4, and the check waiting period ends. At the timing t5, calculations are performed using the management results of the ball entry history into each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34. This time T1 is the same as the time from the timing t1 to the timing t2.

As shown in FIG. 63(g), the check result display period starts at timing t5. Thereafter, at timing t6, a fixed time period T2 elapses from timing t5, and the check result display period ends as shown in FIG. 63(g). This time T2 is the same as the time from the timing t2 to the timing t3. Further, at timing t6, the state in which the firing of game balls is prohibited is canceled as shown in FIG. 63(e). Further, at the timing t6, the opening/closing execution mode is restarted as shown in FIG. 63(c), and the general purpose electricity control is restarted as shown in FIG. 63(d).

Next, the main processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 64.

In the main processing, steps S3701 to S3703 and steps S3705 to S3714 are the same as steps S101 to S109 and steps S112 to S115 of the main processing (FIG. 7) in the first embodiment. On the other hand, in the main process in this embodiment, if it is determined in step S3704 that the check waiting flag or displaying flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1", the RAM in the power source/launch control device 78 in step S3705 The process of step S3706 is executed without executing the process of determining whether or not the erase switch is operated. In other words, the operation of the RAM erase switch is disabled during the check waiting period or the check result display period. As a result, when the check waiting period starts and the progress of the game is stopped, the game hall manager may misunderstand that the situation is due to an abnormality in the pachinko machine 10 and initialize the main side RAM 65. To prevent the clearing process of the main side RAM 65 from being executed even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and on while operating the RAM erase switch to execute the clearing process (step S3709) of the main side RAM 65. becomes possible. Note that the main side RAM 65 receives power for memory retention from the power outage power supply part of the power supply/launch control device 78 even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, as in the first embodiment. Supplied.

On the other hand, even if the check wait flag or displaying flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1", the processes of steps S3706 to S3708 are executed. In other words, even during the check waiting period or the check result display period, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" (step S3706: NO), the main side RAM 65 clearing process is executed (step S3709). Even if the checksum calculation result is abnormal (step S3708: NO), clearing processing of the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S3709). As a result, if power outage processing is not executed normally or if some abnormality occurs in the main RAM 65, clearing processing of the main RAM 65 is executed even during the check waiting period or check result display period. The main RAM 65 can then be initialized.

Next, the contents of the performance execution control and the display contents of the symbol display device 41 during the check waiting period or the check result display period will be explained.

First, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 when the performance for the game round is executed will be explained. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing individual symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 66 is a diagram showing the display surface of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIGS. 65(a) to 65(j), the patterns, which are a type of pattern, include nine types of main patterns with numbers "1" to "9" attached to them, and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs consisting of. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as octopuses are numbered from "1" to "9" to form the main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 66(a), three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set in the symbol display device 41 as a plurality of display areas: an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is composed of main symbols and sub-symbols arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper pattern row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged on the top, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and it is composed of 20 symbols. Then, in the symbol display device 41, the symbols of each of these symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variably manner so as to scroll periodically in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 66(b), standby areas SA1 to SA9 are set in the symbol display device 41 so that three symbols are displayed for each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and as a result, 3×3 A total of nine symbols are displayed at the same time. By the way, each standby area SA1 to SA9 includes a stop position, and when a symbol is displayed at its final stop, the symbol waiting in each standby area SA1 to SA9 will stop at each stop position. Is displayed. In addition, five effective lines are set on the symbol display device 41 to connect the three standby areas SA1 to SA9, namely, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a lower right line L4, and an upper right line L5. has been done. Then, the variable display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and with a combination of symbols with the same number attached to any active line formed, all symbol rows Z1 When the variable display of ~Z3 ends, a jackpot video is displayed as the occurrence of a low probability jackpot result or a most advantageous jackpot result. In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when the maximum jackpot result occurs, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are the same. The combination will stop displaying. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and if a low-probability jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols will be stopped and displayed. be done.

In addition, in the case of a low win, high probability jackpot result, a predetermined symbol combination that is not the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Further, the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41 are not limited to the above-mentioned symbols, and for example, only numbers may be displayed in a variable manner as the symbols.

More specifically, regarding the content of the fluctuating display of symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, when the game replay is started, the symbols in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a high-speed fluctuating display which is a low discrimination mode. The fluctuating display is started, and then, in a predetermined order, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is switched to a low-speed fluctuating display which is a high discrimination mode, and at the same time, in the predetermined order, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is moved to the standby areas SA1 to SA9 on each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The pattern will be displayed on standby. Then, in a state where the symbols are standby displayed in each standby area of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, after the symbols are oscillated for a period of oscillating display, the symbols are displayed statically as the final stop display. and this static display state continues over the final stop period. In this case, the swing display means that the symbols waiting in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 swing within the same standby area SA1 to SA9, and each symbol is displayed in the corresponding standby area SA1 to SA9. The symbol swings in a range including the stop position, and each symbol swings in a range sandwiching the corresponding stop position. By performing the static display after the oscillating display in this way, when the symbols are finally displayed statically, the oscillating display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 → the oscillating display in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 → It becomes possible to display the symbols in stages, such as static display, and it becomes possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the symbols will eventually be statically displayed.

When the display control device 82 receives a variation pattern command from the sound/light side CPU 163, the display control device 82 reads a data table corresponding to the variation pattern command from a ROM (not shown) provided in the display control device 82, and controls the symbol display device according to the data table. 41 display control is executed. In this case, this data table corresponds to the duration of the current game round, and by controlling the display of the symbol display device 41 according to the data table, high-speed fluctuation display → low-speed fluctuation display is performed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. Display → standby display → static display will be performed. In other words, commands to recognize the timing of switching from high-speed fluctuation display to low-speed fluctuation display, the timing of switching from low-speed fluctuation display to standby display, the timing of switching from standby display to static display, and the timing of ending static display are display control. Not sent to device 82. This makes it possible to suppress the number of commands sent from the audio/light side CPU 163 to the display control device 82. In addition, when static display starts on the symbol display device 41, the final stop display of the symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round will also start on the special symbol display section 37a, but this final stop display At the start of the process, the main side CPU 63 does not send a corresponding command to the audio/light side CPU 163. Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress the number of commands transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163.

In addition, in the situation where the standby display is performed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 and the low-speed fluctuation display is performed in the middle symbol row Z2, the symbols that are fluctuated and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are different. A reach effect using a character image may be performed. Since the start timing and end timing of this ready-to-win effect are also determined in the data table, there is no need to send commands from the sound and light side CPU 163 to the display control device 82 when starting and ending the ready-to-reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 66(b), the symbol display device 41 has a reserved display area Ga set in the center of the lower part. The hold display area Ga is divided and displayed so that the same number of unit hold display areas Ga1, Ga2, Ga3, and Ga4 as the maximum number of hold information stored in the hold area RE are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. There is. Specifically, the maximum number of pending information is four, and correspondingly, the pending display area Ga includes a first unit pending display area Ga1, a second unit pending display area Ga2, and a third unit pending display area. Ga3 and a fourth unit reservation display area Ga4 are set. When the number of reservation information stored in the reservation area RE is one, a predetermined reservation image is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area Ga1, and the reservation information stored in the reservation area RE is displayed. When the number of holding information is two, the predetermined holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Ga1 and the second unit holding display area Ga2, and the number of holding information stored in the holding area RE is displayed. In the case of three units, the predetermined pending image is displayed only in the first unit pending display area Ga1, second unit pending display area Ga2, and third unit pending display area Ga3, and is stored in the pending area RE. When the number of pieces of hold information is four, a predetermined hold image is displayed in all of the first unit hold display area Ga1 to fourth unit hold display area Ga4. When the hold information is acquired, the number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 in which a predetermined hold image is displayed is determined by transmitting a command corresponding to the acquisition command from the sound/light side CPU 163 to the display control device 82. increases. In addition, when a new game round is started, a command corresponding to the shift command is transmitted from the sound and light side CPU 163 to the display control device 82, so that a unit hold display area Ga1 in which a predetermined hold image is displayed is transmitted. ~The number of Ga4 decreases.

Next, the details of execution control of effects during the check waiting period or the check result display period will be explained.

As already explained, when the check waiting period is started, the main side CPU 63 transmits a check start command to the sound-light side CPU 163 in step S3412 of the check process (FIG. 59). When the sound and light side CPU 163 receives the check start command, it sets the end standby state by setting the end standby flag of the sound and light side RAM 165 to "1" in step S2912 of the production control process (FIG. 53). . Further, a check display command is sent to the display control device 82 in step S2913.

When the display control device 82 receives the check display command, the display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to display a notification image Gr indicating that it is a check waiting period or a check result display period. FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 during the check waiting period or the check result display period. As shown in FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b), a notification image Gr "Checking" is displayed at the lower left corner and the lower right corner of the symbol display device 41. Thereby, the player who is paying attention to the symbol display device 41 can check the notification image Gr to understand that the current status is the check waiting period or the check result display period. FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b) show the display contents of the symbol display device 41 in a situation where a game repeat performance is being executed, but they are not applicable when the opening/closing execution mode is being executed and the demonstration performance is being executed. Also, during the check waiting period or the check result display period, the notification image Gr is displayed on the symbol display device 41. As a result, not only the situation where the game replay effect is being executed, but also the notification that the check waiting period or check result display period is in progress even when the opening/closing execution mode is being executed or the demonstration effect is being executed. This can be done on the display device 41. In addition, the content of the notification image Gr is arbitrary, and it is good also as a structure which performs the said notification by making the whole pattern display device 41 dim, for example.

When the display control device 82 receives the check display command, it executes not only the processing for displaying the notification image Gr on the symbol display device 41 but also the processing for continuing the execution of the display effect. Specifically, when a check display command is received while a demonstration performance is being executed, the symbol display device 41 is controlled to display a series of moving images for the demonstration performance repeatedly.

If a check display command is received during execution of a game performance and before the start of the final stop period in the game performance, the timing to start the swinging display in the current game performance is determined. Until then, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed according to the contents of the data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command received from the sound and light side CPU 163 at the start of the production for this game round, but after starting the swinging display. causes the oscillating display to continue even if it is time to start static display in the data table.

With reference to FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b), a description will be given of how a game repeat performance is executed on the symbol display device 41 during the check waiting period or the check result display period. As shown in FIG. 67(a), in a situation where symbols are displayed in a variable manner in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, a position that does not overlap with the display area where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner and the pending display area Ga is displayed. , a notification image Gr indicating that it is a check waiting period or a check result display period is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67(b), symbols are displayed in a swinging manner in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, the symbols waiting in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 are displayed so as to swing in the vertical direction, which is different from the horizontal direction in which the symbols change, within the same standby areas SA1 to SA9. This oscillating display continues even when the original stationary display starts.

When a check display command is received during the final stop period of the performance for the game round, the symbol display device 41 is display-controlled so that the symbol remains displayed statically. When a check display command is received during the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the symbol display device 41 is display-controlled so as to repeat a series of moving image displays during the opening period. When a check display command is received during the opening/closing period in which the special electric winning device 32 is repeatedly opened and closed in the opening/closing execution mode, the symbol display device 41 is display-controlled to repeat a series of video displays during the opening/closing period. When a check display command is received during the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode, the symbol display device 41 is display-controlled so as to repeat a series of operation displays during the ending period.

When the sound and light side CPU 163 enters the end standby state, it makes an affirmative determination in step S2901 of the production control process (FIG. 53). In this case, it is determined in step S2915 whether any production command has been received from the main CPU 63. The performance command is a command sent from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163 to instruct the start of the performance, and specifically includes a demonstration start command, a variation command, an opening command, and an ending command.

If any production command has been received (step S2915: YES), the end standby flag in the sound and light side RAM 165 is cleared to "0" (step S2916). As a result, the termination standby state is released. Thereafter, various effects determination processing upon canceling the end standby is executed (step S2917). In the various production determination processing when canceling the end standby, if the command received this time is a demonstration start command, the production determination processing for the demonstration in step S2903 is executed, and if the command received this time is a variation command, the game is executed in step S2906. If the command received this time is an opening command, execute the production determination process for the opening/closing execution mode in step S2909, and if the command received this time is an ending command, determine the production corresponding to it. Execute processing.

After that, if the end standby state that ended this time has occurred during the execution of the game repeat performance and the standby display is being performed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 (step S2918: YES) ), the final stop process is executed (step S2919). Note that when the sound and light side CPU 163 controls the execution of the performance for the game round, it reads out the data table from the sound and light side ROM 164 to the sound and light side RAM 165 as described above, but this data table does not enter the end standby state. Data is set that indicates the timing at which the standby display is started during the execution period of the performance for the game round in the case where the game is repeated.

In the final stop process, before the performance determined in step S2917, the content of the performance is adjusted so that the symbols are statically displayed on the symbol display device 41 for a final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec). Specifically, the data table for the final stop period is read out as a data table for controlling the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, and after control based on the data table for the final stop period is executed, step S2917 Control is executed based on the data table corresponding to the content of the performance determined in .

Thereafter, a command transmission process when canceling the termination standby is executed (step S2920). In the command sending process, if this is the situation in which a demonstration performance should be started, a demonstration start command is sent to the display control device 82, and if this is a situation in which a game replay should be started, a determination is made. A fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the content of the performance is sent to the display control device 82, and if this is the situation in which opening/closing execution mode should be started, an opening command is sent to the display control device 82, and if this is the situation in which the opening/closing execution mode should be started, the opening command is sent to the display control device 82, and the opening/closing execution mode is started this time. If the situation is such that the ending period of the mode should start, an ending command is sent to the display control device 82.

If the display control device 82 is not in a situation where the oscillating display of the symbols is being continued as a presentation for the game, the display control device 82 controls the execution of the display presentation on the symbol display device 41 as already explained in response to the reception of each of the above commands. I do. On the other hand, when the display control device 82 receives each of the above commands in a situation where the swinging display of the symbols is continued as a performance for a game round (specifically, a demonstration start command, a variation command, or an opening command is received), the display control device 82 (in this case), each symbol being oscillatedly displayed is displayed statically for a final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec), and then the display effect corresponding to the received command is started. In this case, if the display effect to be executed after the final stop period is a display effect with a fixed execution period, such as a game repeat effect or an opening period effect, the final stop period may occur first. In response to this, the execution period of display effects to be executed thereafter is shortened by the final stop period.

Specifically, if the display effect executed after the final stop period is a game repeat effect, the period in which high-speed fluctuation display is performed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is shortened by the final stop period. This makes it possible to generate a final stop period before the start of a new game performance while suppressing the influence on the appearance of the game performance.

Furthermore, if the display effect executed after the final stop period is an opening period effect, the timing for starting the opening period effect is delayed by the final stop period. In the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the performance for the opening/closing period will start immediately after the performance for the opening period ends, but in the performance for the opening/closing period, a series of video displays will be repeated. Therefore, even if the end timing of the opening period performance is delayed until after the start of the opening/closing period, the effect on the appearance of the opening/closing execution mode performance is small.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When a ball enters the ball entry section 24a, 31-34 as a predetermined event, the values of the corresponding various counters 171a-171e, 172a-172e, 173a-173e are incremented by 1, and information on the ball entry history is updated. It is stored in various counters 171a to 171e, 172a to 172e, and 173a to 173e. By performing calculations using the information stored in the various counters 171a to 171e, 172a to 172e, and 173a to 173e, predetermined parameters are derived as calculation results, and information on the derived calculation results. will be notified. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the history of game balls entering the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34. Furthermore, by storing and holding the information on the ball entry history in the pachinko machine 10 itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the information on the ball entry history. In this case, the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where various parameters are derived using information on ball entry history. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a situation different from the situation in which a normal game is played. Therefore, there is no need to parallelize the progress of the normal game and the derivation of various parameters, making it possible to reduce the processing load.

In a situation where various parameters are derived, execution of at least some of the processes for advancing the game is restricted, thereby restricting the progress of the game. This makes it possible to prevent the number of processes per unit time from increasing excessively in situations where various parameters are derived.

When various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history, the calculations are performed after the shooting of game balls is prohibited. This makes it possible to calculate various parameters in a situation where the entry of game balls into the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34, which is the trigger for varying the various parameters, is restricted.

When various parameters are calculated using ball entry history, from the time when the game ball launch is restricted until the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 enters the ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34. Various parameters are calculated after a period longer than the longest period assumed to be required for the calculation. This makes it possible to calculate the various parameters in a situation where the entry of the game ball into the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34, which is the trigger for changing the various parameters, does not occur with certainty.

In a situation where information is set to indicate that various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history and the calculation results are reported (i.e., the check waiting flag or displaying flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1"). is set), the clearing process (step S3709) of the main side RAM 65 is blocked even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and off in a situation where the RAM erase switch is turned on. As a result, if the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where various parameters are calculated, even if the above-mentioned clearing operation is performed by mistake in an attempt to release the restricted situation, the main side RAM 65 will be cleared. It is possible to prevent the process from being executed.

Even in a situation where execution of the clearing process of the main side RAM 65 in response to a clearing operation is blocked as described above, if the main process (Fig. 64) is executed in a situation where the power outage flag is not set to "1" Or, if a checksum abnormality occurs, clearing processing of the main side RAM 65 is executed. Thereby, even if the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where various parameters are calculated, it is possible to leave room for the clearing process of the main side RAM 65 to be executed.

The state in which the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history is released when a predetermined check result display period has elapsed. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the progress of the game is left in a restricted state.

Even if the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history, the execution of the performance on the symbol display device 41 is continued. As a result, even if the progress of the game is restricted due to an opportunity to calculate various parameters while the player is playing the game, it is possible to prevent the performance from ending immediately. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused when there is a restriction on the progress of the game.

If the progression of the game is restricted due to an opportunity to calculate various parameters in a situation where a game replay is being performed on the symbol display device 41, this would normally be an opportunity to end the game replay. Even if the duration of the game round has elapsed, control for ending the performance of the game round is not executed. As a result, it is possible to continue the game replay effect in situations where the progress of the game is restricted, and even when the progress of the game is restricted in situations where various parameters are derived. This makes it possible to make the player think that the execution is continuing.

In a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to calculate various parameters, the state where the game replay is continued is when commands to start new effects such as variation commands, opening commands, and demo start commands are issued. It is canceled when it is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163. This makes it possible to cancel the state in which the game replay is continued without transmitting a special command from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163.

When continuing a game replay in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to calculate various parameters, the standby display at the stage before the symbols are stopped and displayed continues when the game replay is ended. be done. Thereby, it is possible to continue the performance of the game replay in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while making the result of stopping the symbols recognizable to the player. In addition, when the restriction on the progress of the game is lifted and the performance of the repeated game is to be ended, it is only necessary to switch from the standby display to the stop display at the timing when the restriction on the progress of the game is lifted. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly and quickly end the performance of the game replay when the restriction on the progress of the game is lifted.

If the game repeat performance is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted due to the calculation of various parameters, a corresponding notification is also executed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being confused by the fact that the game replay continues for a longer time than expected.

Notifications corresponding to the contents of various parameters calculated using the entry history are sent to the special figure display section 37a where the variable display of special figures is executed and the ordinary figure display section 38a where the variable display of ordinary figures is executed. is executed. As a result, the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a can be used as a display section for making the notification, and the configuration can be simplified compared to a structure in which a dedicated display section is provided. becomes.

When notifications corresponding to the contents of various parameters are executed using the special figure display section 37a and the common figure display section 38a, the special figure is displayed in the special figure display section 37a and the common figure is displayed in the common figure display section 38a. is interrupted. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the notification contents in these special figure display part 37a and regular figure display part 38a clear.

In addition, when the notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters using the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a is finished, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a are changed until the notification starts. The display contents will be restored to the ones displayed immediately before. Thereby, after the end of the notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters, it becomes possible to restart the display of the special figure in the special figure display section 37a and the display of the regular figure in the ordinary figure display section 38a.

When notifications corresponding to the contents of various parameters are executed using the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a, the display mode used when displaying the special figure with respect to the special figure display section 37a is the above-mentioned various parameters. is not used as a display mode for notifications corresponding to the contents of the above-mentioned various parameters, and the display mode used for displaying general maps is not used as a display mode for notifications corresponding to the contents of the above-mentioned various parameters regarding the general map display section 38a. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to clearly understand that notifications corresponding to the contents of various parameters are being executed using the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a.

When notifications corresponding to the contents of various parameters are executed using the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a, the contents of different types of notification targets are sequentially switched and displayed. This makes it possible to display the contents of different types of notification targets using the same display sections 37a and 38a.

<Another form of the thirteenth embodiment>
- When various parameters are calculated using the history of ball entry into the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34, the game ball is prohibited from being ejected; however, the game ball is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the firing of is not prohibited. In this case, when an instruction signal to start checking is received, various parameters are calculated using the information on the ball entry history at that point, so even if the game balls continue to be fired after that, It becomes possible to calculate various parameters without being affected by this.

- Limited to a configuration in which the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are devices that provide notifications corresponding to the contents of various parameters calculated using the history of ball entry into the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34. Instead, the display light emitting section 53 provided on the front door frame 14 may also be used, or a dedicated display section may be provided. By executing the above notification using the display light emitting unit 53 provided in the front door frame 14, it becomes possible to easily confirm the content of the notification. Moreover, by executing the above-mentioned notification using a dedicated display section, the device on which the above-mentioned notification is executed becomes clear to the game hall manager.

In addition, in a configuration in which the above-mentioned notification is executed using a dedicated display section, when an opportunity such as receiving an instruction signal to start a check occurs, the history of ball entry into the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 is used. A configuration may be adopted in which various parameters are calculated, the notification contents of the calculation results are updated, and the notification based on the updated notification contents is continued until the next update is performed. Thereby, by checking the dedicated display unit at any timing, it becomes possible to grasp the notification content corresponding to the immediately previous calculation result. Further, the dedicated display unit may be configured so that its display surface is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52, and may be provided in the board box of the main controller 60. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

- The trigger for executing the calculation using the history of ball entry into the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 is not limited to receiving an instruction signal to start checking from the hall computer HC of the game hall, and for example, The configuration may be such that the trigger occurs each time a predetermined time elapses, or the trigger occurs each time the total period during which game balls are fired reaches a predetermined period. Alternatively, the trigger may occur when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, or the trigger may occur when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. Alternatively, the trigger may occur when the demonstration performance continues for a predetermined period or longer, or the trigger may occur when a predetermined operation section provided on the pachinko machine 10 is operated. The configuration may be such that the trigger occurs when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while a predetermined operation unit is operated.

- When a calculation is performed using the history of balls entering the ball entering sections 24a, 31 to 34, the above embodiment has a configuration in which the payout of game balls is not stopped, but instead of this, the payout of game balls may also be stopped. It may also be configured to be stopped.

- Even when calculations are performed using the history of ball entry into the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34, the display light emitting section 53 displays effects such as a game round effect, an opening/closing mode effect, and a demonstration effect. , the speaker unit 54 and the symbol display device 41 are configured to continue as they are, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance may also be temporarily interrupted. In this case, when the notification of the calculation result is finished, the performance will be restarted from the state where it was once interrupted.

- In a configuration in which calculations using the ball entry history into the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 and notification of the calculation results are performed in a control section separate from the main CPU 63, as in the first embodiment, etc. A configuration may also be adopted in which the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in a situation where the calculation and the notification of the calculation result are executed. Even in this case, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game in a situation where the above calculation and notification of the calculation result are executed.

- In a situation where the main CPU 63 is equipped with an RTC and the date and time measured by the RTC is outside the business hours of the game hall, even if a game ball enters the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34, A configuration may also be adopted in which this is not reflected in the ball entry history. In this case, for example, even if an attempt is made to make the ball entry history into the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 an intentional result outside of business hours of the game hall, it becomes impossible to do so.

- Even if a game ball enters the ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 under a situation where no game ball is launched, it may be configured such that it is not reflected in the ball entry history. In this case, even if the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 take care of the game balls, it is possible to prevent this from being reflected in the ball entry history.

- Although the configuration is such that the progress of the game is restricted before the calculation using the history of ball entry into the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 is started, it is also possible to have a configuration in which these occur simultaneously, and the calculation is executed. It may be configured such that the progress of the game is not restricted at the timing when the game is started, but the progress of the game is restricted at the timing when the calculation result is notified thereafter.

- The state in which the progress of the game is restricted due to the execution of calculations using the history of balls entering the ball entering sections 24a, 31 to 34 is canceled due to a factor different from the passage of the check result display period. A configuration may also be used. For example, it may be configured to be canceled when an instruction signal to end the check is received from the hall computer HC of the game hall, or it may be configured to be canceled by operating an operating section provided in the pachinko machine 10.

- If an opportunity to execute a calculation using the history of ball entry into the ball entering sections 24a, 31 to 34 occurs in a situation where a game round performance is being executed on the symbol display device 41, the game round during the execution The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the performance for the next game is waited in a standby display state, and for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the start of the performance for the next game round is waited for after the static display is completed.

・If an opportunity arises to execute a calculation using the history of ball entry into the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 while the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed on the symbol display device 41, the opening/closing operation is performed during the execution. The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the performance for the execution mode is continued, and may be temporarily interrupted at that point.

・In a configuration where the progress of the game is restricted when it is detected that a fraudulent act has occurred, even if a configuration is applied in which the performance continues even under the situation where the progress of the game is restricted. good. In addition, in a configuration where the progress of the game is restricted when the state of the pachinko machine 10 reaches a predetermined state, a configuration is applied in which the execution of the performance is continued even under a situation where the progress of the game is restricted. You may.

- In a configuration in which a final stop command is sent from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163 at the end of the game performance, when the standby display continues on the symbol display device 41, the final stop command is sent to the main side. It may be configured to be canceled based on being transmitted from the CPU 63 to the sound-light CPU 163. Even in this case, there is no need to send a dedicated command from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163 for canceling the state where the standby display continues on the symbol display device 41.

- The configuration may be such that the values of various parameters calculated using the history of ball entry into the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 are reported as they are. This allows the game hall manager to understand various parameters in detail.

- In addition to or in place of the special pattern display section 37a and the regular pattern display section 38a, the result calculated using the ball entry history into the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 or information corresponding thereto is displayed on the pattern display device. 41 may be used. This makes it easier for the game hall manager to understand the above calculation results.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
The present embodiment differs from the thirteenth embodiment in the manner from the reception of the check start instruction signal to the start of the check waiting period. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the thirteenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the thirteenth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the checking process in this embodiment.

If it is neither the check result display period nor the check waiting period (step S3801 and step S3802: NO), it is determined whether the end opportunity waiting flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" ( Step S3803). The end trigger wait flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that it is waiting for the start of the check waiting period after receiving the check start instruction signal.

If the end trigger wait flag is not set to "1" (step S3803: NO), the current game cycle is , the opening/closing execution mode, or the general electricity control is being executed (step S3805). If the current game time is being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, or the regular power supply control is being executed (step S3805: YES), set the end trigger wait flag in the main side RAM 65 to "1". (Step S3806). This results in an end opportunity waiting period for waiting for the start of the check waiting period. On the other hand, if the current state is neither during the execution of the game round, during the opening/closing execution mode, nor during the execution of the regular power supply control (step S3805: NO), the processes of steps S3809 to S3814 are executed. In addition, if the end trigger wait flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" and the end trigger wait period is in progress (step S3803: YES), the current game time is in execution, the opening/closing execution mode, and the normal On the condition that the electrical control is not in progress (step S3807: NO), after clearing the end trigger waiting flag in the main side RAM 65 to "0" and ending the end trigger waiting period (step S3808), step The processes from S3809 to S3814 are executed.

More specifically, regarding the processing from step S3809 to step S3814, first, a game ball firing prohibition process is executed (step S3809) in the same way as step S3404 of the checking process (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment. Thereafter, similarly to step S3408 of the checking process (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment, the display contents of the special symbol display section 37a and the general symbol display section 38a are stored (step S3810). Similar to step S3409 of the check process (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment, a process for starting the check waiting display of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a is executed (step S3811). Further, in the same way as step S3410 of the checking process (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment, a setting process is executed to the check waiting counter (step S3812), and the checking process (FIG. 59), the check wait flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3813), and the check is started similarly to step S3412 of the checking process (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment. The command is sent to the sound and light side CPU 163 (step S3814). This starts the check waiting period.

Here, in this embodiment, if a check start instruction signal is received during execution of a game round, during opening/closing execution mode, or during execution of general electricity control, the system waits for the start of the check waiting period and starts the game round. The check waiting period is started when the control is no longer in progress, in the opening/closing execution mode, or in the execution of general electricity control. Thereby, there is no need to execute processing for interrupting these situations and then restoring them, making it possible to reduce storage capacity and processing load. In addition, since there is no need to interrupt each situation in this way, in this embodiment, when the check waiting period starts, the game session interruption process (step S3405) as in the thirteenth embodiment, and the interruption of the opening/closing execution mode are performed. The process (step S3406) and the interruption process (step S3407) of general electricity control are not executed.

When the check wait flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" and a check wait period begins, an affirmative determination is made in step S3802 of the check process, and the check wait process is executed in step S3815. The processing contents of the check waiting process are the same as the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. In addition, when the check waiting process is executed and the check waiting period is switched to the check result display period, by making an affirmative determination in step S3801 of the check process, the check result displaying process is performed in step S3816. Execute.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing processing during display of check results.

In the check result display processing, first, the value of the display counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S3901). Then, it is determined whether the value of the displaying counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S3902).

If the value of the displayed counter is not "0" (step S3902: NO), any one of the normal target period, opening/closing execution mode target period, and high-frequency support mode target period is included in the display period of the check result. It is determined whether it is the timing to end and switch to the next sequential target period (step S3903). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3903, display content update processing is executed (step S3904). In the update process, the special figure display section 37a and the general display are set so that the display contents correspond to the next target period for the current target period among the normal target period, opening/closing execution mode target period, and high-frequency support mode target period. Display control is performed on the diagram display section 38a. The processing contents of step S3903 and step S3904 are the same as the processing contents of step S3603 and step S3604 of the check result displaying process (FIG. 62) in the thirteenth embodiment.

If it is determined in step S3902 that the value of the displaying counter in the main side RAM 65 is "0", a special figure is displayed in the same way as in step S3605 of the check result displaying process (FIG. 62) in the thirteenth embodiment. Display return processing for the section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a is executed (step S3905). Thereafter, the display flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3906). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S2707 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), and the process returns to the state in which the processes of steps S2708 to S2719 are executed. After that, similar to step S3610 of the check result display process (FIG. 62) in the thirteenth embodiment, the game ball firing prohibition canceling process is executed (step S3907).

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 70, the progression of the end opportunity waiting period, check waiting period, and check result display period will be described. FIG. 70(a) shows the timing of outputting the check start instruction signal from the hall computer HC, FIG. 70(b) shows the execution period of the game round, and FIG. 70(c) shows the execution period of the general electricity control. , FIG. 70(d) shows the prohibited period for firing game balls, FIG. 70(e) shows the end opportunity waiting period, FIG. 70(f) shows the check waiting period, and FIG. 70(g) shows the Indicates the display period of check results.

As shown in FIG. 70(b), at timing t1 during the execution of a game round, a check start instruction signal is output from the hall computer HC as shown in FIG. 70(a). In this case, the game round is continued without being interrupted at the timing of t1. Further, at the timing of t1, a termination opportunity waiting period begins as shown in FIG. 70(e).

Thereafter, at the timing t2 during the execution of the game round, the general-purpose electric power control is started as shown in FIG. 70(c). Then, the game round ends at timing t3 during execution of the general map and general electric power control as shown in FIG. 70(b). However, since the general electric power control is still being executed, the termination trigger waiting period continues.

Thereafter, at timing t4, the general electric power control ends as shown in FIG. 70(c). This results in a situation in which the game is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, or the regular electricity control is not in progress. Therefore, at the timing t4, the end opportunity waiting period shifts to the check waiting period as shown in FIGS. 70(e) and 70(f). In this case, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a become display contents for notifying that it is a check waiting period. Further, at the timing t4, firing of the game ball is prohibited as shown in FIG. 70(d).

Thereafter, at timing t5, the fixed time T1 elapses from timing t4, and the check waiting period ends. At the timing t5, various parameter calculations are performed using the ball entry history into each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34. In this case, the time T1 starts from the time when a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism 27 in response to the operation of the firing operation device 28, until the fired game ball reaches one of the ball entry parts 24a, From the longest time required for the main CPU 63 to specify that a ball has entered the ball into the ball entry portions 24a and 31 to 34 and has been detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a corresponding to the ball entry portions 24a and 31 to 34. It is also set to a long enough time. As already explained, firing of game balls is prohibited at timing t4. Therefore, by the time the check waiting period elapses, all the game balls flowing down the gaming area PA will no longer exist, and by the time the check waiting period has elapsed, the history of balls entering each ball entering section 24a, 31 to 34 will be All have been acquired.

As shown in FIG. 70(g), the check result display period starts at the timing t5. During the display period of the check results, as already explained, the display corresponding to the determination results for various parameters during normal times is displayed in the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a, and the normal target period and the opening/closing execution mode. Displays corresponding to the determination results for various parameters during the opening/closing execution mode target period executed in the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a and the determination results for various parameters during the high-frequency support mode are displayed. A high-frequency support mode target period in which the display is executed on the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a occurs sequentially.

Thereafter, at timing t6, a fixed time period T2 has elapsed from timing t5, and the check result display period ends as shown in FIG. 70(g). As a result, at the timing t6, the state in which the firing of game balls is prohibited is canceled as shown in FIG. 70(d).

According to the embodiment described in detail above, in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 is performing a specific operation such as a game round, an opening/closing execution mode, and a general pattern/universal power control, the trigger for calculating various parameters using the ball entry history is Even if this occurs, the progress of the game is not restricted. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the gaming machine, the opening/closing execution mode, and the regular electricity supply control from being obstructed by the occurrence of calculation triggers for various parameters.

If an opportunity to calculate various parameters occurs in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 is performing one of the game rounds, opening/closing execution mode, and regular power supply control, the specific operation to be executed is completed. Afterwards, the progress of the game will be restricted. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in response to the occurrence of a calculation opportunity for various parameters, while preventing the execution of the specific operation from being inhibited.

In a situation where a game round is being played, the progress of the game is not restricted even if an opportunity to calculate various parameters occurs. This makes it possible to calculate various parameters under conditions where the progress of the game is restricted while preventing the game from being interrupted.

In the situation where the opening/closing execution mode is being performed, the progress of the game is not restricted even if an opportunity to calculate various parameters occurs. This makes it possible to calculate various parameters in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while preventing the opening/closing execution mode from being interrupted.

In addition, if the special electric prize winning device 32 is open during the opening/closing execution mode, execution of calculations using the history of ball entry into the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 and restriction of the progress of the game are on standby, and opening/closing execution is performed. Even in the mode, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed, the execution of calculations using the history of ball entry into the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 and the restriction of the progress of the game may be configured not to be on standby. .

<Fifteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, management of ball entry history into each ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34, calculations using the management results, and notification of the calculation results are executed by the sound-light side CPU 163 instead of the main side CPU 63. This is different from the thirteenth embodiment described above. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the thirteenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the thirteenth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 201 provided in the MPU 162 of the audio emission control device 81. Note that, in addition to the input port 201, the MPU 162 is provided with an input port for receiving commands from the main CPU 63.

The input port 201 is provided with a plurality of buffers 202a to 202g. Specifically, first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g through signal paths 203a to 203g, and each of the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g receives a signal to be input. When the input signal is at a LOW level, "0" information is stored as the first data, and when the input target signal is at a HI level, "1" information is stored as the second data. Note that the relationship between these LOW and HI and the first data and second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 202a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the first signal of LOW level in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, and the first winning hole detection sensor 42a outputs one game ball. When a ball is detected, a first signal at HI level is output for a specific period of time. This specific period is a period sufficient for the audio and optical side CPU 163 to specify that the first signal at HI level is input to the first buffer 202a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 202b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a second signal of LOW level in a situation where no new game balls are detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, and the second winning hole detection sensor 43a outputs a second game ball. When a ball is detected, a second signal at HI level is output for a specific period of time. This specific period is a period sufficient for the audio and optical side CPU 163 to specify that the second signal at HI level is input to the second buffer 202b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning a prize opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 202c. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs a third signal of LOW level in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, and one game ball is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. When a ball is detected, a third signal at HI level is output for a specific period of time. This specific period is a period sufficient for the audio and optical side CPU 163 to specify that the third signal at HI level is input to the third buffer 202c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 202d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the fourth signal at LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and when one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. A fourth signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the audio and optical side CPU 163 to specify that the fourth signal at HI level is input to the fourth buffer 202d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 202e. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the fifth signal of LOW level in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a, and the first operating port detection sensor 46a outputs the fifth signal of LOW level. When a ball is detected, a fifth signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the audio and optical side CPU 163 to specify that the fifth signal at HI level is input to the fifth buffer 202e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 202f. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the sixth signal of LOW level in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a, and the second operating port detection sensor 47a outputs the sixth signal of LOW level. When a ball is detected, a sixth signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the audio and optical side CPU 163 to specify that the sixth signal at HI level is input to the sixth buffer 202f.

A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 202g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the seventh signal at a LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the exit detection sensor 48a, and when one game ball is detected by the exit detection sensor 48a. In this case, the seventh signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the audio and optical side CPU 163 to specify that the seventh signal at HI level is input to the seventh buffer 202g.

FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence area 204 provided in the sound-light side ROM 164. The correspondence area 204 includes first to seventh correspondence areas 204a to 204a in one-to-one correspondence to the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g provided in the input port 201 of the MPU 162 of the audio emission control device 81. 204g is provided.

In the first correspondence area 204a, information indicating that it is a general winning opening 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the first buffer 202a in the sound/light side CPU 163 at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10. It is stored in advance in . In addition, the first correspondence area 204a also includes information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 and information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 (10 balls). It is stored in advance when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped. In the second correspondence area 204b, information indicating that the signal is a general winning opening 31 is stored at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 as information for specifying the type of signal input to the second buffer 202b by the sound-light side CPU 163. It is stored in advance in . In addition, in the second correspondence area 204b, there is information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31, as well as information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 (10 balls). It is stored in advance when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped. In the third correspondence area 204c, information indicating that the signal is a general winning opening 31 is stored at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the third buffer 202c by the sound-light side CPU 163. It is stored in advance in . In addition, the third correspondence area 204c also includes information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 and information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 (10 balls). It is stored in advance when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped.

In the fourth correspondence area 204d, information indicating that it is a special electric winning device 32 is stored at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 202d by the sound-light side CPU 163. It is stored in advance in . In addition, in the fourth correspondence area 204d, there is information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32, as well as information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the special electric winning device 32 (15 balls). It is stored in advance when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped. In the fifth correspondence area 204e, information indicating that the signal is the first operating port 33 is included as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 202e in the sound/light side CPU 163 when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped. pre-stored in the step. Further, in the fifth correspondence area 204e, information indicating that it is the first operating port 33 and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the first operating port 33 (1 ) are also stored in advance when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped. In the sixth correspondence area 204f, information indicating that the signal is the second operating port 34 is included as information for specifying the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 202f in the sound/light side CPU 163. pre-stored in the step. In addition, the sixth correspondence area 204f contains information indicating that the second operating port 34 is used, as well as information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the second operating port 34 (1 ) are also stored in advance when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped. In the seventh correspondence area 204g, information indicating that the signal is the output port 24a is stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 202g. Stored.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the check process (step S2706) is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), but in this embodiment, the check process is not executed. Additionally, in step S2707 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), it is configured not only to determine whether or not the game is stopped, but also to determine whether or not it is the check result display period. However, in this embodiment, although a determination is made as to whether or not the game is being stopped, a determination as to whether or not it is the check result display period is not executed. Further, in the ball entry detection process in step S2710 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), the same process as the ball entry detection process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment is executed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), the management output process is executed as the process following the external information setting process in step S2719.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the management output process executed by the main CPU 63.

First, a management target counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "7" (step S4001). The managed target counter identifies by the main side CPU 63 that there is a managed target for which it has not yet been determined whether or not the signal output state to the sound/light side CPU 163 should be changed in the current management output process. In addition, it is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify whether or not the signal output state to the audio/light side CPU 163 should be changed for which management target. In one management output process, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the signal output state to the sound/light CPU 163 should be changed.The management targets are the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. It is. Therefore, first, "7" is set in the managed counter.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the output state of the signal to the audio-optical CPU 163 for the managed object corresponding to the current managed object counter value is at the HI level (step S4002). If the level is not HI (step S4002: NO), it is determined whether the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S4003). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "7" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether the first output flag is set to "1", If the value of the counter to be managed is "6" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not the second output flag is set to "1", and the value of the counter to be managed is determined. is "5" and corresponds to the third winning a prize opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", and the value of the managed counter is "4". Yes, if it corresponds to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not the fourth output flag is set to "1", and the value of the managed counter is "3" and the first operating port detection sensor 46a is determined. If it corresponds to the second operating port detection sensor 47a, it is determined whether the fifth output flag is set to "1" or not, and the value of the managed counter is "2" and it corresponds to the second operating port detection sensor 47a. In this case, it is determined whether the sixth output flag is set to "1", and if the value of the managed counter is "1" and corresponds to the outlet 24a, the seventh output flag is set to "1". 1" is set. Note that these first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 10), similarly to the first embodiment.

If the output flag corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed is set to "1" (step S4003: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed among the first to seventh signals is set to HI level. (step S4004). Thereafter, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S4005).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4002, it is determined whether an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level (step S4006). Specifically, whether a HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals was switched from LOW level to HI level. Determine whether or not. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process to be described later for monitoring the input port 201 in the audio/light side CPU 163, and is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process to be described later for monitoring the input port 201 in the audio/light side CPU 163. This is a period during which the output state of the output state can be reliably specified by the audio and optical side CPU 163. If an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S4006: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the LOW level ( Step S4007).

If a negative determination is made in step S4003, if the process of step S4005 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S4006, or if the process of step S4007 is executed, the value of the managed counter in the main side RAM 65 is set to 1. Subtract (step S4008). Then, it is determined whether the value of the managed counter after being subtracted by 1 is "0" (step S4009). If the value of the managed object counter is 1 or more (step S4009: NO), the processes from step S4002 onwards are executed for the managed object corresponding to the new managed object counter value.

Next, the effect control processing of this embodiment executed by the sound and light side CPU 163 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 74. Note that the production control process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec).

If the sound-light side CPU 163 has received the opening command from the main-side CPU 63 (step S4101: YES), it sets "1" in the opening/closing execution mode flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 165 (step S4102). The opening/closing execution mode flag is a flag used by the sound/light side CPU 163 to specify that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect. Thereafter, effect setting processing for the opening/closing execution mode is executed (step S4103). In the performance setting process for the opening/closing execution mode, a data table for the opening/closing execution mode is read from the sound/light side ROM 164 to the sound/light side RAM 165. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting section 53 and sound output control of the speaker section 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 perform the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. It also sends an opening command to the display control device 82 . By receiving the opening command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect for the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

When the sound-light side CPU 163 has received the ending command from the main-side CPU 63 (step S4104: YES), it clears the opening/closing execution mode flag of the sound-light side RAM 165 to "0" (step S4105). Thereafter, an ending effect setting process is executed (step S4106). In the ending performance setting process, the ending data table is read from the sound and light side ROM 164 to the sound and light side RAM 165. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting section 53 and sound output control of the speaker section 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 perform the effect of the ending period. It also sends an ending command to the display control device 82 . By receiving the ending command, the display control device 82 controls the symbol display device 41 to display the ending period display effect.

If the sound-light side CPU 163 has received the high-frequency start command from the main-side CPU 63 (step S4107: YES), it sets "1" in the high-frequency support flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 165 (step S4108). The high frequency start command is sent from the main CPU 63 when the high frequency support mode is started. Further, the high-frequency support flag is a flag for specifying in the audio-optical side CPU 163 that the mode is high-frequency support mode. Thereafter, a production setting process for high-frequency support is executed (step S4109). In the performance setting process for high frequency support, a data table for high frequency support mode is read from the sound and light side ROM 164 to the sound and light side RAM 165. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting section 53 and sound output control of the speaker section 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the display light-emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 perform effects for the high-frequency support mode. It also sends a high-frequency start command to the display control device 82 . By receiving the high-frequency start command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that a display effect for the high-frequency support mode is executed.

If the sound-light side CPU 163 has received the high-frequency end command from the main-side CPU 63 (step S4110: YES), it clears the high-frequency support flag in the sound-light side RAM 165 to "0" (step S4111). Note that the high-frequency end command is sent from the main CPU 63 when the high-frequency support mode ends. Thereafter, a production setting process for low-frequency support is executed (step S4112). In the performance setting process for low frequency support, a data table for low frequency support mode is read from the sound and light side ROM 164 to the sound and light side RAM 165. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting section 53 and sound output control of the speaker section 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the display light-emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 perform effects for the low-frequency support mode. It also sends a high-frequency end command to the display control device 82 . By receiving the high-frequency end command, the display control device 82 controls the symbol display device 41 to display a display effect for the low-frequency support mode.

When the sound-light side CPU 163 has received the door opening command from the main-side CPU 63 (step S4113: YES), it sets "1" to the door opening flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 165 (step S4114). The door open command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 when the front door frame 14 changes from the closed state to the open state. Further, the door open flag is a flag used by the sound-light side CPU 163 to specify that the front door frame 14 is in an open state. Thereafter, notification start processing is executed (step S4115). In the notification start process, a data table for door open notification is read from the audio-optical side ROM 164 to the audio-optical side RAM 165. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting section 53 and sound output control of the speaker section 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, a notification indicating that the front door frame 14 is in the open state is executed in the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54. It also sends a door open command to the display control device 82 . By receiving the door open command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that a notification indicating that the front door frame 14 is in the open state is executed.

If the sound-light side CPU 163 has received the door closing command from the main-side CPU 63 (step S4116: YES), it clears the door open flag in the sound-light side RAM 165 to "0" (step S4117). The door close command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 when the front door frame 14 changes from an open state to a closed state. Thereafter, notification end processing is executed (step S4118). In the notification termination process, the notification in the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 indicating that the front door frame 14 is in the open state is terminated. It also sends a door close command to the display control device 82 . Upon receiving the door close command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the notification indicating that the front door frame 14 is in the open state is terminated.

After that, a history setting process is executed in step S4119, a check process is executed in step S4120, and other processes are executed in step S4121. In other processes, processes such as those performed when a variation command and a type command are received from the main CPU 63 are executed.

Next, the history setting process executed in step S4119 of the production control process (FIG. 74) will be described.

First, the normal counter area 211, opening/closing execution mode counter area 212, and high-frequency support mode counter area 213 provided in the audio-optical RAM 165 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 75. Each of these areas 211 to 213 includes first counters 211a, 212a, 213a, second counters 211b, 212b, 213b, third counters 211c, 212c, 213c, fourth counters 211d, 212d, 213d, and a fifth counter. 211e, 212e, 213e, sixth counters 211f, 212f, 213f, and seventh counters 211g, 212g, 213g are provided. The first counters 211a, 212a, and 213a store information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 202a is changed from LOW level to HI level. The second counters 211b, 212b, and 213b store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 202b is changed from LOW level to HI level. The third counters 211c, 212c, and 213c store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 202c is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fourth counters 211d, 212d, and 213d store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 202d is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifth counters 211e, 212e, and 213e store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e is changed from LOW level to HI level. The sixth counters 211f, 212f, and 213f store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f is changed from LOW level to HI level. The seventh counters 211g, 212g, and 213g store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 202g is changed from LOW level to HI level.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed in step S4119 of the effect control process (FIG. 74) in the sound and light side CPU 163.

In the history setting process, if the door open flag in the sound/light side RAM 165 is set to "1", that is, if the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step S4201: YES), the normal history setting process is performed. (Step S4204), neither the history setting process in the opening/closing execution mode (Step S4205) nor the history setting process in the high-frequency support mode (Step S4206) is executed. Since the gaming area PA is formed by a space divided into the front and back by the back side of the window panel 52 provided on the front door frame 14 and the front side of the game board 24, when the front door frame 14 is in an open state, Even if the game area PA is opened forward and a game ball is fired toward the game area PA in that situation, the game ball cannot normally flow down the game area PA. In addition, if a game ball enters the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 when the front door frame 14 is open, the game hall manager may This is a case where the front door frame 14 is left open and game balls enter the game ball due to maintenance or the like. Since such entering of a game ball is not an entering of a game ball in the execution situation of a regular game, it is not necessary to manage such entering of a game ball. Therefore, in the history setting process, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state as described above, none of the processes from step S4204 to step S4206 is executed.

If none of the door opening flag, opening/closing execution mode flag, and high frequency support flag in the sound/light side RAM 165 are set to "1", that is, the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the opening/closing execution mode and high frequency support flag are not set to "1". If the mode is not one of the frequency support modes (steps S4201 to S4203: NO), normal history setting processing is executed (step S4204). In normal history setting processing, when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 202a of the input port 201 has switched to HI level, the value of the first counter 211a for normal use is incremented by 1, When it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has switched to the HI level, the value of the second counter 211b for normal use is incremented by 1, and the value of the second signal input to the third buffer 202c is increased by 1. When it is confirmed that the signal has switched to HI level, the value of the third normal counter 211c is incremented by 1, and it is confirmed that the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 202d has switched to HI level. In this case, the value of the fourth counter 211d for normal use is incremented by 1, and when it is confirmed that the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e has switched to HI level, the value of the fifth counter 211d for normal use is incremented by 1. When it is confirmed that the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f has switched to HI level, the value of the normal sixth counter 211f is added by one, and the value is added to the seventh buffer 202g. When it is confirmed that the inputted seventh signal has switched to the HI level, the value of the seventh normal counter 211g is incremented by one.

If the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the opening/closing execution mode (step S4201: NO, step S4202: YES), history setting processing in the opening/closing execution mode is executed (step S4205). In the history setting process during the opening/closing execution mode, when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 202a of the input port 201 has switched to the HI level, the value of the first counter 212a for the opening/closing execution mode is set. When it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has switched to HI level, the value of the second counter 212b for the opening/closing execution mode is added by 1, and When it is confirmed that the third signal inputted to the fourth buffer 202d has switched to the HI level, the value of the third counter 212c for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1, and the fourth signal inputted to the fourth buffer 202d is changed to the HI level. When it is confirmed that the switch has switched to the HI level, the value of the fourth counter 212d for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1, and it is confirmed that the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e has switched to the HI level. In this case, the value of the fifth counter 212e for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1, and when it is confirmed that the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f has switched to HI level, the value of the fifth counter 212e for the opening/closing execution mode is increased by 1. The value of the 6th counter 212f is incremented by 1, and when it is confirmed that the 7th signal input to the 7th buffer 202g has switched to HI level, the value of the 7th counter 212g for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1. .

When the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the high-frequency support mode is in effect (step S4201: NO, step S4203: YES), history setting processing in the high-frequency support mode is executed (step S4206). In the history setting process during the high-frequency support mode, when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 202a of the input port 201 has switched to the HI level, the first counter 213a for the high-frequency support mode When it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has switched to the HI level, the value of the second counter 213b for high-frequency support mode is added by 1, and the When it is confirmed that the third signal input to the third buffer 202c has switched to the HI level, the value of the third counter 213c for high frequency support mode is incremented by 1, and the value is input to the fourth buffer 202d. When it is confirmed that the fourth signal has switched to HI level, the value of the fourth counter 213d for high frequency support mode is incremented by 1, and the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e is switched to HI level. When it is confirmed that the 6th signal input to the 6th buffer 202f has been switched to HI level, the value of the 5th counter 213e for high frequency support mode is incremented by 1. When the value of the sixth counter 213f for high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1 and it is confirmed that the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 202g has switched to HI level, the value of the sixth counter 213f for high-frequency support mode is Add 1 to the value of the counter 213g.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the check process executed in step S4120 of the production control process (FIG. 74) in the sound and light side CPU 163.

If it is not the check result display period (step S4301: NO), the processes of steps S4303 to S4308 are executed on the condition that a check start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S4302: YES). The check start command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the sound/light side CPU 163 when a check start instruction signal is sent from the hall computer HC to the main side CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a check start command is sent from the main side CPU 63 to the audio/light side CPU 163 when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the demonstration display was started. A configuration may also be adopted in which a check start command is sent from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163 when a predetermined operation section provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is operated, and when a predetermined time comes, the check start command is sent to the main side CPU 63. A check start command may be sent from the CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163, and the check start command is sent from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163 every time a predetermined period (for example, 120 min) has elapsed since the sending of the previous check start command. A configuration may also be used in which commands are sent. Furthermore, the trigger for executing the processes of steps S4303 to S4308 is not limited to the configuration in which the trigger for executing the processing from the main CPU 63 is the reception of a command from the main CPU 63, but the event triggering the transmission of the check start command as described above is It may be configured such that the sound and light side CPU 163 determines whether or not the event has occurred, and executes the processes of steps S4303 to S4308 when the sound and light side CPU 163 determines that the event has occurred.

In the processing from step S4303 to step S4308, first, normal arithmetic processing is executed (step S4303). In the normal arithmetic processing, by referring to the contents of the first to seventh correspondence areas 204a to 204g of the sound-light side ROM 164, the same ball entry part among the first to seventh counters 211a to 211g for normal use is calculated. The values of the counters corresponding to 24a and 31 to 34 are summed. Specifically, since information indicating that the first to third correspondence areas 204a to 204c are general winning openings 31 is stored as already explained, these first to third correspondence areas 204a to 204c The total value K2 is calculated by summing the values of the first to third normal counters 211a to 211c corresponding to the counter 204c. On the other hand, the fourth to seventh correspondence areas 204d to 204g store information corresponding to separate ball entry sections 24a and 32 to 34, respectively. In this case, the values of the fourth to seventh counters 211d to 211g for normal use are grasped as the values of the different ball entry parts 24a and 32 to 34, respectively. Specifically, the value of the seventh counter 211g for normal use is set to K1 corresponding to the outlet 24a, the value of the fourth counter 211d for normal use is set to K3 corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32, and the value of the fifth counter for normal use is set to K3 corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32. The value of 211e is set to K4 corresponding to the first operating port 33, and the value of the sixth normal counter 211f is set to K5 corresponding to the second operating port 34. Then, parameters 7 and 8 are calculated in the same way as the aggregation process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. Thereafter, processing similar to the parameter management processing (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is executed for various parameters during normal operation. In other words, if the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, the calculated various parameters are considered to be in the first range, and the value of the seventh parameter is 0. If only one of the conditions that the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 7 or the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the calculated various parameters are considered to be in the second range, and the value of the seventh parameter is determined to be within the second range. If the value of the parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, the various parameters calculated are determined to be in the third range. Execute against. Then, information on the determination result is written into the main side RAM 65.

Thereafter, calculation processing for the opening/closing execution mode is executed (step S4304). In the calculation process for the opening/closing execution mode, the total value K2 is calculated by summing the values of the first to third counters 212a to 212c for the opening/closing execution mode, as in the normal calculation process (step S4303). . Further, the value of the seventh counter 212g for the opening/closing execution mode is set to K1 corresponding to the outlet 24a, the value of the fourth counter 212d for the opening/closing execution mode is set to K3 corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32, and the value of the fourth counter 212d for the opening/closing execution mode is set to K3 corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32. The value of the fifth counter 212e is set to K4 corresponding to the first operating port 33, and the value of the sixth counter 212f for opening/closing execution mode is set to K5 corresponding to the second operating port 34. Then, parameters 7 and 8 are calculated in the same way as the aggregation process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. Thereafter, processing similar to the parameter management processing (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is executed for various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, if the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, the calculated various parameters are considered to be in the first range, and the value of the seventh parameter is 0. If only one of the conditions that the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 7 or the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the calculated various parameters are considered to be in the second range, and the value of the seventh parameter is determined to be within the second range. When the value of the parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, the various calculated parameters are determined to be within the third range. Execute against parameters. Then, information on the determination result is written into the main side RAM 65.

Thereafter, arithmetic processing for high-frequency support mode is executed (step S4305). In the arithmetic processing for the high-frequency support mode, the total value K2 is obtained by summing the values of the first to third counters 213a to 213c for the high-frequency support mode, similarly to the normal arithmetic processing (step S4303). calculate. Further, the value of the seventh counter 213g for the high-frequency support mode is set to K1 corresponding to the outlet 24a, and the value of the fourth counter 213d for the high-frequency support mode is set to K3 corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32, The value of the fifth counter 213e for mode is K4 corresponding to the first operating port 33, and the value of the sixth counter 213f for high frequency support mode is K5 corresponding to the second operating port 34. Then, parameters 7 and 8 are calculated in the same way as the aggregation process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. Thereafter, processing similar to the parameter management processing (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is executed for various parameters in the high-frequency support mode. In other words, if the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, the calculated various parameters are considered to be in the first range, and the value of the seventh parameter is 0. If only one of the conditions that the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the calculated various parameters are considered to be in the second range, and the value of the seventh parameter is determined to be within the second range. When the value of the parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, the various calculated parameters are determined to be within the third range. Execute for various parameters. Then, information on the determination result is written into the main side RAM 65.

Thereafter, processing to start displaying the calculation results is executed (step S4306). In the display start process, a determination result command corresponding to information on each determination result derived in each calculation process of steps S4303 to S4305 is transmitted to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the determination result command, it causes the symbol display device 41 to display all the information of each determination result derived in each calculation process of steps S4303 to S4305. As a result, an image showing which of the first range, the second range, and the third range each parameter corresponds to during normal operation, and an image showing whether the various parameters during the opening/closing execution mode correspond to the first range, second range, and third range are displayed. An image showing which of the three ranges it corresponds to, and an image showing whether various parameters in high-frequency support mode correspond to the first range, second range, or third range are displayed as a graphic. displayed on the device 41. In this case, the images corresponding to the information of these judgment results are the corner portions of the pattern display device 41, which images correspond to various parameters in normal mode, various parameters in opening/closing execution mode, and various parameters in high-frequency support mode. Each of these images is displayed in a manner that allows the administrator of the game hall to recognize whether the game is being played or not.

Thereafter, information corresponding to the display period (specifically, 30 seconds) of the check result is set in the displaying counter provided in the sound/light side RAM 165 (step S4307). The value set in the displaying counter is periodically subtracted (for example, every 4 msec). Further, the display flag provided in the sound/light side RAM 165 is set to "1" (step S4308). The on-display flag is a flag used by the sound-light side CPU 163 to specify that it is the check result display period.

If the display flag in the sound/light side RAM 165 is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S4301. In this case, the value of the displaying counter in the sound/light side RAM 165 is subtracted by 1 (step S4309). Then, it is determined whether the value of the displaying counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S4310). If the value of the displaying counter is "0" (step S4310: YES), a display end process of the calculation result is executed (step S4311). In the display termination process, a display termination command is transmitted to the display control device 82 so that the display of images corresponding to the information of each of the above-mentioned determination results on the symbol display device 41 is terminated. Upon receiving the display end command, the display control device 82 controls the symbol display device 41 so that the display of the image corresponding to the information of each of the above-mentioned determination results is ended.

Thereafter, the display flag in the sound/light side RAM 165 is cleared to "0" (step S4312). Further, when the process of step S4312 is executed, each counter 211a to 211g in the normal counter area 211, each counter 212a to 212g in the open/close execution mode counter area 212, and each counter 213a in the high frequency support mode counter area 213 Clear the value of ~213g to "0". As a result, the ball entry history of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 is initialized, and management of the ball entry history is newly started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the process of step S4312 is executed, each counter 211a to 211g in the normal counter area 211, each counter 212a to 212g in the open/close execution mode counter area 212, and high frequency support The configuration may be such that the values of each of the counters 213a to 213g in the mode counter area 213 are maintained as they are. In this case, the ball entry histories of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 are accumulated in such a way that the notification of the calculation result using the ball entry history is executed a plurality of times. In addition, in this configuration, based on the reception of a history deletion signal from the hall computer HC or the occurrence of a deletion operation using the operation unit provided in the pachinko machine 10, the ball entry history of the ball entry parts 24a, 31 to 34 is may be deleted.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the accumulation of the ball entry history of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34, the calculation using the ball entry history, and the notification of the result of the calculation are performed not by the main side CPU 63 but by the sound and light side. It is executed by the CPU 163. As a result, while suppressing an increase in the processing load on the main CPU 63 that centrally manages the progress of the game, it is possible to accumulate the ball entry history of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34, and perform calculations using the ball entry history. , and notification of the calculation results.

The ball entry results of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 are transmitted as sound from the main CPU 63 using a dedicated signal path that is separate from the signal path for transmitting commands from the main CPU 63 to the sound and light CPU 163. It is transmitted to the optical side CPU 163. This makes it possible to transmit the ball entry results of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163 without increasing the number of commands.

Information indicating which of the ball entering sections 24a, 31 to 34 the signal path through which the ball entering results of the ball entering sections 24a, 31 to 34 are transmitted corresponds to, and information corresponding to each signal path. Information on the number of prize balls for game balls is stored in advance in the sound-light side ROM 164. This allows processing for understanding which ball entry result of each signal path corresponds to which ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34, and information on the number of prize balls of game balls corresponding to each signal path. There is no need for transmission from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163.

Note that the configuration is limited to a configuration in which the ball entry results of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 are transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the sound-light side CPU 163 using a dedicated signal path different from the signal path for commands. Instead, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the audio/light side CPU 163 using a signal path for commands. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a command corresponding to the type of each ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163. In this configuration, each command may include information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34, and the information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each command is stored in the sound-light side ROM 164. The configuration may be stored in advance.

<Sixteenth embodiment>
In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the calculation results of various parameters using the history of ball entry into each ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 are announced using the special symbol display section 37a and the regular symbol display section 38a. However, in this embodiment, the display section for executing this notification is different. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the thirteenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the thirteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

In this embodiment, the main control board 61 of the main control device 60 is provided with notification display devices 215 to 217. First, the main controller 60 will be explained. 78 is a front view of the main controller 60, and FIG. 79 is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 78.

As shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. As shown in FIG. 79, an MPU 62 is mounted on an element mounting surface 61a, which is one plate surface of the main control board 61. The board box 60a is formed transparent so that the MPU 62 housed in the board box 60a can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 60a. Note that although the board box 60a is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as it is possible to visually observe the MPU 62 housed in the board box 60a from outside the board box 60a. The main controller 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in the board box 60a so that the opposing wall 60b facing the element mounting surface 61a of the main control board 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 forward of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and exposing the back surface of the resin base 21, it becomes possible to visually see the opposing wall 60b of the board box 60a, and It becomes possible to visually observe the MPU 62 through the opposing wall portion 60b.

The board box 60a is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies 60c, 60d back and forth, and as shown in FIG. 78, these case bodies 60c, 60d are separated. A connecting portion 60e is provided to prevent the separation of the case bodies 60c and 60d and to leave a mark when the case bodies 60c and 60d are separated. A plurality of coupling portions 60e are arranged in parallel on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 60a. As a result, even if some of the joints 60e are used to prevent the case bodies 60c and 60d from separating, even if some of the joints 60e are destroyed and the case bodies 60c and 60d are separated, the By bringing another connecting portion 60e into a connected state, it is possible to prevent separation of the case bodies 60c and 60d again. Furthermore, since the joint 60e is destroyed when the case bodies 60c and 60d are separated, and traces thereof remain, it is possible to visually check the joint 60e to determine whether or not the case bodies 60c and 60d have been illegally separated. It becomes possible to understand. Furthermore, a seal 60f is pasted on one side of the board box 60a opposite to the side on which the joint portion 60e is arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 60c and 60d. When the sealing seal 60f is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case bodies 60c and 60d. Thereby, when the seal 60f is peeled off when the case bodies 60c and 60d are separated, it is possible to leave a trace.

In the main control device 60 having the above configuration, the main control board 61 is provided with a plurality of notification display devices 215 to 217 as shown in FIG. Specifically, a first notification display device 215, a second notification display device 216, and a third notification display device 217 are provided. Each of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 is a segment display device in which seven LED display segments are arranged, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a light emitting body, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. The first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 are all installed such that their display surfaces face the direction in which the element mounting surface 61a of the main control board 61 faces. This makes it possible to visually observe the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 housed in the board box 60a from outside the board box 60a. Furthermore, as already explained, the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in the board box 60a so that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface 61a of the main control board 61 faces toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to third It becomes possible to visually observe the notification display devices 215 to 217.

In the first notification display device 215, the various parameters (seventh parameter and eighth parameter) during normal times specified in the aggregation process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment The judgment result will be displayed. In this case, if the determination result of the various parameters is in the first range, the first notification display device 215 displays characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the first range, and the determination result of the various parameters is displayed on the first notification display device 215. is in the second range, the first notification display device 215 displays characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the second range, and if the determination result of the various parameters is in the third range, The first notification display device 215 displays characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the third range.

In the second notification display device 216, various parameters (seventh parameter and eighth The judgment results for parameters) are displayed. In this case, if the determination result of the various parameters is in the first range, the second notification display device 216 displays characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the first range, and the determination result of the various parameters is displayed on the second notification display device 216. is in the second range, characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the second range are displayed on the second notification display device 216, and if the determination result of the various parameters is in the third range, Characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the third range are displayed on the second notification display device 216.

The third notification display device 217 displays various parameters (seventh parameter and 8 parameters) are displayed. In this case, if the determination result of the various parameters is in the first range, the third notification display device 217 displays characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the first range, and the determination result of the various parameters is displayed on the third notification display device 217. is in the second range, the third notification display device 217 displays characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the second range, and if the determination result of the various parameters is in the third range, The third notification display device 217 displays characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the third range.

Incidentally, the display of each judgment result on the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 is the same as the display of each judgment result on the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a in the thirteenth embodiment. It starts when the result display period has come and ends when the check result display period ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 may be configured to constantly display each previous determination result. Further, when the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 is detected by the sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine main body 12, the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 The display of each determination result is started, and when the sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 detects that the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the first to third The display of each determination result on the notification display devices 215 to 217 may be configured to end. In this case, it becomes possible to limit the period during which the display is performed on the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217.

In the board box 60a, a blocking sheet 60g is provided in a facing area facing the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 on the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface 61a of the main control board 61. The blocking sheet 60g is provided to make the inside of the board box 60a, more specifically, the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217, invisible through the region of the board box 60a where the blocking sheet 60g is provided. ing. Specifically, a hologram sheet is provided as the blocking sheet 60g, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a reflective sheet or a diffused reflection sheet is provided may also be used. By providing the blocking sheet 60g, even if the area where the blocking sheet 60g is provided in the substrate box 60a is viewed from the front, the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 will not be visible due to the presence of the blocking sheet 60g. Visual inspection becomes impossible. As a result, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 for the purpose of maintenance or the like while a game is being played on the pachinko machine 10, the first to third The possibility that the notification display devices 215 to 217 will be visually observed is reduced.

On the other hand, since the blocking sheet 60g is provided in a part of the opposing wall 60b, by visually observing the opposing wall 60b obliquely toward the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217, The display surfaces of these first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 can be visually observed from outside the board box 60a. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can visually view the notification contents of each determination result on the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 from outside the board box 60a.

Incidentally, the blocking sheet 60g is not provided in the area facing the MPU 62 on the opposing wall portion 60b. Thereby, even if the blocking sheet 60g is provided, it is possible to prevent the visibility during visual confirmation of the MPU 62 from decreasing.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a member that reduces the visibility of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 is provided in place of the blocking sheet 60g. For example, a colored transparent sheet with low transparency may be provided instead of the blocking sheet 60g. In this case, when the sheet is viewed from the front, although the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 can be visually recognized, the display contents on the display surfaces are difficult to see.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
In each of the embodiments described above, an example is shown in which the pachinko machine 10 employs a configuration for managing the game history, but in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the configuration for managing the game history is adopted in the slot machine 310. First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 310 will be explained. 80 is a front view of the slot machine 310, FIG. 81 is a perspective view of the slot machine 310 with the front door 312 open, and FIG. 82 is a front view of the housing 311.

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the slot machine 310 includes a housing 311 forming an outer shell thereof. The casing 311 has a plurality of wooden panels fixed to it, so that the entire casing 311 is shaped like a box that is open to the front.

A front door 312 is attached to the front side of the housing 311, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81. The front door 312 is supported by the housing 311 so that the interior space of the housing 311 can be opened and closed using a shaft portion 312a provided on the left side thereof as a rotation axis. Note that the front door 312 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 312b provided on the back side thereof, and this locked state is released by unlocking the key cylinder 313 with a predetermined key.

As shown in FIG. 80, a game panel 314 is provided near the upper center of the front door 312. The game panel 314 is formed with three vertically long display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R arranged side by side. The display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R are made of a transparent or semi-transparent material, and the inside of the slot machine 310 is visible through each of the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R.

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the interior of the housing 311 is divided into upper and lower halves by a partition plate 311a, and a reel unit 316 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 311a. The reel unit 316 includes a left reel 316L, a middle reel 316M, and a right reel 316R, each of which is formed into a cylindrical shape. Each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is rotatably supported so that its central axis becomes the rotational axis of the reel 316L, 316M, 316R. The rotation axes of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are arranged on the same axis that extends substantially horizontally, and the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R correspond one-to-one with the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R. There is. Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is visible through the corresponding display window 315L, 315M, 315R. Furthermore, when the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are displayed as if they were moving from top to bottom through the respective display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R.

As shown in FIG. 80, on the lower left side of the game panel 314, a start lever 321 is provided which is operated to start the rotation of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R. When the start lever 321 is operated while game media such as medals are being bet, the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R start rotating all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 321, stop buttons 322, 323, and 324 are provided that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. Each stop button 322, 323, 324 is arranged directly below the display window portion 315L, 315M, 315R corresponding to the reel 316L, 316M, 316R to be stopped, respectively. Each stop button 322, 323, 324 becomes in a state where it can be stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the left reel 316L started rotating.

The rotation of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is started based on the operation of the start lever 321, and the rotation of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is stopped based on the operation of each stop button 322, 323, 324. The period until the execution of various processes such as the granting of a number and the management of the gaming state is completed corresponds to one game (game round).

A medal slot 325 for inserting medals as investment value is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R. As shown in FIG. 81, medals inserted from the medal slot 325 are guided to the hopper device 318 by a selector 317 provided on the back of the front door 312 if acceptance is permitted, and if acceptance is prohibited. The medals are guided from the medal outlet 312c provided at the lower front of the front door 312 to the medal receiving tray 312d (see FIG. 80). The hopper device 318 has a function of dispensing the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiving tray 312d through the medal discharge port 312c when a prize corresponding to the provision of game media on the active line is established. There is.

As shown in FIG. 80, below the medal slot 325, a return button 326 is provided which is pressed when the medals inserted into the medal slot 325 become stuck in the selector 317. Further, on the lower left side of the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R, there is a first credit input button 327 for inputting the maximum amount of credited virtual medals that can be bet at once, and a first credit input button 327 for inputting two virtual medals at a time. A second credit input button 328 for inputting virtual medals and a third credit input button 329 for inputting virtual medals one at a time are provided.

A settlement button 331 is provided on the left side of the start lever 321. In other words, this slot machine 310 has a credit function that stores and stores surplus input medals and paid-out medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the payment button 331 is operated under the condition that the virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal ejection port 312c as real medals.

A power supply device 319 is provided inside the casing 311 as shown in FIGS. 81 and 82. The power supply device 319 includes a power switch 319a that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 319b that is used to reset various states of the slot machine 310, and a reset button 319b that changes the setting state of the slot machine 310 from "Setting 1" to "Setting 1". A setting key insertion hole 319c is provided which is operated to change the setting 6.

Next, the symbols attached to each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R will be explained.

FIG. 83 shows the symbol arrangement of the left reel 316L, middle reel 316M, and right reel 316R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R. In addition, numbers "0" to "19" are assigned to correspond to each reel 316L, 316M, 316R, but these numbers are visible to the main controller 340 from the display windows 315L, 315M, 315R. This is a number to recognize the symbol, and is not actually attached to the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. However, in the following explanation, the numbers will be used.

The symbols include "Bell" symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 316L), "Watermelon" symbol (for example, the 18th on the left reel 316L), "Cherry" symbol (for example, the 17th on the left reel 316L), " "Replay" symbol (e.g., 16th on left reel 316L), "BAR" symbol (e.g., 15th on left reel 316L), "LUCKY" symbol (e.g., 13th on left reel 316L), "Red 7" symbol ( For example, there are eight types of symbols, including the 12th symbol on the left reel 316L) and the "white 7" symbol (for example, the 10th symbol on the left reel 316L). As shown in FIG. 83, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different on each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R.

FIG. 84 is a front view of the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R. Each of the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R is formed so that only three of the twenty symbols attached to the corresponding reels 316L, 316M, and 316R can be visually recognized in their entirety. Therefore, when all the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R.

In this slot machine 310, one main line ML is set to connect the positions where the symbols of each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R are visible. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 316L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 316M, and the middle symbols of the right reel 316R. The rotation of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is started with the specified number of medals bet, and if a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the profit of medal payout, replay Either the profit or the transition of the gaming state will be granted.

In other words, in this slot machine 310, only one main line ML is set as a line on which winnings can be achieved. The main line ML is set as a line extending in a straight line. Therefore, the subline SUL1 connecting the upper symbols of the left reel 316L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 316M, and the lower symbols of the right reel 316R, the upper symbols of the left reel 316L, the upper symbols of the middle reel 316M, and the upper symbols of the right reel 316R. The connected subline SUL2, the subline SUL3 that connects the lower symbols of the left reel 316L, the lower symbols of the middle reel 316M, and the lower symbols of the right reel 316R, the lower symbols of the left reel 316L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 316M, and the right reel 316R. Even if a combination of winning symbols is established on a line extending in a straight line, such as the subline SUL4 connecting the upper row symbols, the winning will not be established.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 85, a description will be given of the correspondence between the combination of symbols that result in a winning combination and the benefits that will be awarded in the event of a winning. FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits that are awarded when winning.

The minor prizes for which medals are paid out include the first supplementary prize, the second supplementary prize, the third supplementary prize, the bell prize, the first watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize, and the cherry prize. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stopping symbol on the left reel 316L is either a "BAR" symbol or a "white 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 316M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 316R is a "BAR" symbol or a "white 7" symbol. If the stopped symbol is a “bell” symbol, the first compensation prize will be awarded. Also, on the main line ML, the stopping symbol on the left reel 316L is either a "watermelon" symbol or a "LUCKY" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 316M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 316R is a "bell" symbol. If it is a “bell” symbol, it will be a second supplementary prize. Also, on the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 316L is a "replay" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 316M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 316R is a "bell" symbol, This will be the 3rd supplementary prize. In the case of one of the first to third supplementary winnings, the number of game media to be awarded becomes "1".

On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 316L is a "Bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 316M is a "Bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 316R is a "Bell" symbol, a Bell prize is awarded. becomes. When the bell is won, the number of game media to be awarded becomes "9".

On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 316L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 316M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 316R is a "watermelon" symbol, the first Watermelon wins. When the first watermelon is won, the number of game media to be awarded becomes "7".

On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 316L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 316M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 316R is a "BAR" symbol, the second Watermelon wins. If the second watermelon is won, the number of game media to be awarded becomes "7".

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L becomes a "cherry" symbol on the main line ML, a cherry prize is awarded regardless of which of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 316M and the right reel 316R. If a cherry prize is won, the number of game media to be awarded becomes "2".

Winnings that give you the privilege of replaying the next game without betting medals (or virtual medals) include regular replay winnings, 1st RT replay winnings, 2nd RT replay winnings, and 1st fall replay. There are prizes and second fall replay prizes. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stopping symbols on the left reel 316L are "replay" symbols, the stopping symbols on the middle reel 316M are "replay" symbols, and the stopping symbols on the right reel 316R are "replay" symbols. In this case, it will be a regular replay prize. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 316L is a "bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 316M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 316R is a "replay" symbol, the first RT This will be a replay prize. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 316L is a "replay" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 316M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 316R is a "replay" symbol, the second RT This will be a replay prize. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 316L is a "replay" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 316M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 316R is a "replay" symbol, the first A fall replay win. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 316L is a "replay" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 316M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 316R is a "watermelon" symbol, the second A fall replay win.

If any of the above replay wins occur, it becomes possible to play the next game without having to bet on both medals and virtual medals. Specifically, if one of the replay wins in a game in which 3 medals are bet, it is possible to start playing the next game with 3 medals bet, without needing to bet on both the medals and the virtual medals. It becomes possible.

In addition, among the various replay winnings mentioned above, the first RT replay winning, second RT replay winning, first falling replay winning, and second falling replay winning are not only triggers for granting replay winning benefits, but also triggers for transition of gaming state. Become. In this slot machine 310, a plurality of types of gaming states are set so that the types of winning combinations to be drawn and the probability of winning for each winning combination are different in the winning lottery process, and the transition between these gaming states is a transition of the gaming state. This occurs when a triggering replay win is established.

There are 1st BB winnings and 2nd BB winnings as state transition winnings in which only a gaming state transition is performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stopping symbol on the left reel 316L is the "Red 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 316M is the "Red 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 316R is the "Red 7" symbol. If it is a symbol, it will be the 1st BB prize. On the main line ML, when the stopping symbol on the left reel 316L is a "white 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 316M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 316R is a "white 7" symbol. , won the 2nd BB prize. When the first BB winning or the second BB winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

The BB state is a normal mode, which will be described later, and is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media awarded per unit number of games is higher than in a non-AT state (this state is also referred to as a normal gaming state). More specifically, the BB state is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media awarded per unit number of games is higher than any other gaming state other than the BB state. Specifically, the probability of winning a winning combination that makes it possible to win a bell is higher than in other gaming states (for example, approximately 1/1.1), and if the winning combination is won, each reel 316L , 316M, 316R and the timing of stop operation of the stop buttons 322 to 324 with respect to the rotational position of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R, a bell prize is established. The BB state continues over a plurality of games and ends when a termination condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the execution content of the game. The termination condition is arbitrary, but in this slot machine 310, the termination condition is set that the total number of game media awarded since the start of the BB state is equal to or greater than the termination reference number (for example, "350"). There is.

Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be explained.

At the top of the front door 312, as shown in FIG. 80, an upper lamp 332 and a speaker 333 are provided, as well as an image display device 334. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 310, the upper lamp 332 is controlled to emit light in a manner that corresponds to the abnormality, and is also controlled to emit light in a manner that corresponds to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 332 is controlled to emit light so that a light emitting effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 334 is performed. The speakers 333 are provided as a pair of left and right speakers, and the sound output is controlled so that when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 310, a sound or sound corresponding to the abnormality is output, and a sound or sound corresponding to the winning result is output. The sound output is controlled so that it is output. Further, the speaker 333 is controlled to output sound so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 334 is performed.

The image display device 334 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. Other display devices having a display surface may be used, or a dot matrix display may be used. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 310, the display is controlled so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display screen. Further, the image display device 334 is controlled to display images corresponding to the winning results of the combinations in the internal lottery and the winning results in each game on the display screen.

On the game panel 314 of the front door 312, below the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R, there is a credit display section 335 that displays the number of virtual medals stored and stored, and a credit display section 335 that displays the number of virtual medals that will be awarded when winning a small prize. A number display section 336 for displaying the number of game media is provided. These display sections 335 and 336 are constructed by seven segment displays, and each segment uses a monochromatic light emitting type LED such as green.

The slot machine 310 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82, a main control device 340 is provided above the reel unit 316. The main controller 340 is attached to a back plate 311b forming the back side of the housing 311. The main control device 340 includes a main control board 341 housed in a board box 345.

An MPU 342 is mounted on an element mounting surface which is one board surface of the main control board 341 . The board box 345 is formed transparent so that the MPU 342 housed in the board box 345 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 345. Although the board box 345 is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 342 housed in the board box 345 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 345. The main control device 340 is mounted on the back surface of the back plate 311b of the housing 311 in a board box 345 such that an opposing wall portion 345a facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 341 faces the front of the slot machine 310. Therefore, by opening the front door 312 to the front of the slot machine 310 with respect to the housing 311 and exposing the internal space of the housing 311, it becomes possible to visually see the opposing wall 345a of the board box 345, and the corresponding It becomes possible to visually observe the MPU 342 through the opposing wall portion 345a.

The board box 345 is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies back and forth, and these plurality of case bodies are provided with a structure to prevent separation of these case bodies and to leave traces when these case bodies are separated. A coupling portion 345b is provided. A plurality of coupling parts 345b are arranged in parallel on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped-shaped board box 345. As a result, even if some of the joints 345b are broken and the case body is separated in a state in which separation of the case body is prevented using some joints 345b, another joint 345b By bringing these into a connected state, it becomes possible to prevent the case body from separating again. Furthermore, since the joint 345b is destroyed when the case body is separated and traces thereof remain, it is possible to determine whether or not the case body has been illegally separated by visually checking the joint 345b. Become. Furthermore, a seal 345c is pasted on one side of the board box 345 other than the side on which the joint portion 345b is arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the sealing seal 345c is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body. This makes it possible to leave traces of the seal 345c if it is peeled off when the case body is separated.

In the main control device 340 having the above configuration, the main control board 341 is provided with a plurality of notification display devices 346 to 348. Specifically, a first notification display device 346, a second notification display device 347, and a third notification display device 348 are provided. Each of the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 is a segment display device in which seven LED display segments are arranged, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a light emitting body, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. The first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 are all installed so that their display surfaces face the same direction as the element mounting surface of the main control board 341. This makes it possible to visually observe the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 housed in the board box 345 from outside the board box 345. Further, as already explained, the main controller 340 is mounted on the back plate 311b of the housing 311 in the board box 345 so that the opposing wall 345a facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 341 faces the front of the slot machine 310. Therefore, when the front door 312 is opened to the front of the slot machine 310 relative to the housing 311 and the internal space of the housing 311 is exposed to the front of the slot machine 310, the 3 notification display devices 346 to 348 can be visually observed. The game history management results are notified using these first to third notification display devices 346 to 348. This will be explained in detail later.

Visual confirmation of the main controller 340 is performed by opening the front door 312 to the front of the slot machine 310 with respect to the housing 311. The housing 311 is provided with lighting devices 349a and 349b in order to improve the visibility of the main control device 340 when the front door 312 is opened. The lighting devices 349a and 349b are provided as a pair on the left and right sides, one each on the back surface of the left side plate 311c and the back side of the right side plate 311d of the housing 311. The illumination devices 349a and 349b are equipped with high-intensity LEDs as light emitters, and are installed so that the direction of light irradiation is the main control device 340. The light irradiation range IR by the illumination devices 349a and 349b includes the range facing the MPU 342 on the opposing wall portion 345a of the main controller 340. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the MPU 342. Further, the irradiation range IR includes a range facing the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 on the opposing wall portion 345a of the main control device 340. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348. Furthermore, the irradiation range IR includes a range in which the coupling portion 345b and a sealing seal 345c are provided in the board box 345 of the main controller 340. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve the visibility of these joint portions 345b and sealing seals 345c.

Irradiation of light from the illumination devices 349a and 349b is performed according to the opening angle of the front door 312 with respect to the housing 311, although details will be described later. In order to detect the opening angle of the front door 312, an opening angle sensor 312e is provided on the back side of the front door 312 at a position adjacent to the shaft portion 312a, as shown in FIG. The opening angle sensor 312e can detect whether or not the front door 312 is in a closed state with respect to the housing 311, and when the front door 312 is open, the opening angle is a predetermined opening angle. It is possible to detect whether or not the Note that the opening angle sensor 312e can detect the opening angle of the front door 312 in any manner, but for example, when the front door 312 is in a closed state, it is in a pressed state, and when the front door 312 is in an open state, A detection unit whose pressed state is released, and a detection unit which becomes pressed when the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle and does not enter the pressed state until the opening angle of the front door 312 reaches a predetermined opening angle. A configuration having the following may be considered.

In addition to the main control device 340, the slot machine 310 is provided with an effect control device 350 as shown in FIG. The production control device 350 is arranged behind the image display device 334 at the front door 312 in an overlapping manner. The production control device 350 controls the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 based on commands received from the main control device 340. Note that, like the main control device 340, the production control device 350 has a control board housed in a board box.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 310 will be explained based on the block diagram of FIG. 86.

The main control device 340 includes a main control board 341 that controls the main control of the game. An MPU 342 is mounted on the main control board 341. The MPU 342 includes a ROM 343 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 342, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 343. It has a built-in RAM 344, a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, etc. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 343 and RAM 344 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 342, and each may be integrated into individual chips.

The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 342, there is a reel unit 316, a start detection sensor 321a that detects the operation of the start lever 321, stop detection sensors 322a, 323a, 324a that individually detect the operation of each stop button 322, 323, 324, and medal insertion. An inserted medal detection sensor 325a that detects medals inserted from the mouth 325, a credit insertion detection sensor 327a, 328a, 329a that individually detects the operation of each credit input button 327, 328, 329, and an operation of the settlement button 331. The payment detection sensor 331a, the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 318, the sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 319b provided in the power supply device 319, and the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion hole 319c provided in the power supply device 319. Various sensors such as a sensor that detects the opening angle of the front door 312 and an opening angle sensor 312e that detects the opening angle of the front door 312 are connected, and signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 342.

On the output side of the MPU 342, there are a reel unit 316, a selector drive section 317a provided in the selector 317, a payout motor of the hopper device 318, first to third notification display devices 346 to 348, lighting devices 349a and 349b, and A production control device 350 and the like are connected. In each game, the MPU 342 controls the rotation of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R of the reel unit 316. As already explained, the selector 317 guides the medals inserted through the medal slot 325 to the hopper device 318 after having the inserted medal detection sensor 325a detect the medals when acceptance is permitted, and rejects the inserted medals when acceptance is prohibited. It has a function of discharging the medals to the medal receiving tray 312d without being detected by the detection sensor 325a. The selector drive unit 317a has a function of switching the state of the selector 317 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state. Specifically, the selector drive unit 317a has a function to switch the state of the selector 317 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state. and the position for prohibiting reception. The MPU 342 switches the state of the selector 317 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state by switching the output state and stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 317a.

Further, the MPU 342 executes drive control of the hopper device 318 when a small winning combination is established and medals are to be paid out. Furthermore, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 342 is started, the MPU 342 starts displaying the gaming history management results on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348, and also displays the gaming history management result. The displayed contents are updated every time the management results are updated. Furthermore, the MPU 342 controls the light emission of the lighting devices 349a and 349b according to the opening angle of the front door 312. In addition, the MPU 342 transmits a command to the production control device 350 at each timing of each game, and also transmits a command to the production control device 350 to notify the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R on the image display device 334. .

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 319 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342 (not shown). The power supply unit 319 is equipped with a power supply unit and a power failure monitoring circuit that supply driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 310 including the main control unit 340. monitors the current voltage, and outputs a power outage signal to the MPU 342 when the voltage falls below the reference voltage. The MPU 342 executes processing at the time of a power outage by receiving a power outage signal, and after the power is restored, it is possible to return to the processing state before the power outage. Further, the power supply device 319 is provided with a power outage power supply section for supplying backup power to the RAM 344 as power outage in a situation where the supply of operating power from an external power source is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, data will be retained in the RAM 344 in a situation where backup power can be supplied from the power supply unit during a power outage (for example, on the 1st or 2nd day). be done. However, by pressing the reset button 319b provided on the power supply device 319 and turning on the power of the slot machine 310, the data stored and held in the RAM 344 is initialized.

The production control device 350 includes a production control board 351 for controlling execution of various notifications and various productions. The production control board 351 is equipped with an MPU 352. The MPU 352 includes a ROM 353 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 352, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 353. A certain RAM 354 is built-in, as well as a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 353 and the RAM 354 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 352, and each may be integrated into separate chips. Further, although backup power is not supplied to the RAM 354 from the power supply part during a power outage of the power supply unit in a situation where the supply of operating power from an external power supply is cut off, it is also possible to have a configuration in which backup power is supplied to the RAM 354. good.

The MPU 352 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. As already explained, the MPU 342 of the main control device 340 is connected to the input side of the MPU 352, and receives various commands from the MPU 342. An upper lamp 332, a speaker 333, and an image display device 334 are connected to the output side of the MPU 352. The MPU 352 controls the light emission of the upper lamp 332, the sound output of the speaker 333, and the display of the image display device 334 based on commands received from the MPU 342 of the main control device 340, thereby providing various notifications and various effects. make it happen.

In addition, in the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 342, ROM 343, and RAM 344 of the main control device 340 are respectively referred to as the main side MPU 342, the main side ROM 343, and the main side RAM 344, and the MPU 352, ROM 353, and RAM 354 of the production control device 350 are respectively referred to as the production side. They are referred to as an MPU 352, a performance side ROM 353, and a performance side RAM 354.

Next, the processing executed by the main MPU 342 will be explained. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main MPU 342.

In the main processing, initialization processing is first performed (step S4401). In the initialization process, an interrupt by a timer interrupt process is permitted, and various initial settings are made for the register group, I/O device, etc. in the main MPU 342. After the initialization processing is completed, display start processing is executed (step S4402). In the display start process, display on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 is started. In this case, if the main side RAM 344 stores information on the gaming history management results immediately before the previous power outage, the first to third notification display devices 346 to 346 display information corresponding to that information. 348 display control is executed. On the other hand, if the main side RAM 344 does not store information on the gaming history management results immediately before the previous power outage, or if regular information is not stored as the information, a predetermined initial display (for example, all lights on) is displayed. ) is performed, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 is executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 319c and the power is turned on (step S4403). If the power is turned on with the setting key inserted (step S4403: YES), and if the reset button 319b is not turned on when the power is turned on (step S4404: NO), the winning probability remains unchanged. Setting processing is executed (step S4406). On the other hand, if the reset button 319b is turned on when the power is turned on (step S4404: YES), after executing the clearing process (step S4405), the winning probability setting process is executed (step S4406).

In the clearing process, all areas in the main RAM 344 are initialized. In this case, in the main side RAM 344, an area for storing setting values of the slot machine 310, an area for storing data indicating whether or not the BB state is stored, and data indicating the total number of game media given in the BB state were stored. Area, area where data indicating whether or not the AT state is stored, area where data for specifying the end condition of the AT state is stored, data showing the type of lottery mode described below, game history management results Each area of the main side RAM 344 is cleared to "0", including the area where the information is stored, the total number of games counter 344a, and the number of advantageous games counter 344b. As a result, when the clearing process is executed, the normal gaming state is entered regardless of the state before the power was cut off, and the state before the power cut is changed to a state where the progress of the game is restricted due to the occurrence of an abnormality. If so, the abnormal state is canceled.

In the winning probability setting process, the current setting value is read on the condition that the setting key is inserted and turned on, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display section 335 provided on the game panel 314. In addition, when the main side RAM 344 clearing process (step S4405) is executed, a display corresponding to "setting 1" is displayed on the credit display section 335 at the start of the winning probability setting process, and the clearing process (step S4405) If not executed, a display corresponding to the set value in the state before the power was shut off is displayed. In the winning probability setting process, each time the reset button 319b is operated, the set value is updated by 1, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display section 335. Note that if the reset button 319b is operated in a situation where the setting value is "Setting 6", the setting value is updated to "Setting 1". The winning probability setting process ends when the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 321 is operated. In this case, the display of the set value on the credit display section 335 is ended. After executing the winning probability setting process, the process shifts to normal processing (step S4407). The normal processing will be explained in detail later.

If the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S4403: NO), the power recovery process from step S4408 onwards is executed. The power restoration process is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 310 to the state before the power was shut off. In the power restoration process, it is determined whether the setting values of the slot machine 310 are normal by checking the main side RAM 344 (step S4408). Specifically, the setting value is determined to be normal if it is one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and determined to be abnormal if it is "0" or "7" or more. If the set value is normal, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S4409). A power outage flag is provided in the main side RAM 344, and when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 342 is stopped and a predetermined power outage process is normally executed, the power outage flag is set to "1". will be set. If the power outage flag is set to "1", it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal (step S4410). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 344 is checked to see if the value is normal.

If an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S4408 to S4410, it means that the power outage processing at the time of the previous power outage was executed normally. In this case, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main side RAM 344 is written to the stack pointer of the main side MPU 342, and the data saved in the main side RAM 344 is restored to the register of the main side MPU 342. The state is restored to the state before the power was cut off (step S4411). Furthermore, the power failure flag in the main side RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S4412). Thereafter, after transmitting a power restoration command for recognizing the execution of the power restoration process to the production side MPU 352 (step S4413), the process returns to the address before the power was cut off (step S4414).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in any of steps S4408 to S4410, an operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is prohibited (step S4415), and by clearing all output ports of the main MPU 342 to "0", all actuators connected to the relevant output ports are disabled. is turned off (step S4416), and an error notification process is executed to notify the hall manager, etc. of the occurrence of an error (step S4417). And it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing the clear process (step S4405).

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 342 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 88. Note that the timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 msec.

In the register saving process (step S4501), the values of all registers in the main MPU 342 used in normal processing to be described later are saved in the main RAM 344. In step S4502, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set to "1" or not. If the power outage flag is set to "1", the process advances to step S4503 to execute power outage processing.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 319 is input to the main MPU 342. In the power outage processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed, and if the transmission has not been completed, this processing is ended, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing, and the command transmission is completed. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 342 is saved in the main RAM 344. Thereafter, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 342 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a determination value for determining whether the data in the main side RAM 344 is normal or not when the power outage is resolved is calculated and stored in the main side RAM 344, and subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the above processing, the system enters an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If the power outage flag is not set to "1" in step S4502, various processes from step S4504 onwards are performed. In step S4504, a watchdog timer clearing process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S4505, interrupt end declaration processing is performed to enable the next timer interrupt to be set for the main MPU 342 itself. In step S4506, in order to rotate each reel 316L, 316M, 316R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motor provided on each reel 316L, 316M, 316R. In step S4507, the status of various sensors connected to the input port is read, and sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether the read results are normal or not.

In step S4508, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S4509, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the outside. In step S4510, command output processing is performed to send various commands to the production side MPU 352. In step S4511, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S4512, the values of each register saved in the main RAM 344 in the previous step S4501 are restored to the corresponding registers in the main MPU 342. In step S4513, a management process is executed to manage the game history and display a display corresponding to the management result on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348. In step S4514, lighting processing is executed to control light emission of the lighting devices 349a and 349b according to the opening angle of the front door 312. Thereafter, in step S4515, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processing ends. Note that details of the management process in step S4513 and the lighting process in step S4514 will be described later.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU 342.

In the normal process, a start waiting process is first executed (step S4601). In the start waiting process, if any replay winnings have occurred in the previous game, an automatic insertion process is performed to place the same number of game media as the number of bets in the previous game in a bet state. In addition, in the start waiting process, when a medal is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a, if the current number of bets is not equal to or greater than the maximum specified number of "3", the number of bets is added by 1, and the number of bets is is greater than or equal to the maximum specified number of "3", the value of the credit counter provided in the main side RAM 344 is incremented by 1. The credit counter is a counter used by the main MPU 342 to specify the number of stored virtual medals.

In the start waiting process, when the automatic input process is not executed and any of the credit input buttons 327 to 329 is operated, a credit is set so that the number of bets corresponding to that operation is set. Executes the input response process. In the credit input processing, when the first credit input button 327 is operated, the maximum amount of game media that can be bet at that time is placed in a bet state, and the second credit input button 328 or the second credit input button 328 or the second credit input button 328 is operated. When the 3 credit input button 329 is operated, a corresponding bet state is set. In this case, if virtual medals are used for the bet, the value corresponding to the number of virtual medals bet is subtracted from the credit counter. In addition, if the required number of virtual medals to set the number of bets corresponding to the operated credit input buttons 327 to 329 are not stored and stored, bets can be made in relation to the stored virtual medals. The maximum amount of game media is bet.

In the start waiting process, if the number of bets is equal to or greater than the maximum prescribed number and the value of the credit counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit stored number (specifically, "50"), a reception prohibition process is executed. In the acceptance prohibition process, the selector 317 is set to an acceptance prohibited state by stopping the output of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 317a. As a result, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 325, the medal is discharged to the medal receiving tray 312d without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a. On the other hand, if the number of bets is less than the maximum prescribed number or the value of the credit counter is less than the upper limit storage number, an acceptance permission process is executed. In the acceptance permission process, the selector 317 is set to the acceptance permission state by starting to output a drive signal to the selector drive unit 317a. Thereby, the medals inserted from the medal input port 325 are detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a and then collected by the hopper device 318. In the start waiting process, if the settlement button 331 is operated and the automatic insertion process is not executed, medals corresponding to the total number of bets and the value of the credit counter are delivered via the medal output port 312c. The hopper device 318 is driven and controlled to discharge the medals to the medal receiving tray 312d. As a result, the internally stored game media are paid out to the player as actual medals.

After execution of the start waiting process, it is determined whether the number of bets on medals has reached the specified number (“3” in this embodiment) (step S4602), and if the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process starts. The process returns to the waiting process (step S4601). If the number of bets has reached the specified number, it is determined whether the start lever 321 has been operated (step S4603). If the start lever 321 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S4601). On the other hand, if the start lever 321 is operated, the main line ML is activated and then reception prohibition processing is executed (step S4604). As a result, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 325, the medal is discharged to the medal receiving tray 312d without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a. After that, a lottery process for drawing the winning combination in the current game is executed (step S4605), and each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is driven and controlled in a manner corresponding to the result of the current lottery process (step S4605). The reel control process is executed (step S4606).

Thereafter, medal payout processing is executed (step S4607). In the medal payout process, when a small winning combination is achieved in the current game, a process for awarding the player with the number of medals or virtual medals corresponding to the small winning combination is executed. Specifically, when awarding virtual medals, a value corresponding to the current small win is added to the credit counter, and if the value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit of storage, it will be added to the credit counter. The hopper device is driven and controlled so that the number of medals equal to the number of medals is paid out to the medal receiving tray 312d.

Thereafter, a corresponding process at the end of the game is executed to enable setting of the gaming state corresponding to the result of the current game (step S4608). Then, the reception permission process is executed (step S4609). Thereby, the medals inserted from the medal input port 325 are detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a and then collected by the hopper device.

The lottery process executed in step S4605 of the normal process (FIG. 83) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 90.

First, a random number used when determining the validity of a winning combination is obtained (step S4701). This slot machine 310 is configured such that when the start lever 321 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 321, the main MPU 342 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the main RAM 344. With this configuration, it becomes possible to obtain a random number promptly at the timing when the start lever 321 is operated, and it becomes possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 310 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 321 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, a lottery table for determining the validity of the combination is read from the main side ROM 343 (step S4702). Here, in this slot machine 310, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 319c and turned on, a predetermined operation is performed. By doing this, it is possible to set which winning probability the lottery process is to be executed based on. Note that "setting n+1" has a more advantageous winning probability for the player than "setting n". In addition, there are three types of lottery modes in which the lottery tables are different in the main MPU 342 even if the set values are at the same stage: the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. Furthermore, as a gaming state, there is a BB state apart from the states of each of these lottery modes. In step S4702, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current setting value and the current gaming state is selected.

Taking "Setting 3" as an example, the lottery tables corresponding to each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode will be described. First, the normal mode lottery table that is selected in the normal mode will be explained. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal mode lottery table. Note that in the following description, reference is made to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 92 as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 91, index values IV are set in the normal mode lottery table, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery winning combination in relation to the maximum value ("65535") of the free run counter.

Specifically, the index value IV=1 is set with bell winning data and first supplementary winning data. If you win with index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. 92, if the first stop (the reel where the stop command first occurred) is the left reel 316L, A bell win will definitely occur regardless of the type of reel and the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, and in other cases, a first supplementary win will definitely occur.

In this slot machine 310, reel control is performed for each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R, allowing the reels to slide for up to four symbols after the stop buttons 322 to 324 are operated. In other words, reel control is performed for each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R to stop the reel before a predetermined time (190 msec) elapses after the stop buttons 322 to 324 are operated. By performing such reel control, it is possible to make it easier to win a prize corresponding to a winning combination, and to avoid winning a prize corresponding to a non-winning combination. becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R that can be slid is limited as described above, one reel 316L, 316M, and 316R constitutes a combination of symbols for winning a prize. If five or more symbols exist between the constituent symbols, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML depending on the timing of operation of the corresponding stop buttons 322 to 324 (this phenomenon is also referred to as a "missing shot"). say). If the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped in the corresponding order, the 1st to 3rd supplementary wins, bell wins, and various replay wins will not be missed. Watermelon winnings, cherry winnings, 1st BB winnings, and 2nd BB winnings are winning modes that may be missed depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324 relative to the rotational positions of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R.

As shown in FIG. 91, the index value IV=2 is set with bell winning data and second supplementary winning data. In the case of winning with index value IV=2, as shown in FIG. 92, when the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the types of reels to be stopped second and third and each stop button 322 to 324 A bell prize is surely achieved regardless of the operation timing of the button, and a second supplementary prize is surely achieved in other cases.

As shown in FIG. 91, the index value IV=3 is set with bell winning data and third supplementary winning data. In the case of winning with index value IV=3, as shown in FIG. 92, when the first stop is the right reel 316R, the types of reels to be stopped second and third and each stop button 322 to 324 A bell prize is surely achieved regardless of the operation timing, and a third supplementary prize is surely achieved in other cases.

As shown in FIG. 91, only the first watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV=4. In the case of winning with index value IV=4, as shown in FIG. 92, the first watermelon prize can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324, there is a possibility that the first watermelon prize will not be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 91, only the second watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV=5. In the case of winning with index value IV=5, as shown in FIG. 92, the second watermelon prize can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, there is a possibility that the second watermelon prize will not be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 91, only the cherry winning data is set to the index value IV=6. If a win is achieved with the index value IV=6, as shown in FIG. 92, a cherry win can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 322 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 316L, there is a possibility that a cherry prize will not be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 91, the first BB winning data is set to the index value IV=7. In the case of winning with index value IV=7, as shown in FIG. 92, the 1st BB winning can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, there is a possibility that the first BB prize will not be achieved. Further, as shown in FIG. 91, the second BB winning data is set to the index value IV=8. If the winning is achieved with the index value IV=8, as shown in FIG. 92, the 2nd BB winning can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324, there is a possibility that the second BB prize will not be achieved.

Here, the winning data other than the 1st BB winning data and the 2nd BB winning data will be deleted in the winning game regardless of whether or not the winning data was achieved, and will not be retained in the games following the winning game. Not exceeded. On the other hand, for the first BB winning data and the second BB winning data, the corresponding BB winning data will be established even if the game is the one after the winning game, unless the main side RAM 344 is cleared. will be retained until. In this case, in a game where the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data is carried over, the index values IV corresponding to the first BB winning data and the second BB winning data are excluded from the lottery targets. This makes it possible to prevent BB winning data from being newly stored even though the 1st BB winning data or 2nd BB winning data has already been stored, and multiple BB winning data can be accumulated. This makes it possible to prevent the data from being stored.

As shown in FIG. 91, the index values IV=9 to 12 are set with normal replay winning data and first RT replay winning data. In this case, if you win with the index value IV=9, as shown in FIG. , if the third stop (the reel where the last stop command occurred) is the right reel 316R, the first RT replay win will definitely be achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, and in other cases In this case, a normal replay prize is guaranteed regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. Also, if you win with index value IV = 10, the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L, each stop button 322 to The first RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of 324, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is definitely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 322 to 324. In addition, if you win with index value IV = 11, the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M, each stop button 322 to The first RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of 324, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is definitely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 322 to 324. In addition, if you win with index value IV = 12, the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L, each stop button 322 to The first RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of 324, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is definitely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 322 to 324.

When the normal mode lottery table in FIG. 91 is selected, the probability of winning when index value IV=1, the probability of winning when index value IV=2, and the probability of winning when index value IV=3 The probability of winning is approximately 1/5.0, the probability of winning when index value IV = 4 is approximately 1/131, and the probability of winning when index value IV = 5 is approximately 1/131. /187, the probability of winning when index value IV = 6 is approximately 1/423, the probability of winning when index value IV = 7, and the probability of winning when index value IV = 8. The probabilities are approximately 1/218, respectively: the probability of winning when the index value IV = 9, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 10, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 11, The probability of winning when the index value IV=12 is approximately 1/28.0.

Here, in the normal mode lottery table, as already explained, the first RT replay winning data is set as the winning data of index values IV=9 to 12 in addition to the normal replay winning data (see FIG. 91). The probability of winning one of these index values IV=9 to 12 is about 1/7.0. If a win is achieved with index value IV = 9 to 12, the stop order of the first stop, second stop, and third stop of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R corresponds to the winning combination. When the order is reached, the first RT replay prize is established and the lottery mode shifts from the normal mode to the first RT mode. When shifting to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 90) becomes the first RT mode lottery table.

Next, a first RT mode lottery table that is selected when the first RT mode is "setting 3" will be described. 93 and 94 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the lottery table for the first RT mode.

In the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 91). In this case, the winning combination data and each winning probability set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 6 are set for the index values IV = 1 to 6, and the winning combination data and each winning probability are set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 6. By being the same, the types of winning combinations for which game media can be awarded and the winning probabilities of these winning combinations are the same in both the normal mode and the first RT mode. Further, BB winning data is set in the index value IV=7 to 8, as in the normal mode lottery table, and the winning probability is the same as in the normal mode lottery table. In other words, the probability of winning any BB combination is the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode.

The winning combination data set after the index value IV=9 is different from the normal mode. Specifically, in the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 93, the second RT replay winning data is set as the winning data of index values IV=9 to 12 in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning one of these index values IV=9 to 12 is about 1/10.1. In the case of winning with index value IV=9, as shown in FIG. 94, if the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the right reel 316R. A second RT replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, and in other cases, a normal replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. Also, if you win with index value IV = 10, the 2nd RT replay prize will be won if the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in other cases, a normal replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. Also, if you win with index value IV = 11, the 2nd RT replay prize will be won if the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M. This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in other cases, a normal replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. Also, if you win with index value IV = 12, the 2nd RT replay prize will be won if the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in other cases, a normal replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. In the 1st RT mode, a win occurs when the index value IV = 9 to 12, and the stop order of the first stop, second stop, and third stop of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R corresponds to the winning combination. In this case, the second RT replay prize is established and the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When shifting to the second RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 90) becomes the second RT mode lottery table.

In the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 93, first fall replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data as winning data with index values IV=13 to 18. The probability of winning one of these index values IV=13 to 18 is approximately 1/10.9.

If you win with index value IV=13 in the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 94, the first stop is the left reel 316L, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. If the right reel is 316R, the normal replay win will definitely occur regardless of the timing of the operation of each stop button 322-324, and in other cases, the first falling replay win will occur at the timing of the operation of each stop button 322-324. It will definitely happen regardless. Also, if you win with index value IV = 14, if the first stop is the left reel 316L, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M, the normal replay winnings will be This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. Also, if you win with index value IV = 15, if the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the right reel 316R, the normal replay winnings will be This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. In addition, if you win with index value IV = 16, if the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L, the normal replay winnings are This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. Also, if you win with index value IV = 17, if the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M, the normal replay winnings will be This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. Also, if you win with index value IV = 18, if the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L, the normal replay winnings are This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. When the first fall replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode. When shifting to the normal mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 90) becomes the normal mode lottery table.

In the first RT mode lottery table, only normal replay winning data is set at index value IV=19. The probability of winning when the index value IV=19 is set higher than the probability of winning other combinations, and specifically, the probability of winning is about 1/6.7. If a win is achieved with this index value IV=19, a normal replay win will be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped and the timing of the stop operation of each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R. .

In the first RT mode lottery table, combinations that enable replay winnings are set at index values IV=9 to 19. Since the winning probabilities of these winning combinations are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probability of the winning combination (hereinafter also referred to as replay probability) that makes it possible to achieve a replay prize in the first RT mode is approximately 1. /2.9. In contrast, the replay probability in normal mode is approximately 1/7.0. In other words, the first RT mode is a gaming state with a higher replay probability than the normal mode.

Next, the lottery table for the second RT mode that is selected when the second RT mode is "Setting 3" will be explained. FIGS. 95 and 96 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the second RT mode lottery table.

In the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 91) and the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 93). In this case, the winning combination data and each winning probability set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 6 are set for the index values IV = 1 to 6, and the winning combination data and each winning probability are set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 6. By being the same, the types of winning combinations for which game media can be awarded and the winning probabilities of those winning combinations are the same in each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. Also, BB winning data is set in the index value IV = 7 to 8, similar to the normal mode lottery table and the 1st RT mode lottery table, and the winning probability is the same as the normal mode lottery table and the 1st RT mode lottery table. It is the same as the table. In other words, the probability of winning any BB combination is the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode.

The winning combination data set after the index value IV=9 is different from the normal mode and the first RT mode. Specifically, in the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 95, second fall replay winning data is set as winning data for index values IV=9 to 14 in addition to the normal replay winning data. . The probability of winning one of these index values IV=9 to 14 is approximately 1/5.5.

If you win with index value IV=9 in the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 96, the first stop is the left reel 316L, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. If it is the right reel 316R, the normal replay win will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, and in other cases, the second falling replay win will occur at the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. It will definitely happen regardless. In addition, if you win with index value IV = 10, if the first stop is the left reel 316L, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M, the normal replay winnings are This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. Also, if you win with index value IV = 11, if the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the right reel 316R, the normal replay winnings will be This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. Also, if you win with index value IV = 12, if the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L, the normal replay winnings are This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. Also, if you win with index value IV = 13, if the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M, the normal replay winnings are This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. Also, if you win with index value IV = 14, if the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L, the normal replay winnings are This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. When the second fall replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode. When shifting to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 90) becomes the first RT mode lottery table.

In the second RT mode lottery table, only normal replay winning data is set at index value IV=15. The probability of winning when the index value IV=15 is set higher than the probability of winning other combinations, and specifically, the probability of winning is about 1/6.3. If a win is achieved with this index value IV = 15, a normal replay win will be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R and the stop operation timing of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R. .

In the second RT mode lottery table, combinations that enable replay winnings are set at index values IV=9 to 15. Since the winning probabilities of these winning combinations are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probability of the winning combination (hereinafter also referred to as replay probability) that makes it possible to achieve a replay prize in the second RT mode is approximately 1. /2.9. In contrast, the replay probability in normal mode is approximately 1/7.0. In other words, the second RT mode is a gaming state with a higher replay probability than the normal mode. On the other hand, the replay probability in the first RT mode is approximately 1/2.9. In other words, the second RT mode has the same replay probability as the first RT mode. However, the replay probability in the first RT mode is not limited to the same as the replay probability in the second RT mode. For example, the replay probability in the first RT mode and the second RT mode may be slightly different but substantially the same. The second RT mode may have a higher replay probability than the first RT mode, or the first RT mode may have a higher replay probability than the second RT mode.

Note that the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table are set in one-to-one correspondence with each of "Settings 1" to "Settings 6", and the setting value is higher. Although the configuration is such that the probability of winning the BB combination increases as the number increases, the replay probability set in each lottery mode is the same or approximately the same regardless of the set value. In addition, if you are in a situation where you have won any BB role, in order to prevent you from winning the BB role twice, even if you are in the normal mode, 1st RT mode, or 2nd RT mode, you can win the 1st BB role and the 2nd BB role. The role will be excluded from the lottery. In addition, in addition to the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, the main side ROM 343 also stores BB lottery tables that are referenced in the lottery process (FIG. 90) when in the BB state. The table is memorized. In the BB lottery table, there are only three types of roles to be drawn: the Bell role, the first Watermelon role, and the second Watermelon role, and the winning probability of the Bell role is set to approximately 1/1.1. , the probability of winning the first watermelon combination is set to approximately 1/100, and the probability of winning the second watermelon combination is set to approximately 1/100. As a result, in the BB state, the expected number of game media awarded per unit number of games is higher than in other gaming states.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery process (FIG. 90), after selecting the lottery table (step S4702), the index value IV is set to "1" (step S4703), and the determination value DV used when determining the validity of the winning combination is set. (Step S4704). In this judgment value setting process, a new judgment value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current judgment value DV. In addition, in the first judgment value setting process, the random value obtained in step S4701 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the current index value IV "1" and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value. It is set as a new judgment value DV.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is valid or not (step S4705). In determining the validity of the combination, it is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds "65535". If it exceeds "65535", a winning data acquisition process is executed to set the winning combination data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main side RAM 344 (step S4706). In the winning data acquisition process, all the winning data set for the current index value IV in the referenced lottery table is set in the main side RAM 344. If the winning data is other than the BB winning data, the state in which the winning data is set will be cleared to "0" after the end of the current game, regardless of whether or not the winning data corresponding to the winning data has been established. If it is winning data, it is cleared to "0" when a winning is established.

If the judgment value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S4705: NO), it means that the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV has failed. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (step S4707), and it is determined whether there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether there is a determination target to be determined (step S4708). Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S4704 and the determination of the validity of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S4704, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV used to judge the validity of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S4705, the winning combination is determined based on the determination value DV.

When the process of step S4706 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S4708, it means that the determination of the validity of the winning combination has ended. In this case, after executing a stop information setting process for setting stop information for reel stop control (step S4709), a game start command is set as a transmission target to the production side MPU 352 (step S4710). The game start command is a command for making the production side MPU 352 recognize that a new game has started, and the game start command indicates whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the BB state, or the AT state. It includes information indicating whether there is one, and information corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 90) in the current game.

When the production-side MPU 352 receives a game start command, it grasps the general content of the production in the current game based on the contents of the game start command, and adjusts the details of the production in a manner according to the grasped content of the general production framework. The contents will be decided by lottery. Then, a data table corresponding to the content of the determined performance is read from the performance side ROM 353 to the performance side RAM 354, and according to the read data table, light emission control of the upper lamp 332, sound output control of the speaker 333, and display of the image display device 334 are performed. Execute control.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S4606 of the normal process (FIG. 89) will be described.

In the reel control process, the rotation of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is started in a situation where the rotation of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R has not started yet. In this case, each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is drive-controlled to rotate at a constant speed after a predetermined acceleration period. Note that the operation of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324 is disabled until constant speed rotation is achieved.

In the reel control process, the stop buttons 322 to 324 corresponding to the rotating reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are operated after the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R start rotating at a constant speed. The reels 316L, 316M, and 316R corresponding to the stop buttons 322 to 324 are stopped. In this case, the stop control information corresponding to the result of the lottery process (step S4605) for the winning combination in the current game, and the information on the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R that were the targets of the stop operation at the timing when the stop operation was performed. The number of slides until the symbol actually stops is determined based on the symbol existing at a predetermined position (for example, the lower row). Then, the reels 316L, 316M, 316R are stopped at the timing when the reels 316L, 316M, 316R to be stopped are moved in the rotational direction by the determined number of slips. Note that the number of slips is one of "0", "1", "2", "3", and "4". In addition, the number of slides ensures that the symbol combinations corresponding to winning combinations are stopped on the main line ML while making it possible to stop the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combinations on the main line ML as much as possible. It is set to avoid this. In addition, for index value IV of IV=1 to 3 and IV=9 or later, the winning combination changes depending on the stopping order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R, so if you win at such index value IV In this case, the information for stop control is changed according to the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. In addition, in the reel control process, when all the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped, it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination is stopped on the main line ML. Then, if any replay winning is achieved, a replay benefit is granted, and if any winning corresponding to the granting of game media is achieved, it corresponds to that winning. Make settings so that the number of game media will be awarded.

Next, the corresponding processing at the end of the game executed in step S4608 of the normal processing (FIG. 89) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 97.

In the corresponding process at the end of the game, the value of the total number of games counter 344a (see FIG. 86) provided in the main side RAM 344 is incremented by 1 (step S4801). The total number of games counter 344a is a counter for counting the number of games played regardless of whether the gaming state is a normal gaming state, a BB state, an AT state, or an ART state. The AT state means that when the stopping order of the stop buttons 322 to 324 is a predetermined correct order, the corresponding combination of symbols is established on the main line ML, which is more convenient for the player than when the stop order is not the correct order. This refers to a situation in which the correct stopping order is announced in a situation where an advantageous lottery winning combination has been won. It is possible to win a lottery winning combination that corresponds to the stop order in both the non-AT state and the AT state, but in the non-AT state, the stop order that is the correct order is not announced, whereas in the AT state, the stop order that is the correct order is not announced. Since the order is notified, the AT state is more advantageous to the player than the non-AT state. Specifically, if the index value IV of a winning combination is won according to the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R in the index value IV=1 to 3 and the index value IV=9 or later, in the AT state. If so, the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R to establish a winning combination that is advantageous to the player is notified, and if the player is in a non-AT state, such stopping order is not announced. In addition, the stop order is notified when a game start command corresponding to the lottery result is transmitted from the main side MPU 342 to the production side MPU 352 when the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 90) is executed, and based on the game start command, the production side By controlling the display of the image display device 334 by the MPU 352, the game starts before the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R can be stopped in the game corresponding to the execution time of the lottery process (FIG. 90) for the winning combination. Further, the ART state is a gaming state in which the player stays in the first RT mode or the second RT mode in the AT state. In the ART state, the probability of winning a replay prize increases, and as described above, the expected number of game media awarded in one game increases. Therefore, it is possible to make the ART state an advantageous gaming state.

In the corresponding process at the end of the game, if any of the BB combinations is in the winning state or the BB state (step S4802: YES), the process for BB is executed (step S4803). In the BB process, if any BB role has been won, it is determined whether or not a BB win corresponding to the winning BB role has occurred in the current game, and a BB win has occurred. If so, the game state is shifted to the BB state by setting the BB state flag provided in the main side RAM 344 to "1". As a result, the BB lottery table will be referred to in the winning combination processing (FIG. 90) in subsequent games. Further, by transmitting a command indicating that the state has shifted to the BB state to the performance side MPU 352, the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 start the performance for the BB state. In addition, when the state is shifted to the BB state, the state where the BB winning combination is won is canceled by erasing the BB winning data from the main side RAM 344. Further, the same BB state will be obtained regardless of whether the first BB winning or the second BB winning occurs.

In the BB processing in the BB state, it is determined whether or not game media have been awarded in the current game, and if game media have been awarded, the total number of grants counter provided in the main side RAM 344 is The number of game media given in this game is added up. Then, it is determined whether the value of the total grant number counter after the addition is greater than or equal to the value corresponding to the end reference number. If it is less than the value corresponding to the end reference number, the BB process is ended. If it is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the end reference number, the BB state is ended by clearing the BB state flag in the main side RAM 344 to "0". Furthermore, by transmitting a command indicating that the BB state has ended to the production side MPU 352, the ending image is displayed on the image display device 334, and then the BB state is displayed on the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334. Finish the performance.

Note that when the BB state ends, the lottery mode becomes the normal mode regardless of which mode the lottery mode was before the start of the BB state. Further, when the BB state is started in the AT state, the ART preparation state process described later will be executed after the BB state ends, regardless of the state before the start of the BB state.

If a negative determination is made in step S4802, or if the process in step S4803 is executed, it is determined whether or not the AT state is present (step S4804). If it is not in the AT state (step S4804: NO), RT mode transition processing (step S4805) and transition chance management processing (step S4806) are executed. In addition, when a stop operation is first performed on the middle reel 316M or the right reel 316R in a game in a state that is neither the BB state nor the AT state, a notification indicating that the stop operation should be performed from the left reel 316L is executed. However, no penalty will be awarded that would limit the granting of profits in subsequent games.

In the RT mode transition processing (step S4805), if it is identified that a first RT replay winning has occurred in the current game, the process is shifted to the first RT mode, and if a second RT replay winning has occurred in the current game. If it is determined that there is, the mode is shifted to the second RT mode. In addition, in the RT mode transition process, if it is identified that a second falling replay winning has occurred in the current game, the transition is made to the first RT mode, and the first falling replay winning has occurred in the current game. If it is determined that there is, the system switches to normal mode.

In the transition chance management process (step S4806), as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 98, it is determined whether or not the special winning combination has been won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 90) in the current game (step S4901). A special combination is one of index values IV=4 to 6. If the special winning combination has been won (step S4901: YES), it is determined whether the advantage regulation flag provided in the main side RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S4902). The advantageous restriction flag is a flag used by the main MPU 342 to specify that transition to the AT state (that is, the ART state) is prohibited. Processing when the advantageous regulation flag is set to "1" will be described later.

If the advantageous restriction flag is not set to "1" (step S4902: NO), the transfer lottery table corresponding to the content of the stock benefit is read from the main side ROM 343 to the main side RAM 344. Stock benefits can be accumulated when the above special winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 90) in the normal gaming state and the advantage regulation flag in the main side RAM 344 is set to "1". It's about benefits. Stock benefits are set in six levels from "0" to "5", and in a situation where there are no accumulated benefits, the stock benefits will be "0". In the transition lottery table that corresponds to the stock benefit being "0", if you win with index value IV = 4, there is a 5% probability that you will win AT transition, and if you win with index value IV = 5, you will win. If the index value IV=6, there is a 10% probability of winning the AT transition, and if the index value IV=6, the probability of winning the AT transition is 15%. The contents of the transition lottery table that is referred to when the stock benefits are "1" to "5" will be explained later.

After reading the transition lottery table in step S4903, AT transition lottery processing is executed (step S4904). In the AT transition lottery process, the value of the transition lottery counter that is updated periodically (for example, every 1.49 msec) in the main RAM 344 is read out, and the read value of the transition lottery counter is applied to the transition lottery table. Verify.

If AT state transition is won in the AT state transition lottery process (step S4905: YES), the initial game number lottery table corresponding to the content of the stock benefit is read from the main side ROM 343 to the main side RAM 344 (step S4906). In the initial game number lottery table that corresponds to the stock benefit being "0", the probability that 50 games will be selected is 90%, the probability that 100 games will be selected is 9%, and the probability that 200 games will be selected. The probability that it will happen is 1%. The contents of the initial game number lottery table that is referred to when the stock benefits are "1" to "5" will be explained later.

After reading the initial game number lottery table in step S4906, initial game number lottery processing is executed (step S4907). In the initial game number lottery process, the value of the game number lottery counter that is updated periodically (for example, every 1.49 msec) in the main side RAM 344 is read out, and the value of the read game number lottery counter is used as the initial game number. Check against the lottery table. Then, the initial number of games corresponding to the verification result is set in the ART game number counter provided in the main side RAM 344 (step S4908).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the current RT mode is the second RT mode (step S4909). If it is the second RT mode (step S4909: YES), there is no need to wait for the AT state to be promoted to the second RT mode, so the main transition chance management process is immediately ended. As a result, the gaming state is an AT state and becomes an ART state, which is the second RT mode. In this case, a command indicating that the ART state has started is sent to the production side MPU 352. By receiving the command, the production side MPU 352 causes the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 to perform a production indicating that the ART state has started, and thereafter produces a production corresponding to the ART state. This is performed using the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334. Thereafter, the value of the stock benefit counter provided in the main side RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S4909). The stock benefit counter is a counter for the main MPU 342 to specify the presence or absence of a stock benefit and the value of the stock benefit.

If it is not the second RT mode (step S4910: NO), it is necessary to wait for the ART preparation state to be promoted to the second RT mode, so set the ART preparation state flag provided in the main side RAM 344 to "1". (Step S4911). The ART preparation state flag is a flag used by the main MPU 342 to specify that the main MPU 342 is in the ART preparation state.

Returning to the description of the response process at the end of the game (FIG. 97), when the value of the ART game number counter in the main side RAM 344 is 1 or more, or when the ART preparation state flag of the main side RAM 344 is set to "1" , an affirmative determination is made in step S4804. In this case, on the condition that the ART preparation state flag of the main side RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S4807: YES), ART preparation state processing is executed (step S4808).

In the ART preparation state processing, it is determined whether promotion to the second RT mode has occurred, and if promotion to the second RT mode has occurred, the ART preparation state flag in the main side RAM 344 is cleared to "0". As a result, the gaming state shifts from the AT state to the ART state. Furthermore, a command indicating that the ART state has been started is transmitted to the production side MPU 352. By receiving the command, the production side MPU 352 causes the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 to perform a production indicating that the ART state has started, and thereafter produces a production corresponding to the ART state. This is performed using the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334.

In addition, if the value of the ART game counter is 1 or more, the winner is determined by the index value IV = 1 to 3, regardless of whether the ART preparation state flag is set to "1" or not. In this case, the order in which the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped in order to make it possible to win a bell is notified. In addition, if the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more, regardless of whether the ART preparation state flag is set to "1", the lottery table for normal mode (Figure 91) or the lottery table for 1st RT mode In the case of winning with index value IV = 9 to 12 in the table (FIG. 93), the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R to establish the first RT replay winning or the second RT replay winning is notified. . Furthermore, when the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more, the index value IV in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 93) is equal to If the winning is achieved in any of the numbers 13 to 18, the order in which the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R should be stopped in order to establish a normal replay winning is notified.

If a negative determination is made in step S4807, ART state processing is executed (step S4809). FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing ART state processing.

First, the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b (see FIG. 86) provided in the main side RAM 344 is incremented by 1 (step S5001). The advantageous game number counter 344b is a counter for measuring the number of games played from the time when the transition to the ART state occurs until the value of the ART game number counter in the main side RAM 344 becomes "0". Note that the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b is maintained without being cleared to "0" even if the value of the ART game number counter in the main side RAM 344 becomes "0" after the transition to the ART state occurs. . In other words, the advantageous game number counter 344b is used to measure the total number of games that have occurred in multiple ART states.

Thereafter, RT mode transition processing is executed (step S5002). In the RT mode transition process, if it is specified that a first RT replay winning has occurred, the process is transferred to the first RT mode, and if it is specified that a second RT replay winning has occurred, the process is transferred to the second RT mode. When it is specified that a first falling replay winning has occurred, the mode is shifted to the normal mode, and when it is specified that a second falling replay winning has occurred, the mode is shifted to the first RT mode.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special winning combination has been won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 90) in the current game (step S5003). A special combination is one of index values IV=4 to 6. If the special winning combination has been won (step S5003: YES), an additional lottery process for increasing the number of consecutive games is executed (step S5004). In the lottery process for adding on the number of consecutive games, it is determined whether or not to add on the number of consecutive games in the ART state, and when adding on, the number of additional games is determined. In the lottery process for increasing the number of consecutive games, the lottery table for increasing the number of consecutive games corresponding to each of the index values IV=4 to 6 is read from the main side ROM 343, and is also read out periodically (for example, at a 1.49 msec cycle) in the main side RAM 344. The value of the game number lottery counter to be updated is read, and the value of the lottery counter is checked against the above-mentioned number of consecutive games additional lottery table. The lottery table for adding up the number of consecutive games is set so that the probability of adding up will increase in the order of IV = 4 → IV = 5 → IV = 6, and the expected number of additional games to be won will increase in that order. ing. If an additional winning is achieved in the additional lottery process for the number of consecutive games (step S5005: YES), the number of additional games selected in the additional lottery process is added to the ART game number counter in the main side RAM 344 (step S5006). .

If a negative determination is made in step S5003, if a negative determination is made in step S5005, or if the process in step S5006 is executed, the value of the ART game number counter in the main side RAM 344 is subtracted by 1 (step S5007). If the value of the ART game number counter after the subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S5008: YES), ART state termination processing is executed (step S5009). In the end processing, a command indicating that the ART state has ended is transmitted to the production side MPU 352. By receiving the command, the production side MPU 352 controls the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 so that the production corresponding to the normal gaming state is executed after the production indicating that the ART state has ended is executed. control each of them.

Returning to the explanation of the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 97), if the process of step S4806 is executed, if the process of step S4808 is executed, or if the process of step S4809 is executed, the game end command is sent to the production side MPU 352. (step S4810). When the performance side MPU 352 receives the game end command, it controls each of the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 so that the performance being executed in the current game is ended. After that, game management processing is executed (step S4811).

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing game management processing.

In the game management process, if the advantageous regulation flag of the main side RAM 344 is not set to "1" (step S5101: NO), the value of the total number of games counter 344a of the main side RAM 344 is the value corresponding to the number of management trigger games. It is determined whether the number is "3000" or more (step S5102). Note that the number of management trigger games is not limited to 3,000 games, and may be, for example, 6,000 games. In addition, the number of management trigger games is not limited to a configuration in which the number of games that can be played in a game hall is set to be less than the maximum number of games that can be played in one business day, but is set to approximately the maximum number of games. The maximum number of games may be set to a value greater than or equal to the maximum number of games. If the value of the total number of games counter 344a is equal to or greater than the number of management trigger games (step S5102: YES), the ratio of the value of the number of advantageous games counter 344b of the main side RAM 344 to the value of the total number of games counter 344a is calculated ( Step S5103). That is, the calculation is performed so that the calculation result = "value of advantageous game number counter 344b"/"value of total number of games counter 344a".

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of this calculation result exceeds the regulated ratio (step S5104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value calculated in step S5103 exceeds "0.7", which is the ratio to be regulated. In other words, if the total number of games in all gaming states including the normal gaming state, BB state, AT state, and ART state reaches 3000 games, the game will be played in the ART state or in the AT state after the ART state has started. It is determined whether the total number of games played exceeds 2100 games, which is 70% of 3000 games.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5104, calculation processing for the number of restricted games is executed (step S5105). In the process of calculating the number of regulated games, the number of regulated games in which transition to the AT state and the ART state is prohibited is calculated in order to ensure that the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is below the ratio to be regulated. Specifically, number of regulated games = "value of advantageous games counter 344b" - "value of total number of games counter 344a" x "ratio of regulated targets (i.e. 0.7") + "number of additional games (specific Specifically, calculate "100"). Then, the calculated value of the number of restricted games is set in the restricted game number counter provided in the main side RAM 344 (step S5106). The restricted game number counter is a counter used by the main MPU 342 to specify the number of games for which transition to the AT state and the ART state is prohibited. Furthermore, the advantageous restriction flag in the main side RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5107). As a result, transition to the AT state and the ART state is prohibited.

After that, if the ART preparation state flag in the main side RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5108: YES), as various clearing processes, the ART preparation state flag is cleared to "0" and the ART game in the main side RAM 344 is cleared. The number counter is cleared to "0" (step S5109). As a result, if the advantageous regulation flag in the main side RAM 344 is set to "1" in the ART preparation state, the ART preparation state ends without transition to the ART state. In this case, since the AT state ends, the notification of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R for establishing the first RT replay winning or the second RT replay winning is not executed, and the first falling replay Notification of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R to avoid winning or second falling replay winning is not executed. Thereafter, normal return processing is executed (step S5110). In the normal return process, a normal return command is sent to the production side MPU 352. When the production-side MPU 352 receives the normal return command, a production indicating that the ART preparation state has ended and the normal gaming state has been returned without transitioning to the ART state is executed, and then the normal gaming state is returned to. The upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 are each controlled so that the corresponding effects are executed.

If the ART preparation state flag of the main side RAM 344 is not set to "1" (step S5108: NO), it is determined whether the value of the ART game number counter of the main side RAM 344 is 1 or more (step S5111) . If the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more (step S5111: YES), that is, if it is in the ART state, the value of the ART game number counter is cleared to "0" (step S5112). As a result, if the advantage regulation flag in the main side RAM 344 is set to "1" in the ART state, the ART state ends even if the number of games remaining in the ART state remains. In this case, since the AT state ends, the notification of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R for establishing the first RT replay winning or the second RT replay winning is not executed, and the first falling replay Notification of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R to avoid winning or second falling replay winning is not executed.

Thereafter, ART state termination processing is executed (step S5113). In the termination process, similarly to step S5009 in the ART status process (FIG. 99), a command indicating that the ART status has ended is transmitted to the performance side MPU 352. By receiving the command, the production side MPU 352 controls the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 so that the production corresponding to the normal gaming state is executed after the production indicating that the ART state has ended is executed. control each of them. The effect executed in this case is executed when the process of step S5009 in the ART state process (FIG. 99) is executed, that is, when the value of the ART game number counter in the main side RAM 344 becomes "0". It is the same as the performance. As a result, when the ART state ends, the ART state ends when "1" is set to the advantageous regulation flag in the main side RAM 344 during the ART state, and the remaining ART state ends. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which of the cases in which the ART state ends when the number of consecutive games becomes "0".

Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 101(a), in the ART state, in the image display device 334, in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 90), any of the index values IV=1 to 3 and the index value IV=9 and after is selected. If the winning result occurs, the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R is notified. In FIG. 101(a), an image G1 shows that the middle reel 316M is stopped first, an image G2 shows that the left reel 316L is stopped next, and an image G3 shows that the right reel 316R is stopped last. is displayed. In this situation where the image notifying the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R is displayed, the upper left corner of the image display device 334 shows the ART state of the main side RAM 344 after the start of the current ART state. A number-of-games-played image G4 (specifically, an image of "30 games in progress") indicating the number of games played before the value of the number-of-games counter reaches "0" is displayed. Further, at the bottom of the image display device 334, a character image G5 saying "How long will it continue?" is displayed.

However, no image is displayed on the image display device 334 to notify the remaining number of consecutive games in the current ART state, that is, the value set in the ART game counter of the main side RAM 344. Furthermore, the notification that allows the player to recognize the remaining number of games remaining in the current ART state is not performed, including on the image display device 334. As a result, when the value of the total number of games counter 344a exceeds the value corresponding to the number of management trigger games, the ratio of the value of the number of advantageous games counter 344b to the value of the total number of games counter 344a exceeds the regulated ratio. In this case, even if the ART state is in the middle of the ART state and the ART state is forcibly terminated, the ART state is terminated due to the forced termination or the number of remaining games in the ART state is "0". It is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether this is due to the fact that the game has occurred.

Returning to the explanation of the number of games management process (FIG. 100), if the process of step S5110 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S5111, or if the process of step S5113 is executed, the total number of games counter in the main side RAM 344 344a and the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b in the main side RAM 344 are each cleared to "0" (step S5114). On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5102 or a negative determination is made in step S5104, the process of step S5114 is not executed. As a result, on the condition that the value of the total number of games counter 344a becomes the number of management trigger games and the execution regulation of the AT state and the ART state has occurred, the total number of games counter 344a and the number of advantageous games counter 344b are used for management. The current game history will be cleared to "0" once.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the process of step S5114 is executed even when a negative determination is made in step S5104. In this case, if the value of the total number of games counter 344a is equal to or greater than the number of management trigger games, the total number of games is The game history managed using the counter 344a and the advantageous game number counter 344b is once cleared to "0".

If the advantageous restriction flag in the main side RAM 344 is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S4902 in the transition chance management process (FIG. 98). In this case, stock benefit award lottery processing is executed (step S4912). In the stock benefit grant lottery process, it is determined whether or not to grant the stock benefit. Specifically, in the stock benefit award lottery process, the stock benefit award lottery table corresponding to each of the index values IV = 4 to 6 is read from the main side ROM 343, and the stock benefit award lottery table is read out from the main side ROM 343 periodically (for example, every 1.49 msec). The value of the stock benefit lottery counter that is updated in each cycle is read out, and the value of the lottery counter is checked against the stock benefit award lottery table. The stock benefit award lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the stock benefit increases in the order of IV=4→IV=5→IV=6. If the stock benefit is awarded in the stock benefit lottery process (step S4913: YES), the value of the stock benefit counter provided in the main side RAM 344 is incremented by 1 (step S4914).

Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 101(b), if the value of the stock privilege counter is 1 or more, a stock privilege image G6 indicating that a stock privilege has been granted is displayed on the image display device 334. be done. Further, the same number of privilege number images G7 as the number of stock privileges that have been granted are displayed. In the case of FIG. 101(b), since the value of the stock benefit counter is "2", two benefit number images G7 are displayed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that stock benefits have been granted, and also allows the player to recognize the number of stock benefits that have been granted.

If a stock benefit has been granted, in step S4903 of the transfer chance management process (FIG. 98), a transfer lottery table corresponding to the value of the granted stock benefit is read. In this case, a transfer lottery table is read out which is more advantageous for the player as the value of the stock benefit is larger. Specifically, as already explained, in the transition lottery table that is selected when the stock benefit is "0", if you win with the index value IV = 4, there is a 5% probability that you will win the AT transition, If you win with index value IV = 5, there is a 10% probability that you will become an AT transfer winner, and if you win with index value IV = 6, you will have a 15% probability of becoming an AT transfer winner. ing. On the other hand, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock benefit is "1", if you win with index value IV = 4, there is a 15% probability that you will win AT transition, and index value IV = The setting is such that if the winning result is 5, there is a 20% probability that the AT transition will be won, and if the index value IV=6 is the winning result, there is a 25% probability that the AT transition will be winning. In addition, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock benefit is "2", if you win with index value IV = 4, there is a 25% probability that you will win AT transition, and if you win with index value IV = 5. The setting is such that if the winning result is 30%, the AT transition will be won, and if the index value IV=6 is the winning result, the AT migration winning will be the probability 35%. In addition, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock benefit is "3", if you win with index value IV = 4, there is a 35% probability that you will win AT transition, and if you win with index value IV = 5. If the result is 40%, there is a 40% probability that the AT transition will be won, and if the index value IV=6, the AT transition will be won with a 45% probability. In addition, in the transition lottery table that is selected when the stock benefit is "4", if you win with index value IV = 4, there is a 45% probability that you will win AT transition, and if you win with index value IV = 5. The setting is such that if the winning result is 50%, the AT transition will be won, and if the index value IV=6 is the winning, the AT transition will be won with a 55% probability. In addition, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock benefit is "5", if you win with index value IV = 4, there is a 55% probability that you will win AT transition, and if you win with index value IV = 5. The setting is such that if the winning result is 60%, there is a 60% probability that the AT transition will be won, and if the index value IV=6 is the winning result, there will be a 65% probability that the AT transition will be winning. With the above configuration, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the granting of stock benefits, and even in a situation where the advantage regulation flag in the main side RAM 344 is set to "1". It is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with winning the special winning combination in the winning lottery process (FIG. 90). Note that the process of clearing the stock benefit counter in the main side RAM 344 to "0" is executed when an AT transition is won in the AT transition lottery process. The probability of winning does not decrease.

Further, if a stock benefit has been granted, in step S4906 of the transfer chance management process (FIG. 98), the initial game number lottery table corresponding to the value of the granted stock benefit is read out. In this case, the initial game number lottery table is read out, which is more advantageous for the player as the value of the stock benefit is larger. Specifically, as already explained, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock benefit is "0", the probability that 50 games will be selected is 90%, and the probability that 100 games will be selected is 90%. 9%, and the probability that 200 games will be selected is 1%. On the other hand, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock benefit is "1", the probability that 50 games will be selected is 80%, and the probability that 100 games will be selected is 14%. , the probability that 200 games will be selected is 6%. In addition, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock benefit is "2", the probability that 50 games will be selected is 70%, the probability that 100 games will be selected is 19%, and the probability that 50 games will be selected is 19%, and 200 games will be selected. The probability that is selected is 11%. In addition, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock benefit is "3", the probability that 50 games will be selected is 60%, the probability that 100 games will be selected is 24%, and the probability that 50 games will be selected is 24%, and 200 games will be selected. The probability that is selected is 16%. In addition, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock benefit is "4", the probability that 50 games will be selected is 50%, the probability that 100 games will be selected is 29%, and the probability that 200 games will be selected is 50%. The probability that is selected is 21%. In addition, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock benefit is "5", the probability that 50 games will be selected is 40%, the probability that 100 games will be selected is 34%, and the probability that 200 games will be selected is 40%. The probability that is selected is 26%. With the above configuration, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the provision of stock benefits, and even in a situation where the advantageous regulation flag in the main side RAM 344 is set to "1". It is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with winning the special winning combination in the winning lottery process (FIG. 90).

Returning to the description of the game management process (FIG. 100), if the advantageous regulation flag in the main side RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5101: YES), the value of the regulation game number counter in the main side RAM 344 is subtracted by 1. (Step S5115). If the value of the regulation game number counter after the subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S5116: YES), the advantageous regulation flag in the main side RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S5117). As a result, the state in which execution of the AT state and the ART state is restricted is released. Incidentally, the value of the restricted game number counter is not reported, and notification indicating that the state in which execution of the AT state and the ART state is restricted is also not performed. This makes it possible for the player to be unable to grasp the timing at which the restriction will be lifted.

Next, the management process executed by the main MPU 342 to manage the gaming history and notify the management results will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 102. Note that the management process is executed in step S4513 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 88).

First, the value of the total number of games counter 344a of the main side RAM 344 is grasped (step S5201), and the value of the advantageous games number counter 344b of the main side RAM 344 is grasped (step S5202). Then, the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b of the main side RAM 344 to the value of the total number of games counter 344a is calculated (step S5203). That is, the calculation is performed so that the calculation result = "value of advantageous game number counter 344b"/"value of total number of games counter 344a". Then, of the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100, the 100th place is displayed on the first notification display device 346, the 10th place is displayed on the second notification display device 347, and the 1s place is displayed on the second notification display device 347. Display control is performed on these first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 without using other control devices so that the display is displayed on the third notification display device 348 (step S5204). The above calculation result is reported as a percentage. Specifically, if the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "35", "0" is displayed on the first notification display device 346, and "3" is displayed on the second notification display device 347. , "5" is displayed on the third notification display device 348. Further, for example, if the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "100", "1" is displayed on the first notification display device 346, "0" is displayed on the second notification display device 347, and "0" is displayed on the second notification display device 347. “0” is displayed on the third notification display device 348.

By executing the management process as described above, the management results of the game history are constantly displayed on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348, and the game hall manager can By opening the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348, it is possible to grasp the management results of the game history. Furthermore, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is executed at a cycle shorter than the shortest period required to complete one game, and more specifically, the shortest period required from the end of one game to the start of the next one. It is executed at a cycle shorter than the period. Therefore, by visually observing the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348, the game hall manager can grasp the management results of the game history up to the most recently completed game.

Next, the flowchart of FIG. 103 will be explained regarding the lighting process for controlling the light emission of the lighting devices 349a and 349b provided for the purpose of irradiating light to the main controller 340 when the front door 312 is in the open state. I will explain while referring to it. Note that the lighting process is executed in step S4514 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 88).

If no light is emitted from the lighting devices 349a, 349b (step S5301: NO), it is determined whether the front door 312 is in the open state based on the state of the signal input from the open angle sensor 312e. (Step S5302). If the front door 312 is in the open state (step S5302: YES), it is determined whether the opening angle of the front door 312 is within a predetermined angle range (step S5303). Specifically, it is determined whether the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle based on the state of the signal input from the opening angle sensor 312e. This predetermined opening angle is set to be 86% of the maximum opening angle of the front door 312. Specifically, since the maximum opening angle of the front door 312 is when the front door 312 is opened at 90 degrees relative to the housing 311, the predetermined state is when the front door 312 is opened approximately 77 degrees relative to the housing 311. The opening angle is set to . If an affirmative determination is made in step S5303, that is, if the front door 312 is not in the closed state and the opening angle of the front door 312 is 77 degrees or less, a drive signal is output to the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b (step S5304). As a result, the illumination range IR including the main control device 340 is irradiated with light from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b. This light irradiation state is continued until the process of step S5306, which will be described later, is executed.

When light is emitted from the lighting devices 349a and 349b (step S5301: YES), the front door 312 is in the closed state or It is determined whether the opening angle exceeds a predetermined opening angle (step S5305). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5305, the output of the drive signal to the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b is stopped (step S5306). As a result, the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b enter the non-illumination state, and irradiation of light from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b toward the irradiation range IR is stopped.

Here, the relationship between the opening angle of the front door 312 and the control state of the illumination devices 349a and 349b will be explained with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b). FIG. 104(a) shows the state of the front door 312, and FIG. 104(b) shows the control state of the lighting devices 349a and 349b. Further, in the following description, FIGS. 105(a) and 105(b) will be referred to as appropriate. FIG. 105(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the illumination devices 349a and 349b when the front door 312 is in the open state and the opening angle is less than or equal to a predetermined opening angle, and FIG. ) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the illumination devices 349a and 349b when the opening angle of the front door 312 is the maximum opening angle exceeding a predetermined opening angle.

First, a case where the opening operation of the front door 312 is stopped in a situation where the opening angle of the front door 312 is less than or equal to a predetermined opening angle will be described.

As shown in FIG. 104(a), in a situation where the front door 312 is in a closed state, an opening operation of the front door 312 is started at timing t1. In this case, at the timing t1, light irradiation from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b is started as shown in FIG. 104(b). Thereafter, at timing t2, the opening operation of the front door 312 is stopped before the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle. In this state, as shown in FIG. 105(a), light is irradiated toward the main control device 340 from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b. As a result, the main control device 340 is brightly illuminated even when the front door 312 is slightly opened, so that the game hall manager can check the board box 345 of the main control device 340 and the first to third notifications. It becomes possible to visually confirm the display contents of the display devices 346 to 348. In this case, since it is not necessary to open the front door 312 to the end during the confirmation work, the confirmation work can be facilitated.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104(a), the closing operation of the front door 312 is started at timing t3, and the front door 312 is brought into the closed state at timing t4. In this case, the light irradiation from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b is stopped at the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 104(b).

Next, a case will be described in which the opening operation of the front door 312 is performed until the opening angle of the front door 312 reaches the maximum opening angle.

As shown in FIG. 104(a), in a situation where the front door 312 is in a closed state, the opening operation of the front door 312 is started at timing t5. In this case, at the timing t5, light irradiation from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b is started as shown in FIG. 104(b). Thereafter, at timing t6, the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds the predetermined opening angle, as shown in FIG. 104(a). As a result, the light irradiation from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b is stopped at the timing t6, as shown in FIG. 104(b).

Thereafter, at timing t7, the opening operation of the front door 312 is stopped when the opening angle of the front door 312 reaches the maximum opening angle. In this state, as shown in FIG. 105(b), the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b do not emit light toward the main control device 340. When the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle, such as when the opening angle of the front door 312 reaches the maximum opening angle, the inside of the casing 311 is illuminated by light from the lighting in the game hall or sunlight. . In this case, if the main control device 340 is illuminated by the lighting devices 349a and 349b, there is a concern that the visibility of the main control device 340 and the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 will be reduced. be done. On the other hand, when the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle, such inconvenience can be avoided by stopping the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104(a), the closing operation of the front door 312 is started at timing t8, and the opening angle of the front door 312 becomes equal to or less than the predetermined opening angle at timing t9. In this case, at the timing t9, light irradiation from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b is started as shown in FIG. 104(b). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104(a), the front door 312 is closed at timing t10. In this case, the light irradiation from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b is stopped at the timing t10, as shown in FIG. 104(b).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The total number of games played regardless of the gaming state is measured by the total number of games counter 344a of the main side RAM 344, and the number of games played in the ART state or the AT state after the ART state is started is the main number. The advantageous game number counter 344b of the side RAM 344 accumulates and counts. Then, the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated, and if the calculated ratio is the ratio to be regulated, restrictions are imposed on the progress of the game. This makes it possible to impose constraints on the progress of the game according to the manner in which the ART state occurs, and if the manner in which the ART state occurs does not match the manner assumed at the design stage of the slot machine 310, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game. It becomes possible to deal with it.

When restrictions are imposed on the progress of the game according to the calculation result of the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the progress of the game is restricted so that the ratio deviates from the ratio to be regulated. As a result, even if the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games becomes a regulated ratio, it is possible to ensure that the ratio falls within the range assumed at the design stage of the slot machine 310. .

If the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is the ratio to be regulated, the ART state is ended even if the value of the ART game number counter in the main side RAM 344 is not "0". This makes it possible to forcibly terminate the ART state when the above ratio reaches the regulated ratio, and the manner in which the ART state occurs does not match the manner assumed at the design stage of the slot machine 310. In such a case, it becomes possible to impose restrictions on the execution mode of the gaming state.

The total number of games counted by the total number of games counter 344a is equal to or greater than the number of management trigger games, which is the number of games that is greater than the number of consecutive games in the ART state that can be initially set when the ART state is newly started. In this situation, the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated, and if the calculated ratio is the ratio to be regulated, the ART state is forcibly terminated. This makes it possible to suppress the frequency of forced termination of the ART state.

In the ART state, the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state is not reported. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the ART state is forcibly terminated because the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games has reached the regulated ratio.

When the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games reaches the ratio to be regulated, transition to the ART state is regulated. This makes it possible to forcibly prevent transition to the ART state depending on the manner in which the ART state occurs, and prevents the manner in which the ART state occurs from matching the manner assumed at the design stage of the slot machine 310. In such cases, it becomes possible to impose restrictions on the execution mode of the gaming state.

The period during which transition to the ART state is restricted varies depending on the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games. This makes it possible to prevent the limit on transition to the ART state from being set too low or too high regardless of the above ratio.

In a situation where transition to the ART state is prevented because the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is within the regulated ratio, if a special winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process (Figure 90), Although the process for determining whether to transition to the ART state is not executed, a stock benefit is provided as an alternative benefit. This prevents players from thinking that it was wasted if they win a special winning combination in the winning combination lottery process (Figure 90) in a situation where transition to the ART state is forcibly blocked. It becomes possible to do so.

The more stock benefits granted, the more advantageous it is to the player. As a result, even in a situation where transition to the ART state is forcibly blocked, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation of winning the special prize in the prize lottery process (Figure 90). Become.

If a stock benefit has been granted, a corresponding notification will be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from losing his or her desire to continue playing even in a situation where transition to the ART state is forcibly blocked.

If a stock benefit is granted, the transition to the ART state is likely to occur after the state in which transition to the ART state is forcibly blocked is released. This makes it possible to associate the provision of stock benefits with transition to the ART state. Therefore, even if a special winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 90) in a situation where transition to the ART state is forcibly blocked, the player cannot be forced to transition to the ART state. It is possible to give expectations.

By providing the lighting devices 349a and 349b for illuminating the main control device 340, it becomes easier to check the main control device 340 by opening the front door 312. In this case, when the front door 312 is closed, the illumination devices 349a and 349b are in a non-illumination state. This makes it possible to prevent the illumination devices 349a and 349b from being in the illumination state meaninglessly in a situation where the main control device 340 is not checked. Further, when the front door 312 is opened, the lighting devices 349a and 349b automatically enter the lighting state. This makes it easier to check the main controller 340 because there is no need to perform a separate operation to bring the lighting devices 349a, 349b into the lighting state.

The illumination devices 349a and 349b are provided within the housing 311 in which the main control device 340 is provided. This makes it easier to illuminate the main control device 340 using the illumination devices 349a and 349b in response to the opening operation of the front door 312.

The lighting devices 349a and 349b are not in the lighting state regardless of which open position the front door 312 is placed in, but the lighting devices 349a and 349b are selectively in the lighting state in some open positions. state. As a result, when checking the main control device 340, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are set to the lighting state only in favorable situations, and in situations where setting the lighting devices 349a and 349b to the lighting state makes it difficult to check the main control device 340. It becomes possible to put the illumination devices 349a and 349b into a non-illumination state.

When the front door 312 is in the maximum open position, the illumination devices 349a and 349b are in a non-illumination state. As a result, in a situation where the main control device 340 is sufficiently brightly illuminated by the lighting in the game hall, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are in a non-illumination state, so that the illumination by the lighting devices 349a and 349b actually makes the main control device 340 This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as difficulty in confirmation.

<Another form of the seventeenth embodiment>
・The total number of games played regardless of which gaming state it is in, and the number of advantageous games, which is the total number of games played in the ART state, are stored as history information, and the number of advantageous games is calculated based on the total number of games. Although the configuration is configured to calculate the ratio of It may be configured to calculate the winning probability of the predetermined combination. In this case, there are a first predetermined combination and a second predetermined combination as target predetermined combinations, and the number of winnings for each of the first and second predetermined combinations is individually stored as history information, and the first The winning probability may be calculated for each of the predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination. Alternatively, the number of winnings may be individually stored for each of all the winning combinations as history information, and the winning probability may be calculated for each winning combination. This makes it possible to notify the game hall manager of the probability of winning the winning combination to be managed.

Alternatively, the total number of game media awarded and the total number of games may be stored as history information, and the number of game media awarded per unit number of games may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the game hall manager of the number of game media given per unit number of games. In addition, the combination of the total number of game media given and the total number of games is stored as history information separately for each of the BB state, ART state, and normal game state, and the number of game media given per unit number of games is calculated. It may be configured to calculate separately for each of the BB state, ART state, and normal gaming state.

Alternatively, the number of transitions to the BB state and the total number of games played in gaming states other than the BB state may be stored as history information, and the probability of transition to the BB state may be calculated. Alternatively, the number of transitions to the ART state and the total number of games played in gaming states other than the ART state may be stored as history information, and the probability of transition to the ART state may be calculated. In addition, the total number of transitions to the BB state and the ART state and the total number of games played in gaming states other than the BB state and the ART state are stored as history information, and the probability of transition to the BB state and the ART state is calculated. It may also be configured to perform calculations.

- The display of each determination result on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 may be configured to start when the check result display period comes and end when the check result display period ends. . Further, when the opening of the front door 312 to the housing 311 is detected by the sensor that detects the opening of the front door 312, the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 make each previous determination. The display of the result is started, and when the front door 312 is closed with respect to the housing 311 is detected by the sensor that detects the opening of the front door 312, the first to third notification display devices The display of each determination result in steps 346 to 348 may be terminated. In this case, it becomes possible to limit the period during which the display is performed on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348.

-Although the configuration is such that the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state is not reported, it may be configured such that the number of consecutive games is notified. In this case, if the ART state is forcibly terminated due to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the reason for the forced termination may be notified on the image display device 334. . This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming confused when the ART state is forcibly terminated even though the number of remaining games in the ART state is not "0". becomes.

In addition, if the number of remaining games in the ART state is greater than the number of games for which the ART state will be forcibly terminated due to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the ART state will be forced to terminate. A configuration may be adopted in which the remaining number of games until the game is ended is notified as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state. In this case, even if the ART state is forcibly terminated, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, the ART state will end until the number of games for which the ART state is forcibly ended reaches 10 due to the number of remaining games in the ART state or the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of games remaining until the end of the ART state is not reported, and when the number of games reaches 10, the number of games remaining until the ART state ends is notified. In this case, it is possible to make the player aware that there are 10 or fewer games remaining in the ART state, and it is also possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the ART state is forcibly terminated. It becomes possible.

・If the number of remaining games in ART state exceeds the number of games for which ART state will be forcibly terminated due to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the remaining number of games in ART state will be continued. Even if an opportunity to increase the number of games occurs, the configuration may be such that the increase does not occur.

・If the ART state is forcibly terminated due to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the next ART state It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the degree of advantage changes. For example, it may be configured such that the larger the number of remaining continuation games in the ART state at the time of forced termination, the greater the initial number of continuation games in the next ART state, or the easier the number of continuation games will be in the next ART state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which addition of the above is likely to occur. As a result, even if the ART state is forcibly terminated at a stage where the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state is large, it is possible to compensate in accordance with the remaining number of continuous games.

- Notification of calculation results using game history is not limited to the configuration in which the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 are used, and for example, the credit display section 335 and the awarded number display section 336 may be used. It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is done. This allows the credit display section 335 and the awarded number display section 336 to be used as a display section for notifying calculation results. In addition, in this configuration, when there are multiple types of events to be notified, each type of event to be notified may be sequentially switched and displayed as in the thirteenth embodiment above. good. When the display is switched sequentially in this way, for example, the type of event to be notified is displayed in the credit display section 335, and the calculation result for the event to be notified or the content of the calculation result is displayed in the credit display section 336. The configuration may be such that information corresponding to the information is displayed. Thereby, even if there are multiple types of events to be notified, it is possible to notify the multiple types of events to be reported using a small number of display units.

- It may be configured to include a counter that measures the game history up to the number of management trigger games (specifically, 3000 games) and a counter that measures the game history beyond the number of management trigger games. In this case, the former counter is used to perform calculations using the game history up to the number of management trigger games, and control is performed in accordance with the calculation results. Then, when the calculation is performed, the former counter is cleared to "0". On the other hand, the latter counter is configured to cumulatively store the game history without clearing it to "0" even if the above calculation is performed, and to perform calculations using the cumulative game history. This makes it possible to execute control corresponding to the calculation result each time the number of management trigger games is reached, and to manage the game history in a range exceeding the number of management trigger games.

- Targets that are forcibly terminated in relation to the gaming history management results are not limited to advantageous gaming states such as the ART state, but may also be disadvantageous gaming states.

- An operation unit may be provided that is operated to forcibly turn the illumination devices 349a and 349b into a non-illumination state even when the front door 312 is in an open state. In this case, when illumination by the illumination devices 349a, 349b is not required, it is possible to put the illumination devices 349a, 349b into a non-illumination state. Further, the operation section may be provided at a position where it can be operated even when the front door 312 is closed, or it cannot be operated when the front door 312 is closed, but when the front door 312 is opened. It may also be configured such that it is provided at a position where it can be operated.

- When the front door 312 is in the open state, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are always in the lighting state, and when the front door 312 is in the closed state, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are always in the non-lighting state. It may also be a configuration.

- Even if the front door 312 changes from the closed state to the open state, the illumination devices 349a and 349b are maintained in the non-illumination state until the predetermined opening angle is reached, and then the illumination devices 349a and 349b are turned off when the opening angle reaches the predetermined opening angle. A configuration may be adopted in which the devices 349a and 349b are in an illuminated state. Further, in addition to this configuration, when the front door 312 is at the maximum open position as in the above embodiment, the illumination devices 349a and 349b may be in a non-illumination state.

- The intensity of the light emitted from the illumination devices 349a and 349b may be changed depending on the opening angle of the front door 312. For example, when the front door 312 is in a closed state, the illumination devices 349a and 349b are in a non-illumination state or a relatively weak illumination state, and when the front door 312 is in an open state and the opening angle of the front door 312 is a predetermined opening state. If the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle, the illumination state may be relatively strong, and if the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle, the illumination state may be relatively weak.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the seventeenth embodiment in the configuration for managing the game history in the slot machine 310. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the seventeenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the seventeenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 106(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various areas provided in the main side RAM 344.

The main side RAM 344 is provided with a total number of games counter 344a and an advantageous number of games counter 344b as in the seventeenth embodiment. Similar to the seventeenth embodiment, the total number of games counter 344a is a counter for counting the number of games played regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the BB state, the AT state, or the ART state. It is. Since the total number of games counter 344a measures the number of games up to 3000 games, the total number of games counter 344a has a data capacity that allows it to measure the number of games. Specifically, the total number of games counter 344a has a data capacity of 2 bytes. Note that even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned OFF, the total number of games counter 344a does not store the information of the number of games counted unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the power is turned ON afterwards. Hold.

As in the seventeenth embodiment, the advantageous game number counter 344b counts the number of games played from the time the transition to the ART state occurs until the value of the ART game number counter in the main side RAM 344 becomes "0". This is a counter for measurement. The value of the advantageous game number counter 344b is maintained without being cleared to "0" even if the value of the ART game number counter of the main side RAM 344 becomes "0" after the transition to the ART state occurs. In other words, the advantageous game number counter 344b is used to measure the total number of games that have occurred in multiple ART states. Since the number of advantageous games counter 344b measures the number of games up to 3000 games, the number of advantageous games counter 344b has a data capacity that allows it to measure the number of games. Specifically, the advantageous game number counter 344b has a data capacity of 2 bytes. Note that even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off, the advantageous game number counter 344b does not store information on the number of games being counted unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the power is turned on afterwards. Hold.

A total number of games counter 361 is provided in the main side RAM 344. The total number of games counter 361, like the total number of games counter 344a, is a counter for measuring the number of games played regardless of whether the gaming state is normal gaming state, BB state, AT state, or ART state. be. However, the total number of games counter 361 maintains counting over the number of games exceeding 3,000 games, and furthermore, even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off, the total number of games counter 361 will not be counted when the power is turned on after that. Information on the number of games being counted is held until the main side RAM 344 clearing process is executed. The total number of games counter 361 has a data capacity that allows the number of games to be counted over multiple business days without reaching the upper limit. Specifically, the total number of games counter 361 has a data capacity of 2 bytes. If the data capacity is 2 bytes, for example, if the maximum number of games that can be executed in one business day is 8000 games, the total number of games counter 361 can continuously measure the number of games for more than five years. It becomes possible.

The main side RAM 344 is provided with a total accumulation buffer 362. FIG. 106(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters 362a to 362c provided in the total accumulation buffer 362. The total accumulation buffer 362 includes a total payout counter 362a, a total advantage counter 362b, and a total bonus counter 362c.

The total payout counter 362a is a counter for measuring the total number of gaming media paid out to the player regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, BB state, AT state, or ART state. . Even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off, the total payout counter 362a keeps track of the total number of game media payouts unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the power is turned on afterwards. Retain information. The total payout counter 362a has a data capacity that allows the total number of game media to be counted over multiple business days without reaching the upper limit. Specifically, the total payout counter 362a has a data capacity of 3 bytes. If the data capacity is 3 bytes, for example, if the maximum total number of payouts of gaming media in one business day is "120000", the total number of payouts of gaming media can be measured over four months or more in the total payout counter 362a. It becomes possible to do this.

The total advantage counter 362b measures the total number of game media paid out to the player from the time the transition to the ART state occurs until the value of the ART game number counter in the main side RAM 344 becomes "0". This is a counter for The value of the total advantage counter 362b is maintained without being cleared to "0" even if the value of the ART game number counter in the main side RAM 344 becomes "0" after the transition to the ART state occurs. That is, the total advantage counter 362b is used to measure the total number of payouts of game media in multiple ART states. Even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off, the total advantage counter 362b keeps track of the total number of game media paid out unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the power is turned on afterwards. Retain information. The total advantage counter 362b has a data capacity that allows the total number of game media to be counted over multiple business days without reaching the upper limit. Specifically, the total advantage counter 362b has a data capacity of 3 bytes. If the data capacity is 3 bytes, for example, if the maximum total number of payouts of gaming media in one business day is "120000", the total number of payouts of gaming media can be measured in the total advantageous counter 362b over 4 months or more. It becomes possible to do this.

The total bonus counter 362c is a counter for measuring the total number of gaming media paid out to the player in the BB state. The value of the total bonus counter 362c is maintained without being cleared to "0" even if the BB state ends. That is, the total bonus counter 362c is used to measure the total number of payouts of game media in multiple BB states. Even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off, the total bonus counter 362c keeps track of the total number of game media paid out unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the power is turned on afterwards. Retain information. The total bonus counter 362c has a data capacity that allows the total number of game media to be counted over multiple business days without reaching the upper limit. Specifically, the total bonus medium counter 362c has a data capacity of 3 bytes. If the data capacity is 3 bytes, for example, if the maximum total number of payouts of gaming media in one business day is "120000", the total number of payouts of gaming media can be measured in the total bonus counter 362c over 4 months or more. It becomes possible to do this.

The main side RAM 344 is provided with a first cumulative total buffer 363 and a second cumulative total buffer 364. FIG. 106(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters 363a to 363c provided in the first cumulative totaling buffer 363, and FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of counters 364a to 364c. As shown in FIG. 106(c), the first cumulative total buffer 363 includes a first total payout counter 363a, a first advantage counter 363b, and a first bonus counter 363c. Further, the second cumulative total buffer 364 includes a second total payout counter 364a, a second advantageous middle counter 364b, and a second bonus middle counter 364c, as shown in FIG. 106(d).

Like the total total payout counter 362a, the first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a pay out to the player regardless of whether the gaming status is normal gaming status, BB status, AT status, or ART status. This is a counter for measuring the total number of game media played. Since the first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a measure the total number of game media paid out in a maximum of 6000 games, the data capacity that can measure the total number of game media is It has become. Specifically, the first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a each have a data capacity of 3 bytes. Note that even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off, the first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a do not count unless the main side RAM 344 is cleared when the power is turned on afterwards. It holds information on the total number of payouts of game media being played.

The first advantageous medium counter 363b and the second advantageous medium counter 364b are similar to the total advantageous medium counter 362b, from when the transition to the ART state occurs until the value of the ART game number counter in the main side RAM 344 becomes "0". This is a counter for measuring the total number of gaming media paid out to players. The value of the first advantageous middle counter 363b and the value of the second advantageous middle counter 364b are "0" even if the value of the ART game number counter in the main side RAM 344 becomes "0" after the transition to the ART state occurs. It is maintained without being cleared. In other words, the first advantage counter 363b and the second advantage counter 364b are used to measure the total number of payouts of game media in multiple ART states. Since the first advantage counter 363b and the second advantage counter 364b measure the total number of game media paid out in a maximum of 6000 games, the data capacity is sufficient to measure the total number of game media. It has become. Specifically, the first advantageous medium counter 363b and the second advantageous medium counter 364b each have a data capacity of 3 bytes. Note that even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned OFF, the first advantage counter 363b and the second advantage counter 364b do not count until the main side RAM 344 is cleared when the power is subsequently turned ON. It holds information on the total number of payouts of game media being played.

Like the total bonus counter 362c, the first bonus middle counter 363c and the second bonus middle counter 364c are counters for measuring the total number of gaming media paid out to the player in the BB state. The values of the first bonus middle counter 363c and the second bonus middle counter 364c are maintained without being cleared to "0" even if the BB state ends. That is, the first bonus middle counter 363c and the second bonus middle counter 364c are used to measure the total number of payouts of game media in a plurality of BB states. Since the first bonus medium counter 363c and the second bonus medium counter 364c measure the total number of game media paid out in a maximum of 6000 games, the data capacity is sufficient to measure the total number of game media. It has become. Specifically, the first bonus medium counter 363c and the second bonus medium counter 364c each have a data capacity of 3 bytes. Note that even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off, the first bonus middle counter 363c and the second bonus middle counter 364c do not count unless the main side RAM 344 is cleared when the power is turned on afterwards. It holds information on the total number of payouts of game media being played.

As shown in FIG. 106(a), the main side RAM 344 is provided with a calculation area 365 for total accumulation, a calculation area 366 for first accumulation, and a calculation area 367 for second accumulation. The calculation area 365 for the total accumulation calculates the total number of game media paid out in the ART state with respect to the total number of game media paid out using the total total payout counter 362a and the total advantageous counter 362b provided in the total accumulation buffer 362. In addition to storing information on the result of calculating the ratio, the total payout counter 362a and the total bonus counter 362c provided in the total accumulation buffer 362 are used to calculate the game media in the BB state relative to the total payout number of game media. Information on the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of payouts is stored. The first cumulative total calculation area 366 calculates game media in a continuous period of 6000 games using a first total payout counter 363a and a first advantageous counter 363b provided in the first cumulative total buffer 363. A first total payout counter 363a and a first bonus middle counter 363c provided in the first cumulative buffer 363 store information on the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of payouts of gaming media in the ART state to the total number of payouts of Using this, information on the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state to the total number of game media paid out in a continuous period of 6000 games is stored. The second cumulative total calculation area 367 uses a second total payout counter 364a and a second advantageous counter 364b provided in the second cumulative total buffer 364 to calculate game media in a continuous period of 6000 games. A second total payout counter 364a and a second bonus middle counter 364c provided in the second cumulative buffer 364 store information on the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of payouts of gaming media in the ART state to the total number of payouts of Using this, information on the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state to the total number of game media paid out in a continuous period of 6000 games is stored.

As described above, by providing the first cumulative total buffer 363 and the second cumulative total buffer 364, the total number of game media paid out in the ART state is smaller than the total number of game media paid out in a continuous period of 6000 games. It is possible to calculate the ratio and the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state to the total number of game media paid out in a continuous period of 6000 games. In this case, the first cumulative total buffer 363 and the second cumulative total buffer 364 are used such that the beginning and end of the period to be managed are shifted from each other. Specifically, the total number of games managed by each cumulative total buffer 363, 364 is A (specifically 6000 games), and the number of cumulative total buffers 363, 364 is B (specifically 2). In this case, the start and end of the period to be managed are shifted by the number of games A/B (specifically, 3000 games). Furthermore, when one managed period in the first cumulative total buffer 363 ends, the next managed period in the first cumulative total buffer 363 occurs from the next game, and the second cumulative total buffer When one period to be managed ends in 364, the next period to be managed in the second cumulative buffer 364 starts from the next game. Therefore, the period to be managed by the first cumulative total buffer 363 and the period to be managed by the second cumulative total buffer 364 occur repeatedly with the beginning and end of these periods being shifted by a certain number of games. becomes.

FIG. 107 is a time chart showing how the game history is managed in this embodiment. 107(a) shows the timing when 3000 games have passed, FIG. 107(b) shows the game execution timing, FIG. 107(c) shows the update timing of the total accumulation buffer 362, and FIG. 107(d) shows the timing of updating the total accumulation buffer 362. shows the update timing of the first accumulation buffer 363, FIG. 107(e) shows the initialization timing of the first accumulation buffer 363, FIG. 107(f) shows the update timing of the second accumulation buffer 364, 107(g) shows the initialization timing of the second cumulative totaling buffer 364, and FIG. 107(h) shows the management results calculated using the first cumulative totaling buffer 363 and the timing of initializing the second cumulative totaling buffer 364. The timing for switching the display target on the notification display devices 346 to 348 from one to the other of the management results calculated by the above is shown.

At timing t1, the slot machine 310 is powered on and supply of operating power to the main MPU 342 is started. In this case, by executing the clearing process of the main side RAM 344, the various counters 363a to 363c of the first cumulative total buffer 363 are cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. ), the various counters 364a to 364c of the second cumulative total buffer 364 are cleared to "0". Even if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 342 is started, if the clearing process of the main RAM 344 is not executed, the first cumulative The various counters 363a to 363c of the buffer 363 and the various counters 364a to 364c of the second cumulative total buffer 364 are not cleared to "0" and maintain the values as they were when the slot machine 310 was last powered off.

After that, one game is executed as shown in FIG. 107(b) at each of timing t2, timing t3, timing t4, timing t5, and timing t6. Then, at timing t6, 3000 games have passed as shown in FIG. 107(a). Assuming that a payout of game media occurs in each of these games, at each of the timings from t2 to t6, the update process of the total accumulation buffer 362 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(c), and As shown in FIG. 107(d), the process of updating the first cumulative total buffer 363 is executed. Note that in a game in which no payout of game media occurs, the updating process of the total accumulation buffer 362 and the first accumulation buffer 363 is not executed. As shown in FIG. 107(f), the updating process of the second accumulation buffer 364 is not executed at each of the timings from t2 to t6. Since the period to be managed in the first cumulative total buffer 363 and the period to be managed in the second cumulative total buffer 364 have a difference of 3000 games in both the starting and ending periods, these cumulative total buffers 363 and 364 If the initialization process is executed, the update process of the second cumulative total buffer 364 will be on standby until 3000 games have passed since the initialization process was executed.

Thereafter, one game is executed at each of timings t7, t8, t9, and t10 as shown in FIG. 107(b). Assuming that a payout of game media occurs in each of these games, the updating process of the total accumulation buffer 362 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(c) at each timing from t7 to t10, and As shown in FIG. 107(d), the first cumulative total buffer 363 is updated, and as shown in FIG. 107(f), the second cumulative total buffer 364 is updated. In addition, in a game in which no payout of game media occurs, the updating process of the total accumulation buffer 362, the first accumulation buffer 363, and the second accumulation buffer 364 is not executed.

The timing of t10 is the timing when 3000 games have elapsed from the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 107(a). In other words, this is the timing when 6000 games, which is a period of one management target, have passed since the first cumulative total buffer 363 became an update target. Therefore, the management results for 6000 games are calculated using the first cumulative total buffer 363. This calculated management result is stored in the calculation area 366 for the first cumulative total. After the management results are stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366, the various counters 363a to 363c of the first cumulative total buffer 363 are cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 107(e).

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 107(h), the timing for switching the display object is reached. When the clearing process of the main side RAM 344 is executed, the display contents corresponding to the management results of the cumulative total buffers 363 and 364 in the notification display devices 346 to 348 become initial display contents that do not correspond to any management result. The initial display content continues during the period in which the management results of the cumulative totaling buffers 363 and 364 are displayed until the first management result is calculated using the first cumulative totaling buffer 363. Information on the management result calculated using the first cumulative total buffer 363 at timing t10 is stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366, so that the cumulative total buffer 363 in the notification display devices 346 to 348, The display content of the management result 364 corresponds to the management result information stored in the calculation area 366 for the first cumulative total. This display content is displayed until the management result information calculated using the second cumulative total buffer 364 is stored in the second cumulative total calculation area 367. The information is maintained as the display content of the H.364 management results.

After that, one game is executed as shown in FIG. 107(b) at each of timing t11, timing t12, timing t13, and timing t14. Assuming that a payout of game media occurs in each of these games, the updating process of the total accumulation buffer 362 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(c) at each timing from t11 to t14, and As shown in FIG. 107(d), the updating process for the first cumulative total buffer 363 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 107(f), the updating process for the second cumulative total buffer 364 is executed. In addition, in a game in which no payout of game media occurs, the updating process of the total accumulation buffer 362, the first accumulation buffer 363, and the second accumulation buffer 364 is not executed.

The timing of t14 is the timing when 3000 games have elapsed from the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 107(a). In other words, this is the timing when 6000 games, which is a period of one management target, have passed since the second cumulative total buffer 364 became an update target. Therefore, the management results for 6000 games are calculated using the second cumulative total buffer 364. This calculated management result is stored in the calculation area 367 for second cumulative total. After the management results are stored in the second cumulative total calculation area 367, the various counters 364a to 364c of the second cumulative total buffer 364 are cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 107(g).

Also, as shown in FIG. 107(h), the timing for switching the display object is reached. Information on the management result calculated using the second cumulative total buffer 364 at timing t14 is stored in the second cumulative total calculation area 367, so that the cumulative total buffer 363 in the notification display devices 346 to 348, The display contents of the management results in 364 range from the display contents corresponding to the management result information stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366 to the display corresponding to the management result information stored in the second cumulative total calculation area 367. You can switch to the content. This display content is displayed in the cumulative total buffer in the notification display devices 346 to 348 until the management result information calculated using the first cumulative total buffer 363 is newly stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366. The information is maintained as the display content of the management results of 363 and 364.

After that, one game is executed as shown in FIG. 107(b) at each of timing t15, timing t16, timing t17, and timing t18. Assuming that a payout of game media occurs in each of these games, the updating process of the total accumulation buffer 362 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(c) at each timing from t15 to t18. As shown in FIG. 107(d), the updating process for the first cumulative total buffer 363 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 107(f), the updating process for the second cumulative total buffer 364 is executed. In addition, in a game in which no payout of game media occurs, the updating process of the total accumulation buffer 362, the first accumulation buffer 363, and the second accumulation buffer 364 is not executed.

The timing of t18 is the timing when 3000 games have elapsed from the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 107(a). In other words, this is the timing when 6000 games have passed since the start of a new management target period using the first cumulative total buffer 363. Therefore, the management results for 6000 games are calculated using the first cumulative total buffer 363. This calculated management result is stored in the calculation area 366 for the first cumulative total. After the management results are stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366, the various counters 363a to 363c of the first cumulative total buffer 363 are cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 107(e).

Also, as shown in FIG. 107(h), the timing for switching the display object is reached. Information on the management results calculated using the first cumulative total buffer 363 at timing t18 is stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366, so that the cumulative total buffer 363 in the notification display devices 346 to 348, The display contents of the management results in 364 range from the display contents corresponding to the management result information stored in the second cumulative total calculation area 367 to the display corresponding to the management result information stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366. You can switch to the content. This display content is displayed in the cumulative total buffer in the notification display devices 346 to 348 until the management result information calculated using the second cumulative total buffer 364 is newly stored in the second cumulative total calculation area 367. The information is maintained as the display content of the management results of 363 and 364.

Next, a processing configuration for making it possible to manage the game history as described above will be explained. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the game management process executed by the main MPU 342. Note that the game management process is executed in step S4811 in the process for responding to the end of the game (FIG. 97).

First, advantageous period regulation processing is executed (step S5401). In the advantageous period regulation process, the same processes as steps S5101 to S5117 of the game management process (FIG. 100) in the seventeenth embodiment are executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not game media have been awarded in the current game (step S5402). If the award of game media occurs (step S5402: YES), a value corresponding to the number of game media awarded this time is added to the total payout counter 362a of the total accumulation buffer 362 (step S5403), and the A value corresponding to the number of game media given this time is added to the first total payout counter 363a of the one-accumulation buffer 363 (step S5404). Further, on the condition that the second cumulative waiting period is not a period before 3000 games have passed since the clearing process of the main side RAM 344 was executed (step S5405: NO), the second cumulative totaling buffer 364 is A value corresponding to the number of gaming media given this time is added to the second total payout counter 364a (step S5406).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5405, or if the process in step S5406 is executed, it is determined whether the ART state is present by determining whether the value of the ART game number counter in the main side RAM 344 is 1 or more. is determined (step S5407). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5407, a value corresponding to the number of gaming media given this time is added to the total advantage counter 362b of the total accumulation buffer 362 (step S5408), and the A value corresponding to the number of game media given this time is added to the 1 advantage counter 363b (step S5409). Further, on the condition that the second cumulative waiting period is not a period before 3000 games have passed since the clearing process of the main side RAM 344 was executed (step S5410: NO), the second cumulative totaling buffer 364 is A value corresponding to the number of game media given this time is added to the second advantage counter 364b (step S5411).

If a negative determination is made in step S5407, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the BB state (step S5412). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5412, a value corresponding to the number of gaming media given this time is added to the total bonus counter 362c of the total cumulative buffer 362 (step S5413), and the A value corresponding to the number of game media given this time is added to the one-bonus counter 363c (step S5414). Further, on the condition that the second cumulative waiting period is not a period before 3000 games have passed since the clearing process of the main side RAM 344 was executed (step S5415: NO), the second cumulative totaling buffer 364 is A value corresponding to the number of game media awarded this time is added to the second bonus counter 364c (step S5416).

If a negative determination is made in step S5402, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5410, if the process of step S5411 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S5412, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5415, or When the process of step S5416 is executed, a calculation process for total accumulation is executed (step S5417). In this calculation process, the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the ART state to the total number of game media paid out is calculated using the total total payout counter 362a and the total advantageous counter 362b provided in the total accumulation buffer 362. The calculation result is stored in the total calculation area 365. In addition, in the calculation process, the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state to the total number of game media paid out is calculated using the total total payout counter 362a and the total bonus medium counter 362c provided in the total accumulation buffer 362. is calculated and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 365 for total accumulation. If the display target on the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the total cumulative buffer 362 and the ratio of the total number of payouts of game media in the ART state, the former calculation result is notified, and the notification display devices 346 to 348 If the display target at 348 is the total accumulation buffer 362 and the ratio of the total number of payouts of game media in the BB state is reached, the latter calculation result is notified.

Thereafter, target switching processing is executed in step S5418. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing target switching processing. First, the value of the total number of games counter 361 in the main side RAM 344 is incremented by 1 (step S5501). The total number of games counter 361 is used in order for the main MPU 342 to specify a period to be managed using the first cumulative total buffer 363 and a period to be managed using the second cumulative total buffer 364. used. Thereafter, in step S5502, it is determined whether the value of the total number of games counter 361 after adding 1 is 3000×2n (n is an integer of 1 or more). When the value of the total number of games counter 361 is 3000×2n, it means that one period to be managed using the first accumulation buffer 363 has ended. For example, if 6,000 games have passed since the main side RAM 344 clearing process was executed, if 12,000 games have passed, or if 18,000 games have passed, one management target using the first cumulative buffer 363 will be applied. This means that the period has ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5502, calculation processing for the first cumulative total is executed (step S5503). In the calculation process, the first total payout counter 363a and the first advantageous counter 363b provided in the first cumulative total buffer 363 are used to calculate the total payout number of game media in a continuous period of 6000 games. The ratio of the total number of payouts of game media in the ART state is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 366 for the first cumulative total. In addition, in the calculation process, the first total payout counter 363a and the first bonus medium counter 363c provided in the first cumulative total buffer 363 are used to calculate the total payout of gaming media in a continuous period of 6000 games. The ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state to the total number of payouts is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 366 for the first cumulative total. If the display target on the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first cumulative total buffer 363 and the ratio of the total number of payouts of game media in the ART state is reached, the former calculation result is notified, and the notification display device 346 When the display target in steps 348 to 348 is the first accumulation buffer 363 and the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state is reached, the latter calculation result is notified.

Thereafter, the first cumulative total display flag provided in the main side RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5504), and the second cumulative total display flag provided in the main side RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S5505). The first cumulative total display flag and the second cumulative total display flag are set when the display target on the notification display devices 346 to 348 is a management result calculated using the first cumulative total buffer 363 or the second cumulative total buffer 364. This flag is used by the main MPU 342 to specify which of these is to be displayed. If the first cumulative total display flag is set to "1" and the value of the second cumulative total display flag is "0", the management results calculated using the first cumulative total buffer 363 are displayed. If the value of the first cumulative total display flag is "0" and the second cumulative total display flag is set to "1", the management results calculated using the second cumulative total buffer 364 will be displayed. . Furthermore, if the values of both the first cumulative total display flag and the second cumulative total display flag are "0", the initial display content that does not correspond to either the first cumulative total buffer 363 or the second cumulative total buffer 364 is displayed. Targeted.

Thereafter, clearing processing of the first cumulative total buffer 363 is executed (step S5506). As a result, the various counters 363a to 363c of the first cumulative total buffer 363 are cleared to "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S5502, it is determined whether the value of the total number of games counter 361 after adding 1 is 3000×(2n+1) (n is an integer greater than or equal to 1) (step S5507). When the value of the total number of games counter 361 is 3000×(2n+1), it means that one period to be managed using the second accumulation buffer 364 has ended. For example, if 9,000 games have passed since the main RAM 344 was cleared, if 15,000 games have passed, or if 21,000 games have passed, one management target using the second cumulative buffer 364 will be applied. This means that the period has ended.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5507, calculation processing for the second cumulative total is executed (step S5508). In this calculation process, a second total payout counter 364a and a second advantageous counter 364b provided in the second cumulative total buffer 364 are used to calculate the total payout number of game media in a continuous period of 6000 games. The ratio of the total number of payouts of game media in the ART state is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the second cumulative calculation area 367. In addition, in the calculation process, the second total payout counter 364a and the second bonus counter 364c provided in the second cumulative total buffer 364 are used to calculate the total payout of gaming media in a continuous period of 6000 games. The ratio of the total payout number of game media in the BB state to the number is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the second cumulative total calculation area 367. If the display target on the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the second cumulative total buffer 364 and the ratio of the total number of payouts of game media in the ART state is reached, the former calculation result is notified, and the notification display device 346 If the display target in steps 348 to 348 is the second accumulation buffer 364 and the ratio of the total payout number of game media in the BB state is reached, the latter calculation result is notified.

Thereafter, the first cumulative total display flag provided in the main side RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S5509), and the second cumulative total display flag provided in the main side RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5510). Furthermore, clearing processing of the second cumulative total buffer 364 is executed (step S5511). As a result, the various counters 364a to 364c of the second cumulative total buffer 364 are cleared to "0".

Next, the management processing executed by the main MPU 342 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 110. Note that the management process is executed in step S4513 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 88).

First, it is determined whether it is time to update the display contents on the notification display devices 346 to 348 (step S5601). The notification display devices 346 to 348 display the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the total accumulation buffer 362 in the ART state, and the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the total accumulation buffer 362 in the BB state. , the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the first cumulative buffer 363 in the ART state, the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the first cumulative buffer 363 in the BB state, and the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the first cumulative buffer 363 in the BB state. The ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the ART state in the accumulation buffer 364, the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state in the second accumulation buffer 364, and the value of the total number of games counter 344a. The ratio of the values of the advantageous game number counter 344b exists. In the notification display devices 346 to 348, after the display content of one display target is displayed for a predetermined notification period (specifically, 5 seconds), the display content is changed to the next display target, and the display content is changed to the next display target. The display contents of the display target are displayed over the predetermined notification period. In the notification display devices 346 to 348, each ratio of the total cumulative total buffer 362 is displayed first, and then the timing when the period to be managed among the first cumulative total buffer 363 and the second cumulative total buffer 364 ends. The ratios for the most recent side are to be displayed, and then the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total number of games counter 344a is to be displayed. The flow of switching these display objects is then repeated. Note that until the display content update timing comes, the content set at the previous update timing continues to be displayed on the notification display devices 346 to 348.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5601, a display target counter update process is executed (step S5602). The display target counter is provided in the main side RAM 344, and if the value of the display target counter is "0", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the total accumulation buffer 362, and the game media in the ART state is displayed. It is the ratio of the total number of payouts, and if the value of the display target counter is "1", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the total cumulative buffer 362, and it is the ratio of the total number of payouts of gaming media in the BB state. , if the value of the display target counter is "2", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first cumulative total buffer 363 or the second cumulative total buffer 364, and the total number of payouts of game media in the ART state is displayed. If the value of the display target counter is "3", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first cumulative total buffer 363 or the second cumulative total buffer 364, and the total payout of game media in the BB state is indicated. If the value of the display target counter is "4", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 becomes the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total number of games counter 344a. Further, if the value of the display target counter after adding 1 is "5", the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, by determining whether the value of the display target counter is "0" or "1", it is determined whether the display target on the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the ratio for the total cumulative buffer 362. is determined (step S5603). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5603, a setting process for displaying the total type is executed (step S5604). In this setting process, if the value of the display target counter is "0", "0" is displayed on the first notification display device 346, and if the value of the display target counter is "1", the first notification is "1" is displayed on the display device 346. That is, in this embodiment, information corresponding to the type of display target on the notification display devices 346 to 348 is displayed on the first notification display device 346. Thereafter, a setting process for displaying the total cumulative result is executed (step S5605). In this setting process, if the value of the counter to be displayed is "0", the total cumulative total buffer 362 stored in the total cumulative calculation area 365 corresponds to the ratio of the total number of payouts of game media in the ART state. information is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. Furthermore, if the value of the display target counter is "1", information corresponding to the ratio of the total number of payouts of gaming media in the BB state is stored in the total cumulative calculation area 365 and is It is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. In these cases, the ratio is expressed as a percentage, and the tens digit is displayed on the second notification display device 347, and the one digit is displayed on the third notification display device 348. Note that in this configuration, it becomes impossible to distinguish between 100% and less than 1%, so different displays may be performed for 100% and less than 1%.

If a negative determination is made in step S5603, by determining whether the value of the display target counter is "2" or "3", the display target on the notification display devices 346 to 348 is set to the first cumulative total buffer. 363 or the second cumulative total buffer 364 (step S5606). When an affirmative determination is made in step S5606, a setting process for displaying the type of a partial period is executed (step S5607). In this setting process, if the value of the display target counter is "2", "2" is displayed on the first notification display device 346, and if the value of the display target counter is "3", the first notification is "3" is displayed on the display device 346.

Thereafter, if the first cumulative total display flag in the main side RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5608: YES), a setting process for displaying the first cumulative result is executed (step S5609). In the setting process, if the value of the display target counter is "2", the ratio of the total number of payouts of game media in the first cumulative total buffer 363 stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366 in the ART state is determined. information corresponding to is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. Further, if the value of the display target counter is "3", it corresponds to the ratio of the total payout number of game media in the BB state, which is the first cumulative total buffer 363 stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366. The information is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348.

If the first cumulative total display flag of the main side RAM 344 is not set to "1" and the second cumulative total display flag is set to "1" (step S5610: YES), second cumulative total result display setting process is executed (step S5611). In the setting process, if the value of the display target counter is "2", the ratio of the total number of payouts of game media in the second cumulative total buffer 364 stored in the second cumulative total calculation area 367 and in the ART state is determined. information corresponding to is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. Further, if the value of the display target counter is "3", the second cumulative total buffer 364 stored in the second cumulative total calculation area 367 corresponds to the ratio of the total number of payouts of game media in the BB state. The information is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348.

If "1" is not set to both the first cumulative total display flag and the second cumulative total display flag in the main side RAM 344 (step S5610: NO), initial display setting processing is executed (step S5612). In this setting process, the display contents of the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348 are set to be the initial display contents regardless of the value of the display target counter. Specifically, the letter “L”, which is not to be displayed when displaying the ratio of other situations, is displayed on both the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. However, even in this case, the content corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed on the first notification display device 346. As a result, when the initial display contents are displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348, the administrator of the game hall can understand which display target the initial display contents correspond to. It becomes possible to do so.

If a negative determination is made in step S5606, it means that the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total number of games counter 344a. In this case, first, a setting process for displaying the type of advantageous period ratio is executed (step S5613). In the setting process, "4" corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed on the first notification display device 346. Further, a setting process for displaying the results of the advantageous period ratio is executed (step S5614). In the setting process, the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total number of games counter 344a is calculated, and information corresponding to the calculation result is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. so that it is displayed.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

A first cumulative total buffer 363 and a second cumulative total buffer 364 are provided, and the first cumulative total buffer 363 is used to manage a continuous period of 6000 games, and the second cumulative total buffer 364 is used. A continuous period of 6,000 games is managed using the first cumulative total buffer 363 (hereinafter also referred to as the first period) and a second cumulative total buffer 364 is used to manage the continuous period. It partially overlaps with the managed period (hereinafter also referred to as the second period). This makes it possible to derive various ratios corresponding to the management results in the first period in the middle of one's second period, and also to derive various ratios corresponding to the management results in the second period in the middle of one's first period. It becomes possible to derive the ratio. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of deriving various ratios while ensuring that the first period and the second period are the periods during which management is performed. Furthermore, without making the respective storage capacities of the first cumulative total buffer 363 and the second cumulative total buffer 364 excessively large, various types of data can be stored while ensuring the first period and the second period as the periods in which management is performed. It becomes possible to increase the frequency of deriving ratios.

Since both the first period and the second period end when 6000 games have elapsed, the conditions for ending the periods are the same. This makes it possible to derive various ratios corresponding to a certain period even in a configuration in which management is performed using each of the first cumulative total buffer 363 and the second cumulative total buffer 364.

If the first period of one ends, a new first period will start following the first period, and if the second period of one ends, a new second period will start following the second period. Furthermore, the difference between the first period and the second period is constant. This makes it possible to derive various ratios corresponding to each of the first period and the second period while ensuring a state in which a certain deviation occurs.

When the first period ends, the first cumulative total buffer 363 is cleared to "0", and when the second period ends, the second cumulative total buffer 364 is cleared to "0". As a result, the first cumulative total buffer 363 has a sufficient capacity to store the game history corresponding to the first period, and the second cumulative total buffer 364 stores the game history corresponding to the second period. The capacity that can be used is sufficient. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the capacity of the first cumulative total buffer 363 and the second cumulative total buffer 364 while achieving the excellent effects already described.

When the first period has elapsed, notification of various ratios corresponding to the first period is started, and when a second period has elapsed, notification of various ratios corresponding to the second period is started. As a result, various ratios are reported as each of the first period and the second period progresses, and it becomes possible to report various ratios in situations that are relatively close to the current situation.

<Another form of the 18th embodiment>
- The number of cumulative total buffers 363 and 364 used to calculate various ratios during the period of 6000 games is not limited to two, the first cumulative total buffer 363 and the second cumulative total buffer 364, but may be three. , 4 or 5 or more. If there are 3, both the start and end of the period managed by each cumulative buffer will be shifted by 2000 games, and if there are 4, the start and end of the period managed by each cumulative buffer will be shifted by 2000 games. Both of them will be shifted by 1500 games, and if there are 5, both the start and end of the period managed by each cumulative buffer will be shifted by 1000 games.

- The period to be managed by the first cumulative total buffer 363 and the second cumulative total buffer 364 is not limited to 6,000 games, and may be a smaller number of games than 6,000 games, such as 4,000 games, or 8,000 games. The number of games may be greater than 6000 games, such as games. Further, the number of games is not limited to a number that is divisible by the number of cumulative buffers 363, 364, such as 6000 games, but may be a number of games that is not divisible by the number of cumulative buffers 363, 364, such as 6001 games. If the number of games is not divisible, the total number of games to be managed by each cumulative total buffer 363, 364 is set to A (specifically, 6001 games), and the number of cumulative total buffers 363, 364 is set to B (specifically, 6001 games). is 2), the configuration may be such that both the start and end of the period to be managed are shifted by the number of games of the quotient by A/B (specifically 3000 games), and the quotient by A/B is Both the start and end of the period to be managed may be shifted by the number of games (specifically, 3001 games) added by 1.

- Instead of the cumulative total buffers 363 and 364, a ring buffer such as the first history memory 371 and second history memory 372 in the nineteenth embodiment described later may be used. Then, the results of each game are stored as history information in the ring buffer corresponding to the first cumulative total buffer 363 and the ring buffer corresponding to the second cumulative total buffer 364, and the stored historical information is used. The configuration is such that various ratios are calculated as in the eighteenth embodiment. Even with this configuration, it is possible to calculate various ratios while partially overlapping each of the first period and the second period, which are periods spanning 6000 games.

- The objects managed by the first cumulative total buffer 363 and the second cumulative total buffer 364 are not limited to the above-mentioned various ratios; for example, the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games (in the eighteenth embodiment described above) The ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total number of games counter 344a) may be managed by these cumulative buffers 363 and 364.

<Nineteenth embodiment>
As in the 18th embodiment, the first cumulative total buffer 363 and the second cumulative total buffer 364 are used to partially overlap each management target period, but with a shorter cycle than the relevant management target period. A configuration capable of reporting management results for each managed period may be applied to the third embodiment. FIG. 111 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in this embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the third embodiment is basically omitted.

As shown in FIG. 111, the management IC 66 includes a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a calculation result memory, as in the third embodiment. 131 is provided. These functions are similar to those in the third embodiment.

In addition to the above, the management IC 66 is provided with a first history memory 371 and a second history memory 372. These first history memory 371 and second history memory 372 have the same configuration. Further, although the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 have different total data capacities, their basic configuration is a ring buffer similar to the history memory 117 in the third embodiment. FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configurations of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372.

Each history memory 371, 372 is provided with history areas 371a, 372a for sequentially storing history information. In the history areas 371a and 372a, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set in serial numbers, and history information storage areas 371b and 372b are set in one-to-one correspondence with each piece of pointer information. The history information storage areas 371b and 372b can store combinations of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 371b, 372b has a data capacity of 2 bytes, a 1 byte data capacity is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing correspondence information. A data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area. When it becomes necessary to store correspondence relationship information in accordance with the signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (actually the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j of this pachinko machine 10), First, the date information and time information measured by the current RTC 115 are stored in the areas for storing RTC information in the history information storage areas 371b and 372b corresponding to the pointer information that is currently being written. do. After that, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the current information storage is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is is stored in the area for storing correspondence information of the history information storages 371b and 372b corresponding to the pointer information currently being written.

The history information storage areas 371b and 372b are provided for several minutes to make it possible to store all the history information when 30,000 game balls are shot. For example, if it is assumed that history information is generated up to 40,000 times in normal use before 30,000 game balls are fired, more than 40,000 history information storage areas 371b, 372b are provided. Thereby, it is possible to store and hold history information in each history memory 371, 372 until at least 30,000 game balls are fired.

The history memories 371 and 372 are provided with pointer areas 371c and 372c in addition to the history areas 371a and 372a. The pointer areas 371c and 372c store information for the management CPU 112 to specify pointer information that is currently being written in the history memories 371 and 372. Specifically, at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, information specifying pointer information of "0" to be written is set in the pointer areas 371c and 372c. Then, each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage areas 371b, 372b, the information in the pointer areas 371c, 372c is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. Ru. When the pointer information in the last order becomes the write target and the history information is stored in the history information storage areas 371b, 372b corresponding to the pointer information in the last order, the pointer information of "0" becomes the write target. The information in the pointer areas 371c and 372c is updated. As a result, when the storage of history information exceeds the number of pieces of history information that can be stored, the history information storage areas 371b and 372b where old history information is stored are sequentially overwritten with new history information. It happens.

Furthermore, when various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 using the history memories 371 and 372 and the results of the calculations are stored in the calculation result memory 131, the history memories 371 and 372 that were referenced during the calculation, Regarding 372, the history information storage areas 371b and 372b are all cleared to "0", and the information in the pointer areas 371c and 372c is updated so that the pointer information of "0" becomes the writing target. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has once been targeted for reading from becoming targeted for reading again.

By providing the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372, various parameters can be calculated using history information during the period until 30,000 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA. becomes possible. In this case, in the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372, the beginning and end of the period to be managed are shifted from each other, like the cumulative total buffers 363 and 364 in the eighteenth embodiment. It is used in this way. Specifically, the number of ejected game balls to be managed by each history memory 371, 372 is A (specifically 30,000), and the number of history memories 371, 372 is B (specifically 2). ), both the start and end of the period to be managed are shifted by the number of game balls released as A/B (specifically, 15,000). In addition, when one period to be managed in the first history memory 371 ends, the next period to be managed in the first history memory 371 occurs from the ejection of the next game ball, and the second history When one period to be managed in the second history memory 372 ends, the next period to be managed in the second history memory 372 occurs from the discharge of the next game ball. Therefore, the period to be managed by the first history memory 371 and the period to be managed by the second history memory 372 occur repeatedly with both the beginning and end of these periods being shifted by a certain number of discharged items. I will do it.

Next, a processing configuration for making it possible to manage game history using the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the history setting process is executed in step S607 in the management process (FIG. 18).

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in a check target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S5701). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blankness is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is identified, and the number of correspondence areas is identified. Set the information of the number in the confirmation target counter. As already explained in this pachinko machine 10, since information other than information indicating blankness is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j, "10" is set in the check target counter in step S5701. do.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the content of the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is the content that triggered the writing of history information (step S5702). Specifically, if the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is changed from "0" to "1", It is determined that a write opportunity has occurred. Additionally, if the current value of the counter to be checked is between "8" and "10", the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current counter to be checked will be changed from "1" to "0". If so, it is determined that a write trigger has occurred.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5702, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S5703). Then, writing processing to the first history memory 371 is executed (step S5704). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 371a that is currently the write target is identified by referring to the pointer area 371c of the first history memory 371, and the pointer information that is the write target is specified. The RTC information read in step S5703 is written into the history information storage area 371b of the corresponding history area 371a. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current check target counter value, and written into the history information storage area 371b corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Furthermore, if the correspondence relationship information is any of the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, the information indicating that it is in high-frequency support mode, and the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14, the above-mentioned Not only correspondence information but also start information or end information is written in the history information storage area 371b corresponding to the pointer information to be written.

After that, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S5705). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 371c of the first history memory 371 is read out and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 371a. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 371c as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 371c is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

Thereafter, by determining whether the number of game balls ejected from the game area PA after the clearing process of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 has been executed has reached 15,000, the second cumulative total is determined. It is determined whether it is the standby period (step S5706). In this embodiment, when clear processing of the main side RAM 65 is executed, a clear signal is sent from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66, and when the management IC 66 receives the clear signal from the main side CPU 63, Clearing processing of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 is executed. By executing the clearing process, the history areas 371a, 372a of each history memory 371, 372 are all cleared to "0", and the pointer areas 371c, 372c of each history memory 371, 372 are cleared to "0". ” will be cleared. Then, when an opportunity to write history information occurs after that, only the first history memory 371 is updated until the number of discharged pieces reaches 15,000, and after the number of discharged pieces reaches 15,000, the history information Each time a write opportunity occurs, both the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 are updated.

If a negative determination is made in step S5706, writing processing to the second history memory 372 is executed (step S5707). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 372a that is currently the write target is identified by referring to the pointer area 372c of the second history memory 372, and the pointer information that is the write target is specified. The RTC information read in step S5703 is written into the history information storage area 372b of the corresponding history area 372a. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current check target counter value, and written into the history information storage area 372b corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Furthermore, if the correspondence relationship information is any of the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, the information indicating that it is in high-frequency support mode, and the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14, the above-mentioned Not only correspondence information but also start information or end information is written in the history information storage area 372b corresponding to the pointer information to be written.

After that, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S5708). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 372c of the second history memory 372 is read out and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 372a. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after being incremented by 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 372c as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 372c is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

If a negative determination is made in step S5702, an affirmative determination is made in step S5706, or if the process in step S5708 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S5709). Then, it is determined whether the value of the check target counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S5710). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S5710: NO), the process from step S5702 onward is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter. If the value of the confirmation target counter is "0" (step S5710: YES), target switching processing is executed (step S5711).

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing target switching processing.

First, it is determined whether or not a game ball is ejected from the game area PA (step S5801). If a game ball is being ejected (step S5801: YES), the total ejected number counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is incremented (step S5802). In the addition process, the value of the number of game balls discharged this time from the game area PA is added to the total number of discharged balls counter. Thereafter, in step S5803, it is determined whether the value of the total number of discharged pieces counter is 15000×2n (n is an integer greater than or equal to 1). When the value of the total discharge number counter is 15000×2n, it means that the period to be managed using the first history memory 371 has ended. For example, if 30,000 game balls are ejected after the clearing process of the first history memory 371 is executed, if 60,000 game balls are ejected, or if 90,000 game balls are ejected, etc. This means that one period of management using the first history memory 371 has ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5803, calculation processing using the first history memory 371 is executed (step S5804). In the calculation process, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the first history memory 371. The contents of the calculation of these various parameters are the same as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power outage response process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment. Then, various parameters resulting from the calculation are written into the calculation result memory 131. In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, write the calculation result information so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. conduct. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

Thereafter, clearing processing of the first history memory 371 is executed (step S5805). As a result, the history area 371a of the first history memory 371 is cleared to "0" and the pointer area 371c of the first history memory 371 is cleared to "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S5803, it is determined whether the value of the total number of discharged pieces counter is 15000×(2n+1) (n is an integer greater than or equal to 1) (step S5806). When the value of the total number of discharged items counter is 15000×(2n+1), it means that the period to be managed using the second history memory 372 has ended. For example, if 45,000 game balls are ejected after the clearing process of the second history memory 372 is executed, if 75,000 game balls are ejected, or if 105,000 game balls are ejected, etc. This means that one period of management using the second history memory 372 has ended.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5806, calculation processing using the second history memory 372 is executed (step S5807). In the calculation process, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the second history memory 372. The contents of the calculation of these various parameters are the same as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power outage response process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment. Then, various parameters resulting from the calculation are written into the calculation result memory 131. In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, write the calculation result information so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. conduct. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

Thereafter, clearing processing of the second history memory 372 is executed (step S5808). As a result, the history area 372a of the second history memory 372 is cleared to "0" and the pointer area 372c of the second history memory 372 is cleared to "0".

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

Equipped with a first history memory 371 and a second history memory 372, the first history memory 371 is used to manage the period until 30,000 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA. The second history memory 372 is used to manage the period until 30,000 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA, and the first history memory 371 is used to manage the period (hereinafter referred to as the first). (also referred to as one period) and a period managed using the second history memory 372 (hereinafter also referred to as a second period) partially overlap. This makes it possible to derive various parameters corresponding to the management results in the first period in the middle of one's second period, and also to derive various parameters corresponding to the management results in the second period in the middle of one's first period. It becomes possible to derive parameters. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of deriving various parameters while ensuring that the first period and the second period are the periods during which management is performed. Furthermore, without increasing the storage capacity of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 excessively, it is possible to maintain the first period and the second period as periods in which management is performed, while maintaining various It becomes possible to increase the frequency of deriving parameters.

Since both the first period and the second period end when 30,000 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA, the conditions for ending the periods are the same. This makes it possible to derive various parameters corresponding to a certain period even in a configuration in which management is performed using each of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372.

If the first period of one ends, a new first period will start following the first period, and if the second period of one ends, a new second period will start following the second period. Furthermore, the difference between the first period and the second period is constant. This makes it possible to derive various parameters corresponding to each of the first period and the second period while ensuring a state in which a certain deviation occurs.

When the first period ends, the first history memory 371 is cleared to "0", and when the second period ends, the second history memory 372 is cleared to "0". As a result, the first history memory 371 has a sufficient capacity to store the gaming history corresponding to the first period, and the second history memory 372 stores the gaming history corresponding to the second period. The capacity that can be used is sufficient. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing the capacity of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372.

<Another form of the nineteenth embodiment>
- The number of history memories 371 and 372 used to calculate various parameters during the period until 30,000 game balls are ejected from the game area PA is the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372. The number is not limited to two, and may be three, four, or five or more. If there are three, both the start and end of the period managed by each history memory will be shifted by 10,000, and if there are four, the start and end of the period managed by each history memory will be shifted by 10,000. If there are 5, both the start and end of the period to be managed by each history memory will be shifted by 6000.

- The period to be managed by the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 is not limited to the period until 30,000 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA, but can also be managed by the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372. The number may be smaller than 30,000, such as 40,000, or may be larger than 30,000, such as 40,000. Further, the number is not limited to a number such as 30,000 that is divisible by the number of history memories 371 and 372, but may be a number such as 30001 that is not divisible by the number of history memories 371 and 372. If the number is not divisible, the number of discharged items to be managed by each history memory 371, 372 is set to A (specifically, 30001 pieces), and the number of history memories 371, 372 is set to B (specifically, 2 pieces). ), then both the start and end of the period to be managed may be shifted by the number of items A/B (specifically 15,000 items), and 1 is added to the quotient A/B. A configuration may be adopted in which both the start and end of the period to be managed are shifted by the number (specifically, 15,001).

- Instead of the history memories 371 and 372, counters such as the first cumulative total buffer 363 and the second cumulative total buffer 364 in the eighteenth embodiment may be used. Then, the counter corresponding to the first history memory 371 and the counter corresponding to the second history memory 372 each store the number of balls entered into each ball entry section, and the stored number of balls entered is used. The configuration is such that various parameters are calculated as in the nineteenth embodiment described above. Even with this configuration, it is possible to calculate various parameters while partially overlapping each of the first period and the second period, which are the periods until 30,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA. Become.

- The structure is not limited to a configuration that uses a plurality of history memories such as the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372, and for example, history information over a long period of time as in the third embodiment described above. The history information corresponding to the first period is extracted from the history information stored in the history area, and various parameters are calculated. It may be configured to extract history information corresponding to a second period that partially overlaps with the first period and calculate various parameters. In this case, by setting the history area to have a capacity that can sufficiently store history information for the period until 45,000 game balls are ejected from the game area PA, each of the first period and the second period It becomes possible to extract historical information corresponding to

- When writing history information to the history memories 371 and 372, the pointer information in the pointer areas 371c and 372c is updated after writing the history information to the area corresponding to the pointer information shown in the pointer areas 371c and 372c. The present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the area to which new history information is written is always fixed, and the information stored in each area may be sequentially shifted when writing new history information. For example, if areas 1 to 5 exist, the area in which new history information is written is always the first area, and when the occasion arises to write new history information, the area changes from area 4 to area 5. A configuration may be adopted in which new history information is written in the first area after each piece of information is shifted such as area, third area → fourth area, second area → third area, first area → second area.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the embodiments described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following changes may be made. Incidentally, the configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied individually to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

(1) In the first embodiment and the like, all of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 are subject to storage of history information (or ball entry history) Although the configuration is not limited to this, only some of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 have history information. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the files are stored. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which only the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the second operating opening 34 are subject to storing history information, or a configuration in which only the general winning opening 31 is subject to storing historical information may be adopted. It's good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball during a predetermined period with respect to the ball entry part for which the history information is stored.

(2) In the first embodiment and the like, the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, and the third winning hole detection sensor 44a correspond to the result of entering the game ball. Although the configuration has been described in which signal paths 118a to 118c are set for transmitting information, the present invention is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to the ball entry results for the same type of ball entry section is Even in a configuration in which there are a plurality of ball entry sections and a plurality of ball entry detection sensors corresponding thereto, the information may be transmitted as one type of information. This makes it possible to suppress the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66.

(3) In the first embodiment, correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each buffer 122a to 122o is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the correspondence information is stored in advance in the management IC 66. In this case, there is no need to execute a process for making the management IC 66 recognize the correspondence relationship information, so it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63.

(4) In the first embodiment, correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each buffer 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Although this is configured to be performed at the start of supply of operating power to the main CPU 63, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be able to communicate bidirectionally, and the management IC 66 may be able to communicate with the management IC 66. The configuration may be such that the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when a signal requesting transmission of the relationship information is received. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and is configured to be used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped is transferred to the main CPU 63. The configuration is such that even if the supply of operating power is stopped, the information is stored and retained in the correspondence memory 116. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which correspondence information is transmitted.

(5) In the first embodiment, correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each buffer 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the configuration is such that the signal paths 118a to 118g are used to transmit information on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence relationship information is mainly used. A configuration may also be adopted in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting from the side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is provided. This allows the management IC 66 to know which type of information it is receiving from the main CPU 63 based on the type of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

(6) In the first embodiment, information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63, but this is not limiting. Instead, information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 based on history information are transmitted to the main CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute notification control of the notification means in the same way as in the eleventh embodiment so that notifications corresponding to the contents of the various parameters received are performed. , the main CPU 63 sends commands corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters to the audio light emission control device 81, thereby controlling the contents of the various parameters using the display light emitting section 53, the speaker section 54, and the symbol display device 41. A configuration may also be adopted in which a corresponding notification is executed.

(7) When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, and The content of various parameters may be notified using the display light emitting section 53, the speaker section 54, the symbol display device 41, etc. In this case, when the gaming hall starts business, it is possible to confirm whether or not the entry state of game balls in the gaming area PA on the immediately preceding business day was normal.

(8) If the various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the game cannot be started on the pachinko machine 10 until the prohibition release operation is performed. You can also use it as As a configuration for preventing the game from starting, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the firing of game balls is prohibited, a configuration in which each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a is disabled, and a configuration in which the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the win/fail determination process may not be executed. Further, the prohibition release operation may be performed by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again while the RAM erase switch is turned ON, and can be performed when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the outer frame 11. It is also possible to operate the operating means. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being played in a situation where the game ball enters the game area PA in an abnormal manner.

(9) Although history information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, calculations of various parameters using the history information are performed by either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112. It is also possible to have a configuration in which neither is executed. In this case, the history information may be read by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and various parameter calculations may be performed using the read history information by the reading worker. Often, the reading device may perform calculations on various parameters using the read history information. In this case, it becomes possible to reduce the processing load on the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112.

(10) The management IC 66 may not be provided, and the main CPU 63 may have the functions of storing history information and calculating various parameters in each of the above embodiments, and the payout side The configuration may be included in the CPU 92 or the audio emission control device 81. When the payout side CPU 92 or the sound emission control device 81 is equipped with these functions, information on the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the control entity equipped with the function. It happens.

(11) The management IC 66 is equipped with a separate power supply from the main CPU 63, so even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 can calculate various parameters using history information. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that it is possible to output history information or various parameters. This allows the reading device to read history information and various parameters even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped.

(12) Although the reading terminal 102 used to read the program from the main ROM 64 is also used as a terminal used to read history information or various parameters with the reading device, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a terminal used for reading history information or various parameters by the reading device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 102 for reading the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, the terminal used to read the history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62, or may be provided in a position other than the MPU 62 on the main control board 61.

(13) The correspondence memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 131 in each of the above embodiments are not limited to a configuration in which they are provided as nonvolatile storage means such as a flash memory. Any one of 116, 117, and 131 is provided as a volatile storage means that requires power supply to store and retain information, and by supplying backup power to the memory, operating power to the main CPU 63 is reduced. The information may be stored and retained even if the supply of the information is stopped. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated backup power device is provided for the memory, or a configuration in which backup power is supplied to the memory from the power supply/launch control device 78 that supplies backup power to the main side RAM 65. Good too.

(14) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which various parameters are calculated using history information, and the history information is not stored and held, and when a game ball is detected by any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. A configuration may be adopted in which various parameters are calculated and updated each time a new detection is made. In this case, although the frequency of calculation of various parameters becomes high, it becomes possible to extract various parameters at any timing.

(15) The management IC 66 is not limited to a configuration in which the management CPU 112 is provided as a general-purpose CPU and executes storage processing of history information and calculation processing of various parameters based on programs and data stored in the management ROM 113. , a configuration may be adopted in which a hardware circuit designed to have these functions is formed in the management IC 66. Specifically, regarding the configuration, for example, in the first embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a. , the correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored from the correspondence memory 116 to the history memory 117, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. do. Further, for example, in the ninth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a, the hardware circuit receives the signal. The value of the counter corresponding to the buffer is incremented by 1. Furthermore, when a calculation trigger occurs in the first embodiment or the like, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using history information at that time. In addition, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 102 occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters that are calculation results and also outputs history information to the outside.

(16) In addition to or in place of the configuration in which information on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored as historical information, the occurrence of a transition to the opening/closing execution mode may be stored as historical information. Often, the timing of transition to opening/closing execution mode and the timing of termination may be stored as historical information, or the occurrence of transition to high-frequency support mode may be stored as historical information. It may be configured such that the occurrence of the event is stored as history information. Alternatively, the probability of transitioning to opening/closing execution mode may be calculated by using the above-mentioned history information, or the probability of transitioning to high-frequency support mode may be calculated, and the probability of transitioning to high-frequency support mode may be calculated. The configuration may be such that the frequency of occurrence is calculated. A configuration may also be adopted in which the history information and various parameters can be read by a reading device.

(17) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, separate boards, or separate control devices.

(18) In the first embodiment and the like, the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is counted, while the general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, It may be configured such that history information including RTC information is stored regarding the entry of a ball into a bonus opportunity ball entry section, such as the second operation port 34, which is a trigger for the payout of prize balls of game balls and the win/fail judgment process. As a result, it is possible to extract the history of the entry of game balls into the bonus-opportunity ball entry section, and to calculate the frequency of entry of game balls into each bonus-opportunity ball entry section with respect to the total number of game balls discharged. Become.

(19) A configuration may be adopted in which items other than those in each of the above embodiments are included as items to be saved as history information. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the fact that the lower tray 56a is in a full state, the timing at which the full state is started, and the timing at which the full state is canceled is stored as history information. It may be configured such that at least one of the fact that there is no ball state, the timing at which the no ball state is started, and the timing at which the no ball state is canceled is stored as history information, and the dispensing device 76 is in an abnormal state. In particular, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 started and the timing when the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 was released may be stored as history information. In this case, it becomes possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

(20) In the first embodiment and the like, it is set in advance at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the management IC 66 recognizes that the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal by transmitting a type identification command from the main CPU 63. It may also be a configuration. In this case, there is no need to previously set in the management IC 66 the correspondence between each of the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p.

(21) The number of game balls entering a predetermined ball entry section that occurs when the front door frame 14 is in an open state is stored as history information, and the number of entering balls is grasped using the history information. The configuration may be such that the information is externally output to the reading device. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry section in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in an open state, and it becomes possible to grasp the presence or absence of fraud. In addition, the number of balls entering a predetermined ball entry section that occurs when the front door frame 14 is in an open state is calculated when a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, and the calculated number of balls entering is an abnormal number. In such cases, an abnormality notification may be executed. This makes it possible to deal with fraudulent acts in which the front door frame 14 is opened illegally and game balls are entered into a predetermined ball entry section.

(22) The management IC 66 may be configured to send a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when it is operating normally. In this case, it becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

(23) In the first embodiment, etc., the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the checking process for the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o may be reversed from that in the first embodiment, etc. In this case, the order in which the main CPU 63 executes the process of changing the output state of each signal matches the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the confirmation process for each of the buffers 122a to 122o.

(24) When the information stored in the main ROM 64 is output externally using the reading terminal 102, a configuration may be adopted in which one of the program and data can be selectively output externally, and a predetermined program A configuration may also be adopted in which only the data can be output to the outside. In this case, it becomes possible to selectively read the information to be analyzed using the reading device. Note that, as a configuration for selectively outputting information to the outside, the main CPU 63 selects information to be output to the outside from selection information received from the reading device through the reading terminal 102, and outputs the selected information to the outside. is possible.

(25) Other information to be output externally through the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program stored in the main ROM 64 is not limited to history information or various parameters, and for example, when an abnormality occurs. may be configured to store history information of the abnormality occurrence, and output the stored history information to the outside through the reading terminal 102.

(26) Detection sensors 42a to 48a are individually provided for each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, and the detection sensors 42a to 48a Although the configuration is such that the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is grasped by summing the number of game balls detected, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is not limited to this, and for example, all the game balls discharged from the game area PA are determined. A configuration may be adopted in which a passage area through which game balls pass one by one is provided, and a discharge detection sensor is provided to detect game balls passing through the passage area. In this case, by using the detection result of the discharge detection sensor, it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA. In addition, in this configuration, similarly to each of the above embodiments, a detection sensor for detecting the number of game balls entering each of the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34. By providing 42a to 47a, it is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game balls that have entered each ball entry section to the total number of game balls that have been ejected from the game area PA.

(27) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the audio emission control device 81 based on the command sent from the main control device 60, the display control device 82 is controlled based on the command sent from the main control device 60. A configuration may be adopted in which the device 82 controls the audio emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the audio emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be may be integrated into the main control device 60, or both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. Furthermore, the configuration of the commands sent from the main control device 60 to the audio emission control device 81 and the configuration of the commands sent from the audio emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are also arbitrary.

(28) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball that opens a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when a ball is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mahjong ball machine.

In addition, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination is established on the active line that can be seen from the display window, the player is given benefits such as a payout of medals, etc. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body, which is supported by the outer frame in an openable and closable manner, is equipped with a storage section and a retrieval device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are retrieved by the retrieval device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which starts the rotation of the reels by doing so.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, for example, when a game is started based on the operation of a start lever, the results of the lottery processing of the winning combinations executed are recorded as history information. The history information may be used to calculate the actual winning probability of each role, and when a transition to a special game state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information and the history information is stored as history information. The configuration may be such that the actual transition probability to the special gaming state is calculated using the information, or the ratio of the number of games staying in the special gaming state to the total number of games played may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be readable by a reading device, or the gaming machine itself may make notifications corresponding to the calculation results of the various parameters.

(29) The characteristic configurations of the first to nineteenth embodiments may be mutually applied in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the twelfth embodiment may be combined; The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the eighth embodiment may be combined. Furthermore, the characteristic configuration of the sixteenth embodiment described above and the characteristic configuration of the seventeenth embodiment described above may be combined. Further, the characteristic configuration of the eighteenth embodiment described above and the characteristic configuration of the nineteenth embodiment described above may be combined. Further, to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to seventeenth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination, the configurations of the above-mentioned other embodiments may be applied in any combination.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the configurations corresponding to each of the embodiments described above are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. Predetermined ball entry means into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34);
Specific memory execution means (for executing ball entry detection processing in the main CPU 63), which stores information corresponding to the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means in the specific storage means (main RAM 65); function) and
A benefit that executes processing for granting a benefit to a player based on the fact that information corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined ball entry means is stored in the specific storage means. A granting means (a function of executing the process of step S217 in the main side CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step S408 in the payout side CPU 92),
In a gaming machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding thereto is stored in a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the history memory 117 in the tenth embodiment). In the main side RAM 65), predetermined information (the first - Predetermined storage execution means (first - In the ninth, eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112, in the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the history setting process in the main side CPU 63, step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a function of executing the processing of step S2320 and step S2323.

According to feature A1, when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding thereto is stored in the specific storage means, and when the information is stored in the specific storage means, a benefit is granted to the player. be done. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means. In this configuration, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number of game balls entered into the predetermined ball entry means or the frequency of ball entry is stored in the predetermined storage means. Predetermined information that can be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball, and by using this managed information, it is possible to It becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entry means. Further, by storing the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the predetermined information does not trigger execution of a process for awarding a benefit to a player.

According to feature A2, the purpose is to appropriately manage the manner in which game balls enter the prescribed ball entry means by not allowing the predetermined information to trigger execution of processing for granting benefits to players. It becomes possible to store and hold predetermined information in an information form.

Feature A3. Equipped with specific ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter,
The predetermined storage executing means causes the predetermined storage means to store information corresponding to when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means, and prevents the game ball from entering the specific ball entering means. Specific information that allows the number of balls to be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and information on the counter in the ninth to 11th embodiments) The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the measured numerical information) is stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to feature A3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entering means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entering means is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, but also the manner in which the game ball enters the specific ball entering means. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is also possible to manage the ratio of ball entry frequency between the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means.

Feature A4. All ball entry means for discharging entered game balls from the gaming area, including the predetermined ball entry means, are subject to storage in the predetermined storage means of information corresponding to the occurrence of the entry of game balls. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, which is a ball entering means.

According to feature A4, all the ball entry means for ejecting game balls from the gaming area are subject to management using information stored in the predetermined storage means, so that the ball entry frequency for any ball entry means can be controlled. can be managed using information stored in a predetermined storage means. Furthermore, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means to the number of game balls ejected from the gaming area using information stored in the predetermined storage means.

Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the predetermined information includes information corresponding to the timing at which a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

According to feature A5, since the predetermined information includes information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, by using the predetermined information, it is possible to insert the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means. It becomes possible to understand the ball entry history in detail.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the predetermined information is counting information on the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means.

According to feature A6, since the predetermined information is count information of the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means, the manner in which the game balls enter the predetermined ball entry means can be controlled while suppressing the information capacity of the predetermined information. management.

Feature A7. The predetermined storage execution means is a means for storing in the predetermined storage means information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means under a predetermined situation. In the first to seventh embodiments, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S804 and S809, in the eighth embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing step S2104, and in the ninth embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S804 and S809. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S2203 in the side CPU 112.

According to feature A7, it is possible to distinguish whether or not it is a predetermined situation and manage the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

Feature A8. Any of features A1 to A7, characterized in that the game machine is equipped with an external output means (a function of executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device external to the gaming machine. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to feature A8, it is possible to read the information stored in the predetermined storage means from the gaming machine and use the read information to analyze the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

Feature A9. Equipped with a program output means (a function for executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) for outputting a control program to a device external to the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102),
The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the external output unit outputs the information stored in the predetermined storage unit to a device external to the gaming machine using the information output unit.

According to feature A9, it becomes possible to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to the outside by using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature A10. Means (main unit) for specifying which of the information stored in the predetermined storage means and the control program is the information to be outputted from the information output unit, and outputting information corresponding to the identification result. The gaming machine according to feature A9, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S902 in the side CPU 63.

According to feature A10, in the configuration in which the information stored in the predetermined storage means is output to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside, the information to be outputted to the outside is the control program and the predetermined information. Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is outputted to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even in a configuration where the information output section is also used.

Feature A11. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A11, since the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the specific storage execution means has the predetermined storage execution means, the processing load on the first control means is extremely increased. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while preventing this from occurring.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to feature A12, by providing the first control means and the second control means on the same chip, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means. It is possible to prevent this.

Feature A13. Equipped with specific ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter,
The predetermined storage executing means causes the predetermined storage means to store information corresponding thereto when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means, thereby preventing the game from being played to the specific ball entering means. Specific information that allows the number of balls entered or the frequency of balls entered by a control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine (in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, history information, ninth to In the eleventh embodiment, the numerical information measured by the counter is stored in the predetermined storage means,
The first control means includes:
A first transmitting means for transmitting first information to the second control means by using a first signal path when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means (first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63). function to output either) and
A second transmitting means for transmitting second information to the second control means using a second signal path when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means (the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63 function to output either) and
The gaming machine according to feature A11 or A12, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A13, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entering means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entering means is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, but also the manner in which the game ball enters the specific ball entering means. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is also possible to manage the ratio of ball entry frequency between the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means.

Further, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means. Second information is transmitted to the second control means using the second signal path. Thereby, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and it becomes possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information by the second control means.

Feature A14. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting identification information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present, to the second control means using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63, The gaming machine according to feature A13, further comprising a function of outputting either a high-frequency support mode signal or a door open signal.

According to feature A14, it is possible to distinguish whether or not it is a predetermined situation and manage the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means and the manner in which the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. In addition, since the identifying information that makes it possible to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists is transmitted to the second control means using the third path, the second controlling means transmits the identifying information to the first information and the second control means. It becomes possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as 2 information.

Feature A15. The first control means transmits identification information to the second control means indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and that the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means. The gaming machine according to feature A13 or A14, further comprising an identification information transmitting means (a function for executing recognition processing in the main CPU 63).

According to feature A15, identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to a predetermined ball entry means and that the second information corresponds to a specific ball entry means is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Therefore, there is no need to previously store the correspondence between these pieces of information in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to feature A15, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature A16, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. In a situation where a game ball may enter the game ball, it is possible to enable the second control means to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means. Become.

Feature A17. According to feature A15 or A16, the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Game machine.

According to feature A17, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to the above.

Feature A18. When receiving the identification information, the second control means is capable of specifying that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means. Any one of features A15 to A17 is characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing a correspondence setting process in the management CPU 112) for storing correspondence relationship information in a correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116). 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to feature A18, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entering means is stored in the second control means. This provides the second control means with information that enables the second control means to specify the ball entry means corresponding to the information to be transmitted, each time the first control means transmits the first information or the second information. There is no need to do so. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of first information and second information.

Feature A19. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present to the second control means using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63, Equipped with a function that outputs either a high-frequency support mode signal or a door open signal.
Feature A15, characterized in that the second control means is capable of recognizing the third information as information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present, even without receiving the identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of A18 to A18.

According to feature A19, it is possible to distinguish whether or not it is a predetermined situation and manage the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means and the manner in which the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Further, the fact that the third information is information that enables identification of whether or not the predetermined situation is present can be identified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature A20. The second control means, as a receiving section capable of receiving information from the first control means, has a receiver that is capable of receiving information from the first control means, and has a receiver that is capable of receiving information from the first control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A19, characterized in that a large number of receiving units (buffers 122a to 122p) are provided.

According to feature A20, since the second control means is provided with a number of receiving sections greater than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, Even if the number of types of information increases or decreases accordingly, it is possible to cope with this without changing the configuration of the receiving section. Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A21. A first external output means (management) for outputting information on a combination of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means to a device external to the gaming machine. (a function of executing external output processing in the side CPU 112);
A second external output means (management) for outputting information on a combination of the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the specific ball entering means to a device external to the gaming machine. (a function of executing external output processing in the side CPU 112);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A20, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A21, the information stored in the predetermined storage means is read from the gaming machine, and the read information is used to determine how the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means and how the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. It becomes possible to specify the manner in which the ball enters the ball. In addition, when the external output is performed, a combination of predetermined information and information that makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the specified ball entry method is output to the outside, as well as specific information and correspondence to the specific ball entry method. Information in combination with information that makes it possible to recognize what is being done is output to the outside. This makes it possible to specify each ball entry mode using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature A22. Information calculation means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, third 10. In the twelfth embodiment, the management CPU 112 executes steps S1008, S1013, and S1017. In the third embodiment, the management CPU 112 executes steps S1408, S1413, and S1417. In the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management CPU 112, in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management CPU 112, and in the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management CPU 112. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A21, characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of step S2005, in the eleventh embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63. .

According to feature A22, mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball is calculated in the gaming machine using predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible, for example, to perform processing corresponding to the manner in which the game ball enters the game machine itself, or to externally output manner information that is the result of calculations using predetermined information. .

Feature A23. The predetermined storage execution means is a means for storing information in the predetermined storage means (a first - In the seventh embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S804 and step S809 in the management side CPU 112, in the eighth embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S2104 in the management side CPU 112, and in the ninth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2104 on the management side a function of executing the process of step S2203 in the CPU 112),
The information calculation means is a means (first, second, In the sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S1008, S1013, and S1017, and in the third embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing step S1408, A function to execute the process of step S1413 and step S1417, a function to execute the process of step S1602 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, a function to execute the process of step S1802 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, Feature A22 is characterized in that the seventh embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S2005 in the management side CPU 112, and the function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment. The game machine described.

According to feature A23, it is possible to distinguish whether or not it is a predetermined situation and calculate the mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball.

Feature A24. When the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiments) In the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process in step S1019 in the management CPU 112, and in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process in step S1605 in the management CPU 112). Game machine.

According to feature A24, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, thereby making it difficult to cause an event in which the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature A25. Feature A22, characterized in that even if the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used in calculating the aspect information remains stored in the predetermined storage means. Or the gaming machine described in A23.

According to feature A25, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information can be read and the game ball entered. When analyzing a mode, it is possible to refer not only to the mode information but also to predetermined information that is the basis for calculating the mode information.

Feature A26. The information calculation means, when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is stopped, or when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is started, The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A25, characterized in that the mode information is calculated.

According to feature A26, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped, the mode information is calculated on a unit of each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature A27. Features A22 to 32 are characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation trigger occurs that can repeatedly occur in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means having the specific storage execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of A26.

According to feature A27, since the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information can be managed in detail within one business day. becomes possible.

Feature A28. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main side RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period;
The period measuring means stops measuring the period in a situation where a game is not being executed, and when a game is started in a situation where the period measurement is stopped, restarts the measurement of the period from the state before stopping. The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A27.

According to feature A28, since the configuration is such that the aspect information is calculated every time a predetermined period of time elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the aspect information by simply adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped when the game is not being played, and when the game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude a situation where a game is not being played from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it becomes possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in a situation where a game is being executed.

Feature A29. Features A22 to A28 characterized in that the game machine includes an external output means (a function of executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means to a device external to the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature A29, by outputting the mode information to a device external to the gaming machine, it becomes possible to easily grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball.

Feature A30. The gaming machine according to feature A29, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device external to the gaming machine when outputting the aspect information to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature A30, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine, so that when reading the mode information and analyzing the ball landing mode of the game ball, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information can be output. It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for calculating the aspect information.

Feature A31. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
Feature A29 or The gaming machine described in A30.

According to feature A31, in a configuration in which the processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having an external output means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on an instruction from the first control means. It becomes possible to output information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature A32. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information every time a predetermined calculation opportunity occurs,
Result storage execution means (steps S1410, S1414, and S1418 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment) that sequentially stores the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). (in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management CPU 112).

According to feature A32, it becomes possible to accumulate aspect information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out a plurality of types of information at once when managing the game ball entering manner.

Feature A33. The result storage execution means includes:
A means for determining whether the aspect information is storage target information (a function for executing the process of step S1603 in the management CPU 112);
When the aspect information is the storage target information, means for storing the aspect information in the calculation result storage means (a function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management CPU 112);
The gaming machine according to feature A32, comprising:

According to feature A33, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the calculation result storage means. This makes it possible to limit the aspect information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it becomes possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature A34. The game according to feature A32 or A33, wherein the result storage execution means causes the calculation result storage means to store information that makes it possible to specify the time when the aspect information was calculated, in association with the aspect information. Machine.

According to feature A34, information that makes it possible to specify when the mode information was calculated is attached to the mode information. This makes it possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping when each aspect information was calculated.

Feature A35. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
According to any one of features A22 to A34, the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the second control means receives calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. gaming machines.

According to feature A35, in the configuration in which the processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the mode is changed based on the instruction from the first control means. It becomes possible for the information to be calculated by the second control means.

Feature A36. comprising a notification control means (a function for executing the processes of step S2605, step S2607, and step S2608 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification means (notification light emitting unit 151) to notify the content corresponding to the mode information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A35.

According to feature A36, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. This makes it possible for the game hall manager and the like to grasp the management result of the game ball entering manner without having to read the manner information from the gaming machine.

Feature A37. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature A36, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

According to feature A37, it is possible to make it difficult to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature A38. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature A36 or A37, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to feature A38, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having a predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating aspect information and the result of the calculation are provided. It becomes possible to consolidate the functions for executing the notification corresponding to the above in the first control means.

Feature A39. The notification control means controls the notification means so that a first notification is executed when the aspect information is information in a first range, and when the aspect information is information in a second range. The gaming machine according to any one of features A36 to A38, characterized in that the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to feature A39, the aspect information is not reported as it is, but the content corresponding to the range in which the aspect information is included is notified. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it becomes possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature A40. Features A1 to 6 are characterized in that they include means (a function for executing the process of step S218 in the main CPU 63) for externally outputting corresponding information when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means; The gaming machine according to any one of A39.

According to feature A40, in a configuration where when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, corresponding information is outputted to the outside, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, by using the corresponding information, you can easily grasp the number of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means and the frequency of entry, and by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls entering the ball means and the frequency of ball entry.

Feature A41. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A40, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to feature A41, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that for the configuration of features A1 to A41, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, information corresponding to the event is stored in a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main side in the tenth embodiment). RAM 65), the predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to 11th embodiments) is stored in the predetermined information. Predetermined storage execution means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, the main side CPU 63) (a function of executing the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320, and step S2323);
Information calculation means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiments In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management side CPU 112 is described. In the fifth embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S1602 in the management CPU 112, in the seventh embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2005 in the management CPU 112. function, in the eleventh embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B1, when a predetermined event occurs, storage of information corresponding to the event is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, the manner in which predetermined events occur can be appropriately managed. It becomes possible to do so. Furthermore, by storing the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the gaming machine calculates mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. As a result, for example, it becomes possible to perform processing corresponding to the results of a game in a predetermined period on the gaming machine itself, or it is possible to externally output mode information that is the result of calculation using predetermined information. Become.

Feature B2. The predetermined storage execution means is a means for storing in the predetermined storage means information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to seventh embodiments) In the eighth embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S804 and S809, and in the ninth embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing step S2203. functions),
The information calculation means extracts or excludes the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation and calculates the aspect information (first, second, sixth, eighth, In the ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S1008, S1013, and S1017, and in the third embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S1408, S1413, and S1417. In the fourth embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S1602 in the management CPU 112, in the fifth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S1802 in the management CPU 112, and in the seventh embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S1802 in the management CPU 112. The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the process of step S2005 in the side CPU 112, and a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment.

According to feature B2, it is possible to distinguish whether the situation is a predetermined situation or not, and calculate the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period.

Feature B3. When the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiments) In the fourth embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing the process of step S1019, and in the fourth embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing the process of step S1605). Game machine.

According to feature B3, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, thereby making it difficult to cause an event in which the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature B4. Feature B1 characterized in that even if the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is maintained stored in the predetermined storage means. Or the gaming machine described in B2.

According to feature B4, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information can be read out and the game can be played in a predetermined period. When analyzing the results of , it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to the predetermined information on which the aspect information was calculated.

Feature B5. Feature B1 characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of B4 to B4.

According to feature B5, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, the mode information is calculated on a unit of each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature B6. Any one of features B1 to B5, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the aspect information when a calculation trigger that can repeatedly occur occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means (MPU 62). 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to feature B6, since the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information can be managed in detail within one business day. becomes possible.

Feature B7. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main side RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period;
The period measuring means stops measuring the period in a situation where a game is not being executed, and when a game is started in a situation where the period measurement is stopped, restarts the measurement of the period from the state before stopping. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6.

According to feature B7, since the configuration is such that the aspect information is calculated every time a predetermined period of time passes, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the aspect information by simply adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped when the game is not being played, and when the game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude a situation where a game is not being played from the calculation target of the mode information, and it becomes possible to appropriately derive mode information in a situation where a game is being played.

Feature B8. Features B1 to B7 characterized in that the game machine is equipped with an external output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means to a device external to the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature B8, by outputting the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine, it becomes possible to easily grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball.

Feature B9. The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device external to the gaming machine when outputting the mode information to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature B9, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to the device external to the gaming machine, so that when reading the mode information and analyzing the ball landing mode of the game ball, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information can be output. It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for calculating the aspect information.

Feature B10. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
Feature B8 or The gaming machine described in B9.

According to feature B10, in a configuration in which the processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having an external output means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on an instruction from the first control means. It becomes possible to output information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature B11. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time a predetermined calculation opportunity occurs,
Result storage execution means (steps S1410, S1414, and S1418 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment) that sequentially stores the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). (in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management CPU 112).

According to feature B11, it becomes possible to accumulate aspect information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out a plurality of pieces of form information at once when managing the form of game results in a predetermined period.

Feature B12. The result storage execution means includes means for storing the form information in the calculation result storage means when the form information is storage target information (a function for executing the process of step S1604 in the management CPU 112). The gaming machine according to feature B11.

According to feature B12, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the calculation result storage means. This makes it possible to limit the aspect information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it becomes possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature B13. The game according to feature B11 or B12, wherein the result storage execution means causes the calculation result storage means to store information that makes it possible to specify the time when the aspect information was calculated, in association with the aspect information. Machine.

According to feature B13, information that makes it possible to specify the time when the mode information was calculated is attached to the mode information. This makes it possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping when each aspect information was calculated.

Feature B14. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
According to any one of features B1 to B13, the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the second control means receives calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. gaming machines.

According to feature B14, in a configuration in which the processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the mode is changed based on an instruction from the first control means. It becomes possible for the information to be calculated by the second control means.

Feature B15. comprising a notification control means (a function for executing the processes of step S2605, step S2607, and step S2608 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification means (notification light emitting unit 151) to notify the content corresponding to the mode information. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B14.

According to feature B15, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. This makes it possible for a game hall manager or the like to grasp the gaming management results for a predetermined period without reading the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature B16. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature B15, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

According to feature B16, it is possible to make it difficult to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature B17. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the information calculation means and the notification control means;
a second control means (management CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to feature B15 or B16, characterized by comprising:

According to feature B17, in a configuration in which the processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having a predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating aspect information and the result of the calculation are provided. It becomes possible to consolidate the functions for executing the notification corresponding to the above in the first control means.

Feature B18. The notification control means controls the notification means so that a first notification is executed when the aspect information is information in a first range, and when the aspect information is information in a second range. The gaming machine according to any one of features B15 to B17, characterized in that the notifying means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to feature B18, the aspect information is not reported as it is, but the content corresponding to the range in which the aspect information is included is reported. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it becomes possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature B19. Predetermined ball entry means into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34);
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding to the entry is stored in a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the history memory 117 in the tenth embodiment). (in the main side RAM 65), predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to 11th embodiments) Predetermined storage execution means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a function of executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112, in the tenth embodiment) A function of executing the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320 and step S2323 in the main CPU 63),
Information calculation means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, third 10. In the twelfth embodiment, the management CPU 112 executes steps S1008, S1013, and S1017. In the third embodiment, the management CPU 112 executes steps S1408, S1413, and S1417. In the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management CPU 112, in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management CPU 112, and in the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management CPU 112. a function of executing the process of step S2005, a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B19, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, storage processing of information corresponding thereto is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball, and by using this managed information, it is possible to It becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entry means. Furthermore, by storing the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball is calculated in the gaming machine using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible, for example, to perform processing corresponding to the manner in which the game ball enters the game machine itself, or to externally output manner information that is the result of calculations using predetermined information. .

Feature B20. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B19, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to feature B20, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that for the configuration of features B1 to B20, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, information corresponding to the event is stored in a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main side in the tenth embodiment). RAM 65), the predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to 11th embodiments) is stored in the predetermined information. Predetermined storage execution means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, the main side CPU 63) (a function of executing the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320, and step S2323);
Each time a predetermined calculation opportunity occurs, information calculation means (first, second, sixth, eighth , in the ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing steps S1408, S1413, and S1417 in the management CPU 112. In the fourth embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112, in the fifth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S1802 in the management side CPU 112, in the seventh embodiment In the 11th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2005 in the management side CPU 112, and the function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63),
Result storage execution means (steps S1410, S1414, and S1418 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment) that sequentially stores the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). (in the fourth embodiment, a function to execute the process of step S1604 in the management CPU 112),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature C1, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, storage of information corresponding thereto is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. . As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball, and by using this managed information, it is possible to It becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entry means. Furthermore, by storing the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the gaming machine calculates mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. As a result, for example, it becomes possible to perform processing corresponding to the results of a game in a predetermined period on the gaming machine itself, or it is possible to externally output mode information that is the result of calculation using predetermined information. Become.

Further, it becomes possible to accumulate mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out a plurality of pieces of form information at once when managing the form of game results in a predetermined period.

Feature C2. The result storage execution means includes means for storing the form information in the calculation result storage means when the form information is storage target information (a function for executing the process of step S1604 in the management CPU 112). The gaming machine according to feature C1.

According to feature C2, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the calculation result storage means. This makes it possible to limit the aspect information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it becomes possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature C3. The game according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the result storage execution means causes the calculation result storage means to store information that makes it possible to specify the time when the aspect information was calculated, in association with the aspect information. Machine.

According to feature C3, information that makes it possible to specify when the mode information was calculated is attached to the mode information. This makes it possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping when each aspect information was calculated.

Feature C4. The predetermined storage execution means is a means for storing in the predetermined storage means information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to seventh embodiments) In the eighth embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S804 and S809, and in the ninth embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing step S2203. functions),
The information calculation means extracts or excludes the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation and calculates the aspect information (first, second, sixth, eighth, In the ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S1008, S1013, and S1017, and in the third embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S1408, S1413, and S1417. In the fourth embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S1602 in the management CPU 112, in the fifth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S1802 in the management CPU 112, and in the seventh embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S1802 in the management CPU 112. According to any one of features C1 to C3, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the process of step S2005 in the side CPU 112, and in the eleventh embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63. gaming machines.

According to feature C4, it is possible to distinguish whether the situation is a predetermined situation or not, and calculate the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period.

Feature C5. When the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiments) In the fourth embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing the process of step S1019, and in the fourth embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing the process of step S1605). 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to feature C5, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, thereby making it difficult to cause an event in which the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature C6. Feature C1 characterized in that even if the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used in calculating the aspect information remains stored in the predetermined storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of C5 to C5.

According to feature C6, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information can be read out and the game can be played in a predetermined period. When analyzing the results of , it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to the predetermined information on which the aspect information was calculated.

Feature C7. Feature C1, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of C6 to C6.

According to feature C7, the mode information is calculated when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, so the mode information is calculated for each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature C8. Any one of features C1 to C7, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation trigger that can repeatedly occur in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means (MPU 62) occurs. 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to feature C8, the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means, so the mode information can be managed in detail within one business day. becomes possible.

Feature C9. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main side RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period;
The period measuring means stops measuring the period in a situation where a game is not being executed, and when a game is started in a situation where the period measurement is stopped, restarts the measurement of the period from the state before stopping. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8.

According to feature C9, since the configuration is such that the aspect information is calculated every time a predetermined period of time passes, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the aspect information by simply adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped when the game is not being played, and when the game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude a situation where a game is not being played from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it becomes possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in a situation where a game is being executed.

Feature C10. Features C1 to C9 characterized in that the game machine is equipped with an external output means (a function of executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device external to the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature C10, by outputting the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine, it becomes possible to easily grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball.

Feature C11. The gaming machine according to feature C10, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device external to the gaming machine when outputting the mode information to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature C11, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine, so that when reading the mode information and analyzing the ball landing mode of the game ball, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output. It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for calculating the aspect information.

Feature C12. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
Feature C10 or The gaming machine described in C11.

According to feature C12, in a configuration in which the processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having an external output means separately from the first control means, the mode is changed based on an instruction from the first control means. It becomes possible to output information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature C13. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
According to any one of features C1 to C12, the information calculation means calculates the aspect information when the second control means receives calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. gaming machines.

According to feature C13, in a configuration in which the processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the mode is changed based on the instruction from the first control means. It becomes possible for the information to be calculated by the second control means.

Feature C14. comprising a notification control means (a function for executing the processes of step S2605, step S2607, and step S2608 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification means (notification light emitting unit 151) to notify the content corresponding to the mode information. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13.

According to feature C14, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. This makes it possible for a game hall manager or the like to grasp the gaming management results for a predetermined period without reading the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature C15. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature C14, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

According to feature C15, it is possible to make it difficult to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature C16. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature C14 or C15, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to feature C16, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having a predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating aspect information and the result of the calculation are provided. It becomes possible to consolidate the functions for executing the notification corresponding to the above in the first control means.

Feature C17. The notification control means controls the notification means so that a first notification is executed when the aspect information is information in a first range, and when the aspect information is information in a second range. The gaming machine according to any one of features C14 to C16, characterized in that the notifying means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to feature C17, the aspect information is not reported as it is, but the content corresponding to the range in which the aspect information is included is reported. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it becomes possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature C18. Predetermined ball entry means into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34);
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding to the entry is stored in a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the history memory 117 in the tenth embodiment). (in the main side RAM 65), predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to 11th embodiments) Predetermined storage execution means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a function of executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112, in the tenth embodiment) A function of executing the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320 and step S2323 in the main CPU 63),
Information calculating means (first, first and second In the second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management CPU 112, and the step in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment. A function to execute the processes of S1408, S1413, and S1417, a function to execute the process of step S1602 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, and a function to execute the process of step S1802 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment. (in the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2005 in the management side CPU 112, and in the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63),
Result storage execution means (steps S1410, S1414, and S1418 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment) that sequentially stores the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). (in the fourth embodiment, a function to execute the process of step S1604 in the management CPU 112),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature C18, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, storage processing of information corresponding thereto is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball, and by using this managed information, it is possible to It becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entry means. Furthermore, by storing the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball is calculated in the gaming machine using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible, for example, to perform processing corresponding to the manner in which the game ball enters the game machine itself, or to externally output manner information that is the result of calculations using predetermined information. .

Further, it becomes possible to accumulate mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out a plurality of pieces of form information at once when managing the form of game results in a predetermined period.

Feature C19. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C18, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to feature C19, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that for the configuration of features C1 to C19, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, information corresponding to the event is stored in a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main side in the tenth embodiment). RAM 65), the predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to 11th embodiments) is stored in the predetermined information. First storage execution means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112; in the tenth embodiment, the main side a function of executing the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320 and step S2323 in the CPU 63);
When a specific event occurs as a result of a game, the storage of information corresponding to the specific event is executed in the predetermined storage means. A second storage execution means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments) that stores the numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments in the predetermined storage means. A function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112, a function of executing the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320, and step S2323 in the main side CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment) ,
a first external output means (management side CPU 112 function to execute external output processing),
a second external output means (management side CPU 112 function to execute external output processing),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature D1, it is possible to read information stored in the predetermined storage means from the gaming machine, and use the read information to specify the manner in which the predetermined event occurs and the manner in which the specific event occurs. In addition, when the external output is performed, the specified information is outputted externally in such a way that it is possible to recognize that the specified information corresponds to the specified event, and the specified information is outputted externally in a manner that makes it possible to recognize that the specified information corresponds to the specified event. The specific information is outputted to the outside in such a way that it can be recognized. Thereby, even if the second control means does not process the information, it is possible to specify the manner in which each event occurs using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, further comprising means for externally outputting corresponding information when the predetermined event occurs (a function of executing the process of step S218 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature D2, in a configuration in which when a predetermined event occurs, correspondence information corresponding to the predetermined event is outputted to the outside, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, the number of occurrences and frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event can be easily grasped by using the correspondence information, and the number of occurrences and frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event can be accurately determined by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible to understand the

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the predetermined information is information on the number of times the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is information on the number of times the specific event has occurred.

According to feature D3, the predetermined information is count information of the number of times a predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is count information of the number of times a specific event has occurred, thereby suppressing the information capacity of the predetermined information and the specific information. It becomes possible to manage the manner in which a predetermined event occurs and the manner in which a specific event occurs.

Feature D4. Equipped with a program output means (a function for executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) for outputting a control program to a device external to the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102),
Features D1 to 4 are characterized in that the first external output means and the second external output means output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device external to the gaming machine using the information output section. The gaming machine according to any one of D3.

According to feature D4, it becomes possible to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to the outside by using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature D5. Selection means ( The gaming machine according to feature D4, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S902 in the main CPU 63.

According to feature D5, in the configuration in which the information stored in the predetermined storage means is output to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside, the information to be outputted to the outside is the control program and the predetermined information. Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is outputted to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even in a configuration where the information output section is also used.

Feature D6. The selection means determines whether information to be output from the information output section is based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output section, information stored in the predetermined storage means and the control program. The gaming machine according to feature D5, characterized in that it specifies which one of them.

According to feature D6, which information is to be output from the information output section is specified based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output section. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature D7. A chip (MPU 62) having a program storage means (main ROM 64) that stores the control program in advance has the information output section, the first external output means, and the second external output means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D6.

According to feature D7, signal paths for the information output section can be integrated within the chip. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while making it difficult to make unauthorized access to the signal path for the information output unit.

Note that for the configuration of features D1 to D7, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. a program output means (a function for executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device external to the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102);
an information output unit (a function of executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) that outputs special information using the information output unit;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature E1, special information can be output to the outside by using the information output section for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output special information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature E2. Selection means (step S902 in the main CPU 63) that specifies which of the special information and the control program is the information to be output from the information output unit and outputs information corresponding to the specified result. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of (a).

According to feature E2, in a configuration in which special information is externally output using an information output unit for externally outputting a control program, the information to be externally output is either the control program or the special information. The player is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even in a configuration where the information output section is also used.

Feature E3. The selection means determines which of the special information and the control program is the information to be output from the information output unit, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit. The gaming machine according to feature E2, characterized in that:

According to feature E3, which information is to be output from the information output section is specified based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output section. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature E4. Any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that a chip (MPU 62) having a program storage means (main side ROM 64) that stores the control program in advance has the information output section and the information output means. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature E4, it is possible to consolidate signal paths for the information output section within the chip. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while making it difficult to make unauthorized access to the signal path for the information output unit.

Note that for the configuration of features E1 to E4, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Group F>
Feature F1. Comprising a first control means (main CPU 63) and a second control means (management CPU 112),
The first control means includes:
A benefit granting means (a function of executing the process of step S217 in the main side CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step S408 in the payout side CPU 92) for granting a benefit to the player when a predetermined event occurs;
Information transmitting means (a function for executing management output processing in the main CPU 63) for transmitting predetermined event information corresponding to the predetermined event when the predetermined event occurs;
Equipped with
The second control means stores information corresponding to the predetermined event information when it receives the predetermined event information. In the embodiment, the predetermined information (1st to 8th , historical information in the twelfth embodiment, numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means (first to ninth , in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the history setting process in the main side CPU 63. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a function of executing the process of step S2323.

According to feature F1, a bonus is given to the player when a predetermined event occurs. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the predetermined event to occur. In this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, information corresponding to it is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be specified by the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine. The predetermined information will be stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, the manner in which predetermined events occur can be appropriately managed. It becomes possible to do so. Furthermore, by storing the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, since the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the privilege granting means has the predetermined storage execution means, the processing load on the first control means is prevented from increasing excessively. While doing so, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to feature F2, by providing the first control means and the second control means on the same chip, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means. It is possible to prevent this.

Feature F3. The predetermined storage execution means stores the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the specific event in the gaming machine or external to the gaming machine by executing storage processing of information corresponding to the specific event in the predetermined storage unit when the specific event occurs. Specific information that can be specified by the device (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to 11th embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means. so that
The first control means includes:
A first transmitting means for transmitting first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the predetermined event occurs (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )and,
a second transmitting means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits second information to the second control means using a second signal path when the specific event occurs; )and,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature F3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined event but also the specific information corresponding to the specific event is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the manner in which a predetermined event occurs, but also the manner in which a specific event occurs. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is also possible to manage the ratio of occurrence frequency between the predetermined event and the specific event.

Further, when a predetermined event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a specific event occurs, the second information is transmitted using the second signal path. transmitted to the second control means. Thereby, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and it becomes possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information by the second control means.

Feature F4. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting identification information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present, to the second control means using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63, The gaming machine according to feature F3, further comprising a function of outputting either a high-frequency support mode signal or a door open signal.

According to feature F4, it is possible to manage the manner in which a predetermined event occurs and the manner in which a specific event occurs by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. In addition, since the identifying information that makes it possible to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists is transmitted to the second control means using the third path, the second controlling means transmits the identifying information to the first information and the second control means. It becomes possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as 2 information.

Feature F5. The first control means transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and that the second information corresponds to the specific event to the second control means. The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, further comprising a transmitting means (a function for executing recognition processing in the main CPU 63).

According to feature F5, identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to a predetermined event and that the second information corresponds to a specific event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means; There is no need to previously store the correspondence relationship of these pieces of information in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature F6, since the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the predetermined event and the specific event may occur. Under certain circumstances, it becomes possible for the second control means to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entering means.

Feature F7. According to feature F5 or F6, the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Game machine.

According to feature F7, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to the above.

Feature F8. When the second control means receives the identification information, the second control means provides correspondence relationship information that enables it to specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event. according to any one of features F5 to F7, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing a correspondence setting process in the management CPU 112) for storing in a correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116). Game machine.

According to feature F8, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the type of event is stored in the second control means. This provides the second control means with information that enables the second control means to specify the type of event corresponding to the information to be transmitted, each time the first control means transmits the first information or the second information. There is no need to do so. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of first information and second information.

Feature F9. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present to the second control means using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63, Equipped with a function that outputs either a high-frequency support mode signal or a door open signal.
Feature F5, characterized in that the second control means is capable of recognizing the third information as information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present, even without receiving the identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of F8 to F8.

According to feature F9, it is possible to manage the manner in which a predetermined event occurs and the manner in which a specific event occurs by distinguishing whether the situation is a predetermined situation or not. Further, the fact that the third information is information that enables identification of whether or not the predetermined situation is present can be identified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature F10. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to feature F10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that for the configuration of features F1 to F10, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above feature A group, the above feature B group, the above feature C group, the above feature D group, the above feature E group, and the above feature F group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. A first control means (main CPU 63),
a second control means (management side CPU 112) that receives information transmitted from the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means includes:
A first transmitting means that transmits first information to the second control means using a first signal path when a first event occurs (a function of outputting any of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )and,
A second transmitting means that transmits second information to the second control means using a second signal path when a second event occurs (a function of outputting any of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )and,
Identification information transmitting means (main side a function of executing recognition processing in the CPU 63);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature G1, when the first event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the second event occurs, the second signal path is used. Then, the second information is transmitted to the second control means. Thereby, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and it becomes possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information by the second control means.

Furthermore, since identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and that the second information corresponds to the second event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, these information There is no need to store the correspondence relationship in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature G2, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. In a situation where a game ball may enter the game ball, it is possible to enable the second control means to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means. Become.

Feature G3. According to feature G1 or G2, the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Game machine.

According to feature G3, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to the above.

Feature G4. When the second control means receives the identification information, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event. Any one of features G1 to G3 is characterized in that it includes means for storing relational information in a correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) (a function for executing correspondence setting processing in the management CPU 112). The game machine described.

According to feature G4, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entering means is stored in the second control means. This makes it necessary to provide the second control means with information that enables the second control means to identify an event corresponding to the information to be transmitted, each time the first control means transmits the first information or the second information. disappears. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of first information and second information.

Feature G5. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present to the second control means using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63, Equipped with a function that outputs either a high-frequency support mode signal or a door open signal.
Feature G1, characterized in that the second control means is capable of recognizing the third information as information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists, even without receiving the identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of G4 to G4.

According to feature G5, it is possible to manage the manner in which the first event occurs and the manner in which the second event occurs by distinguishing whether the situation is a predetermined situation or not. Further, the fact that the third information is information that enables identification of whether or not the predetermined situation is present can be identified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature G6. As a signal path through which information can be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, a number of signal paths greater than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that a signal path is provided.

According to feature G6, by providing a number of signal paths greater than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, the information can be transmitted depending on the model of the gaming machine. Even if the number of types increases or decreases, this can be handled without changing the configuration regarding the signal path. Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to feature G7, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that for the configuration of features G1 to G7, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to feature group G above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to have a suitable configuration regarding communication, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in a predetermined storage means (normal counter area 171, open/close execution mode counter area 172, and high frequency support mode counter area 173 in the thirteenth embodiment). ) so that predetermined information (numerical information measured by each counter 171a to 171e, 172a to 172e, and 173a to 173e in the thirteenth embodiment) is stored in the predetermined storage means. a predetermined storage execution means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3204 to S3205 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment);
Information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step S3504 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) that derives aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the predetermined information;
Restricting means (executing the processes of steps S3404 to S3407 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) for restricting the progress of the game in a situation where the aspect information is derived by the information deriving means. function, a function of executing the process of step S3809 of the main CPU 63 in the fourteenth embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature H1, when a predetermined event occurs, storage of information corresponding to the event is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, the manner in which predetermined events occur can be appropriately managed. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Furthermore, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the gaming machine derives mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. This makes it possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period, for example.

Further, in a situation where mode information is derived, the progress of the game is restricted. This allows mode information to be derived in a situation different from the situation in which a normal game is played. Therefore, there is no need to parallelize the progress of a normal game and the derivation of mode information, making it possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature H2. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the restriction means restricts execution of at least part of the processing for advancing the game.

According to feature H2, in a situation where aspect information is derived, execution of at least some of the processes for advancing the game is restricted, so that in a situation where aspect information is derived, processing per unit time is restricted. This makes it possible to prevent the number from increasing excessively.

Feature H3. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, wherein the information derivation means derives the mode information after the progress of the game is restricted by the restriction means.

According to feature H3, by deriving the aspect information after the progress of the game is restricted, it becomes possible to derive the aspect information in a situation where the predetermined event does not newly occur as the game progresses.

Feature H4. A firing means (game ball firing mechanism 27) that fires a game ball toward the gaming area;
Predetermined ball entry means into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34);
Equipped with
The predetermined storage execution means stores the information corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined ball entry means in the predetermined storage means when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means as the predetermined event. causing information to be stored in the predetermined storage means;
The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the restricting means restricts the firing of the game ball by the firing means.

According to feature H4, the mode information is derived after the launch of the game ball is restricted, so the mode information is derived in a situation where the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means is restricted, which is the trigger for changing the mode information. It becomes possible to derive

Feature H5. The information derivation means derives the mode information after a predetermined period has elapsed since the restriction means restricts the firing of the game ball by the firing means;
Feature H4 characterized in that the predetermined period is set to be longer than the longest period assumed as the period required for the game ball fired from the ejection means to enter the predetermined ball entry means. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature H5, when the mode information is derived, it is assumed to be the period required from when the game ball launch is restricted until the game ball launched from the launch means enters the predetermined ball entry means. Aspect information is derived after a period longer than the maximum period has elapsed. This makes it possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the game ball does not reliably enter the predetermined ball entry means, which is the trigger for changing the mode information.

Feature H6. The limiting means is for restricting the progress of the game based on the occurrence of the trigger for deriving the modal information, and the trigger for deriving the modal information occurs in a situation where a specific operation is being performed in the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the gaming machine does not restrict the progress of the game even if the game is played.

According to feature H6, in a situation where a specific operation is being performed in the gaming machine, the progress of the game is not restricted even if an opportunity to derive the mode information occurs. This makes it possible to prevent execution of a specific operation from being inhibited by the occurrence of a trigger for deriving aspect information.

Feature H7. The limiting means is characterized in that, when the trigger for deriving the aspect information occurs in a situation where the specific operation is being performed in the gaming machine, the progress of the game is limited after the specific operation is completed. The gaming machine described in feature H6.

According to feature H7, if a trigger for deriving aspect information occurs in a situation where a specific action is being performed in a gaming machine, the progress of the game is restricted after the specific action is completed, so the execution of the specific action is inhibited. It becomes possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in response to the occurrence of an opportunity for deriving the mode information, while preventing the situation from occurring.

Feature H8. A lottery processing execution means (a function of executing the process of step S3003 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes the lottery process when the lottery conditions are satisfied;
Game round control means (thirteenth implementation) that controls the game round execution means (special symbol display section 37a) to perform the game round operation over a predetermined continuous period and to be in a state corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery process. (a function of executing the processing of steps S2808 to S2810 of the main CPU 63 in the configuration);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature H6 or H7, wherein the situation in which the specific operation is performed includes a situation in which the game round operation is performed by the game round execution means.

According to feature H8, in a situation where a game round operation is being performed, the progress of the game is not restricted even if an opportunity for deriving the mode information occurs. This makes it possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while preventing the game play from being interrupted.

Feature H9. Equipped with variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) that can be brought into an open state where game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H6 to H8, wherein the situation in which the specific action is performed includes a situation in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state.

According to feature H9, in a situation where the variable ball entry means is in the open state, the progress of the game is not restricted even if an opportunity to derive the mode information occurs. This makes it possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while not interrupting the open state of the variable ball entry means.

Feature H10. Information storage means (main side RAM 65) in which information necessary for controlling the progress of the game in the control means (main side CPU 63) is written;
Initialization execution means (a function of executing the process of step S3709 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes initialization of the information storage means when an initialization trigger occurs;
When information is set to restrict the progress of the game by the restriction means, means for preventing the initialization execution means from initializing the information storage means (main in the thirteenth embodiment). a function of executing the process of step S3704 of the side CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H9, characterized by comprising:

According to feature H10, when information is set to restrict the progress of the game by the restriction means, initialization of the information storage means in response to the occurrence of an initialization trigger is prevented. As a result, if the progress of the game is restricted in the situation in which mode information is derived, even if an operation that accidentally causes an initialization trigger is performed in an attempt to release the restricted situation, information will be provided in response to the situation. It becomes possible to prevent initialization of the storage means from being executed.

Feature H11. Separate execution means that executes the initialization of the information storage means when another trigger different from the initialization trigger occurs (a function that executes the processing of steps S3706 to S3708 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) Equipped with
Even if the information setting for restricting the progress of the game is performed by the restriction means, the initialization of the information storage means by the separate execution means is performed. The gaming machine according to feature H10.

According to feature H11, even if information is set to restrict the progress of the game by the restriction means, the information storage means is initialized if another opportunity occurs. . Thereby, even if the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where the mode information is derived, it is possible to leave room for the initialization of the information storage means to be executed.

Feature H12. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H11, wherein the state where the progress of the game is restricted by the restriction means is released when a restriction period has elapsed.

According to feature H12, the state where the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where the mode information is derived is canceled when the restriction period has elapsed, so the progress of the game is left in the restricted state. It is possible to prevent the event from occurring.

Feature H13. Equipped with a performance control means (sound and light side CPU 163, display control device 82) that controls the performance execution means (symbol display device 41) so that the performance is executed,
The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H12, wherein the performance control means continues to execute the performance even if the restriction means restricts the progress of the game. .

According to feature H13, even if the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where the aspect information is derived, the performance execution by the performance execution means is continued. As a result, even if a player is playing a game, an opportunity to derive aspect information occurs and the progress of the game is restricted, it is possible to prevent the performance from ending immediately. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused when there is a restriction on the progress of the game.

Feature H14. The performance control means includes a series of performance control means (13th) that controls the performance execution means so that a series of performances (game performance) is executed over a predetermined performance period when a predetermined start opportunity occurs. Equipped with a function to execute the processing of steps S2905 to S2907 of the sound and light side CPU 163 in the embodiment, and a display control device 82),
The series performance control means controls to terminate the series performance even if the predetermined performance period has elapsed when the restriction means restricts the progress of the game in a situation where the series performance is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature H13, characterized in that the gaming machine does not execute.

According to feature H14, when an opportunity to derive mode information occurs in a situation where a series of performances is being executed by the performance execution means and the progress of the game is restricted, a predetermined timing that would normally be an opportunity to end the series of performances occurs. Even if the performance period has elapsed, control for ending the series of performances is not executed. As a result, it is possible to continue a series of effects in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, and even if the progress of the game is limited in the situation where mode information is derived, the performance can be executed. It is possible to make the player think that the game is being continued.

Feature H15. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the restriction means;
A second control means (sound and light side CPU 163, display control device 82) having the effect control means,
Equipped with
The effect control means controls the effect execution means so that a new effect is started when the second control means receives start trigger information from the first control means,
The series of performances control means terminates the series of performances even if the predetermined performance period has elapsed due to the restriction on the progress of the game being performed by the restriction means in the situation where the series of performances is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature H14, characterized in that the situation in which the control for the game is not executed is canceled when the second control means receives the start trigger information from the first control means.

According to feature H15, when a series of performances is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to derive mode information, the first control means starts a new performance in order to start a new performance. It is canceled when the trigger information is sent. As a result, there is no need to send dedicated information from the first control means to the second control means for canceling the state in which such a series of performances continues.

Feature H16. As the series of effects, the effect execution means performs a fluctuating display of symbols, and when the series of effects ends, the image is placed on standby in a standby area, and after the standby display is performed, the image stops. The configuration shown is
The series performance control means is characterized in that when the restriction means restricts the progress of the game in a situation where the series performance is being executed, the standby display continues even if the predetermined performance period has elapsed. The gaming machine according to feature H14 or H15.

According to feature H16, when a series of performances is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to derive mode information, the standby display at the stage before the symbols are stopped and displayed continues when the series of performances is ended. be done. This makes it possible to continue a series of effects in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while allowing the player to recognize the result of stopping the symbols. Further, when the restriction on the progression of the game is lifted and the series of performances is to be ended, it is only necessary to switch from the standby display to the stop display at the timing when the restriction on the progression of the game is lifted. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly and quickly end the series of performances when the restriction on the progress of the game is lifted.

Feature H17. The performance control means causes the execution of the performance to continue in a situation where the restriction means restricts the progress of the game, but provides a notification corresponding to the fact that the restriction is in place. The gaming machine according to any one of features H13 to H16.

According to feature H17, when a series of performances is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to derive aspect information, the corresponding notification is also executed, so that the series of performances becomes longer than expected. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the fact that the game is continuing.

Note that for the configuration of features H1 to H17, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. Effect control means (sound and light side CPU 163, display control device 82) that controls the effect execution means (symbol display device 41) so that the effect is executed;
A restricting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3404 to S3407 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) for causing the progress of the game to be restricted based on the occurrence of a restriction trigger;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the performance control means continues to execute the performance even if the restriction means restricts the progress of the game.

According to feature I1, the progress of the game is restricted based on the occurrence of a restriction trigger, thereby making it possible to appropriately manage the gaming machine. In this case, even if the progress of the game is restricted, the performance execution means continues to perform the performance. As a result, even if a restriction trigger occurs while the player is playing a game and the progress of the game is restricted, it is possible to prevent the performance from ending immediately, and the progress of the game is restricted. It is possible to prevent players from becoming confused when this occurs.

Feature I2. The performance control means includes a series of performance control means (13th) that controls the performance execution means so that a series of performances (game performance) is executed over a predetermined performance period when a predetermined start opportunity occurs. Equipped with a function to execute the processing of steps S2905 to S2907 of the sound and light side CPU 163 in the embodiment, and a display control device 82),
The series performance control means controls to terminate the series performance even if the predetermined performance period has elapsed when the restriction means restricts the progress of the game in a situation where the series performance is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature I1, characterized in that the gaming machine does not execute.

According to feature I2, if a restriction trigger occurs and the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where a series of performances is being executed by the performance execution means, a predetermined performance period that would normally be an opportunity to end the series of performances has elapsed. Even if it does, the control for ending the series of effects will not be executed. As a result, it is possible to continue a series of performances even in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, and even when the progress of the game is restricted, the player can feel that the execution of the performance is continuing. It becomes possible to make people think.

Feature I3. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the restriction means;
A second control means (sound and light side CPU 163, display control device 82) having the effect control means,
Equipped with
The effect control means controls the effect execution means so that a new effect is started when the second control means receives start trigger information from the first control means,
The series of performance control means ends the series of performances even if the predetermined performance period has elapsed due to the restricting means restricting the progress of the game in a situation where the series of performances is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature I2, characterized in that the situation in which the control is not executed is canceled when the second control means receives the start trigger information from the first control means.

According to feature I3, a state in which a series of performances is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted is when start trigger information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means in order to start a new performance. It will be canceled in As a result, there is no need to send dedicated information from the first control means to the second control means for canceling the state in which such a series of performances continues.

Feature I4. As the series of effects, the effect execution means performs a fluctuating display of symbols, and when the series of effects ends, the image is placed on standby in a standby area, and after the standby display is performed, the image stops. The configuration shown is
The series performance control means is characterized in that when the restriction means restricts the progress of the game in a situation where the series performance is being executed, the standby display continues even if the predetermined performance period has elapsed. The gaming machine according to feature I2 or I3.

According to feature I4, when the series of effects is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, the standby display at the stage before the symbols are stopped and displayed is continued when the series of effects is ended. This makes it possible to continue a series of effects in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while allowing the player to recognize the result of stopping the symbols. Further, when the restriction on the progression of the game is lifted and the series of performances is to be ended, it is only necessary to switch from the standby display to the stop display at the timing when the restriction on the progression of the game is lifted. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly and quickly end the series of performances when the restriction on the progress of the game is lifted.

Feature I5. The performance control means causes the execution of the performance to continue in a situation where the restriction means restricts the progress of the game, but provides a notification corresponding to the fact that the restriction is in place. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4.

According to feature I5, when a series of performances is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, a corresponding notification is also executed, so that it is possible to prevent the series of performances from continuing longer than expected. This makes it possible to prevent players from getting confused.

Note that for the configuration of features I1 to I5, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, the storage of information corresponding to the event is executed in the predetermined storage means (advantageous game number counter 344b), so that the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. a predetermined storage execution means (a function for executing the process of step S5001 of the main MPU 342 in the 16th embodiment);
Information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step S5103 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment) for deriving mode information corresponding to the game result in a predetermined period using the predetermined information;
Based on the fact that the aspect information derived by the information derivation means is regulation-compliant information, the restriction means ((steps S5107 to S5113 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment) which restricts the progress of the game function to perform processing), and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature J1, when a predetermined event occurs, storage of information corresponding to the event is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Then, using the predetermined information, mode information corresponding to the gaming results in a predetermined period is derived, and if the derived mode information is regulation-compliant information, restrictions are imposed on the progress of the game. . This makes it possible to impose constraints on the progress of the game according to the manner in which a predetermined event occurs, and to deal with it if the manner in which a predetermined event occurs does not match the manner assumed at the gaming machine design stage. It becomes possible to do so. As described above, it becomes possible to appropriately manage gaming machines.

Feature J2. Feature J1, characterized in that the constraint means applies a constraint that makes it possible to prevent the aspect information from becoming regulation-compliant information, based on the fact that the aspect information is regulation-compliant information. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature J2, even if the aspect information becomes regulation-compliant information, a restriction is imposed to prevent the aspect information from becoming regulation-compliant information. As a result, even if the aspect information is compliant with regulations, it is possible to ensure that the aspect information falls within the range envisioned at the gaming machine design stage.

Feature J3. A state transition means for shifting the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (a function that executes the processing of steps S4906 to S4911 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment);
a predetermined termination means (a function of executing the process of step S5009 of the main side MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment) that terminates the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined termination trigger occurs;
Equipped with
As described in feature J1 or J2, the restriction means terminates the predetermined gaming state even if the predetermined termination trigger has not occurred, based on the fact that the mode information is information compatible with the regulation. gaming machines.

According to feature J3, when the mode information is regulation-compliant information, the predetermined gaming state ends even if the predetermined end opportunity has not occurred. This makes it possible to forcibly terminate a predetermined gaming state depending on the manner in which a predetermined event occurs, and if the manner in which a predetermined event occurs does not match the manner assumed at the design stage of the gaming machine, It becomes possible to impose constraints on the execution mode of the game state.

Feature J4. The gaming machine according to feature J3, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state advantageous to the player.

According to feature J4, if the manner in which the predetermined event occurs does not match the manner assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine, it is possible to impose restrictions on the degree of advantage.

Feature J5. The gaming machine according to feature J3 or J4, wherein the predetermined event is an event that occurs in the predetermined gaming state.

According to feature J5, if the manner in which a predetermined event occurs in a predetermined gaming state does not match the manner assumed at the design stage of the gaming machine, the predetermined gaming state is forcibly terminated. This makes it possible to prevent the execution mode of the predetermined gaming state from remaining deviated from the mode assumed at the design stage of the gaming machine.

Feature J6. The predetermined period is configured to elapse when the number of games played exceeds a predetermined reference number of times,
The gaming machine according to feature J5, wherein the predetermined reference number of times is greater than the number of consecutive games in the predetermined gaming state that can be set when the predetermined gaming state is newly started.

According to feature J6, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the predetermined gaming state is forcibly terminated from occurring in each predetermined gaming state due to the manner in which the predetermined event occurs.

Feature J7. The gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J6, characterized in that a condition for the occurrence of the predetermined end opportunity in the predetermined gaming state is not notified.

According to feature J7, since the conditions for the occurrence of the predetermined termination opportunity in the predetermined gaming state are not notified, the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the predetermined gaming state is forcibly terminated in relation to the manner in which the predetermined event occurs. This makes it possible to avoid giving.

Feature J8. A state transition means for shifting the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (a function that executes the processing of steps S4906 to S4911 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment);
a predetermined termination means (a function of executing the process of step S5009 of the main side MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment) that terminates the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined termination trigger occurs;
Equipped with
Any one of features J1 to J7, wherein the restriction means restricts subsequent transition to the predetermined gaming state based on the fact that the aspect information is information compatible with the restriction. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature J8, when the mode information is information that supports regulation, the occurrence of transition to a predetermined gaming state is regulated. This makes it possible to forcibly prevent a transition to a predetermined gaming state depending on the manner in which a predetermined event occurs, and prevents the occurrence of a predetermined event from occurring in a manner that does not match the manner assumed at the gaming machine design stage. In some cases, it becomes possible to impose constraints on the execution mode of the gaming state.

Feature J9. The gaming machine according to feature J8, wherein the restriction means varies a period during which subsequent transition to the predetermined gaming state is regulated, depending on the mode information.

According to feature J9, the period during which transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted from occurring varies depending on the mode information, so the restriction on transition to the predetermined gaming state is too small regardless of the mode information. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the value from being set excessively.

Feature J10. The state transition means is a transition determination means (of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment) that executes a transition determination process for determining whether to transition to the predetermined gaming state based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger. a function of executing the processing of steps S4903 to S4905),
If the predetermined opportunity occurs in a situation where transition to the predetermined gaming state is regulated by the restriction means, the present gaming machine provides an alternative that provides an alternative benefit instead of executing the transition determination process. The gaming machine according to feature J8 or J9, characterized in that it is equipped with a privilege granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4912 to S4914 of the main side MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment).

According to feature J10, when a predetermined opportunity occurs in a situation where transition to a predetermined gaming state is forcibly prevented due to the relationship with mode information, to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state. Although the transition determination process will not be executed, alternative benefits will be granted. Thereby, when a predetermined opportunity occurs in a situation where transition to a predetermined gaming state is forcibly blocked, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that it was a waste of time.

Feature J11. The alternative benefit granting means determines that the content of the alternative benefit is more advantageous as the number of times the predetermined opportunity occurs in a situation where transition to the predetermined gaming state is regulated by the restriction means. The gaming machine according to feature J10, characterized in that the content of the alternative benefit is made to be more advantageous or more likely to be advantageous.

According to feature J11, even in a situation where transition to a predetermined gaming state is forcibly blocked, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation that the predetermined opportunity will occur.

Feature J12. The gaming machine according to feature J10 or J11, further comprising means for notifying that the alternative benefit has been granted.

According to feature J12, by being informed that an alternative benefit has been granted, the player's desire to continue playing disappears even in a situation where transition to a predetermined gaming state is forcibly prevented. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Feature J13. When the alternative benefit is granted, the transition to the predetermined gaming state becomes more likely to occur after the situation where the restricting means restricts the transition to the predetermined gaming state from occurring is lifted. The gaming machine according to any one of features J10 to J12.

According to feature J13, it is possible to associate the provision of an alternative benefit with the transition to a predetermined gaming state. As a result, even if a predetermined opportunity occurs in a situation where transition to a predetermined gaming state is forcibly prevented, it is possible to make the player expect to transition to a predetermined gaming state in response. .

Feature J14. The gaming machine according to any one of features J8 to J13, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state advantageous to the player.

According to feature J14, if the manner in which the predetermined event occurs does not match the manner assumed at the design stage of the gaming machine, it is possible to impose restrictions on the degree of advantage.

Feature J15. The gaming machine according to any one of features J8 to J14, wherein the predetermined event is an event that occurs in the predetermined gaming state.

According to feature J15, if the manner in which the predetermined event occurs in the predetermined gaming state does not match the manner assumed at the design stage of the gaming machine, the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly blocked. Ru. This makes it possible to prevent the execution mode of the predetermined gaming state from remaining deviated from the mode assumed at the design stage of the gaming machine.

Note that for the configuration of features J1 to J15, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. An opening/closing body (front door 312) provided to be openable and closable;
A predetermined device (main controller 340) provided in a predetermined area exposed when the opening/closing body is opened;
Illumination means (illumination devices 349a, 349b) capable of illuminating at least a portion of the predetermined device by being in an illumination state;
illumination control means (a function of executing illumination processing in the main MPU 342) that adjusts the control state of the illumination means according to the position of the opening/closing body;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature K1, in a configuration in which an opening operation of the opening/closing body is performed when confirming the presence or absence of an abnormality in the predetermined device, an illumination means for illuminating at least a part of the predetermined device is provided. This makes it easier to perform the confirmation. In this case, the control state of the illumination means is adjusted depending on the position of the opening/closing body. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform illumination by the illumination means in a preferable manner depending on the position of the opening/closing body. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately manage gaming machines.

Feature K2. The lighting control means controls the lighting means to be in a non-illumination state when the opening/closing body is closed, and to be in a lighting state based on an opening operation of the opening/closing body. The gaming machine described in feature K1.

According to feature K2, when the opening/closing body is closed, the illumination means is in a non-illumination state. This makes it possible to prevent the illumination means from being in a meaningless illumination state in a situation where the predetermined device is not checked. Further, when the opening/closing body is opened, the illumination means automatically enters the illumination state. Thereby, there is no need to perform a separate operation for setting the illumination means to the illumination state, making it easier to check the predetermined device.

Feature K3. The gaming machine according to feature K1 or K2, wherein the lighting means is provided in the predetermined area.

According to feature K3, by providing the illumination means in the predetermined area, it becomes easier to illuminate the predetermined device with the illumination means in response to the opening operation of the opening/closing body.

Feature K4. The opening/closing body is movable within a predetermined displacement range from a closed position to a maximum open position,
The illumination control means controls the illumination means to enter the illumination state when the opening/closing body is present in a part of the illumination compatible range of the predetermined displacement range, and the opening/closing body is operated to open. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, characterized in that the lighting means is controlled to be in a non-illumination state when the lighting device does not exist in the lighting compatible range.

According to feature K4, the illumination means is not in the illumination state no matter which open position the opening/closing body is placed in, but the illumination means is selectively in the illumination state in some open positions. . As a result, it is possible to set the illumination means to the illumination state only in situations where it is preferable to check the predetermined device, and to set the illumination means to the non-illumination state in situations where it would be difficult to confirm the predetermined device if the illumination means were set to the illumination state. Become.

Feature K5. The lighting compatible range does not include the maximum open position,
The gaming machine according to feature K4, wherein the illumination control means controls the illumination means to enter the non-illumination state when the opening/closing body is in the maximum open position.

According to feature K5, when the opening/closing body is in the maximum open position, the illumination means is in a non-illuminated state. As a result, in a situation where the prescribed device is sufficiently brightly illuminated by the lighting in the game hall, the lighting means is in a non-illuminated state, so that there is no inconvenience such as the illumination by the lighting means making it difficult to confirm the prescribed device. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature K6. According to any one of features K1 to K5, the predetermined device is a control device having a control board (main control board 341) and a transparent box (substrate box 345) that accommodates the control board. The game machine described.

According to feature K6, the control device is illuminated by the illumination means in response to the opening operation of the opening/closing body, making it easier to check the control board and board box of the control device.

Feature K7. The game machine includes a box body (housing 311) that is open toward the front,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the front opening of the box body is closed;
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, wherein the predetermined area exists in the internal space of the box.

According to feature K7, a predetermined device provided inside the box can be illuminated as the opening/closing body is opened.

Note that for the configuration of features K1 to K7, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, information corresponding to the event is stored in a predetermined storage means (in the 18th embodiment, the first cumulative total buffer 363 and the second cumulative total buffer 364; in the 19th embodiment, the first cumulative total buffer 363 and the second cumulative total buffer 364). A predetermined storage execution means (in the main side MPU 342 in the 18th embodiment) that causes predetermined information to be stored in the predetermined storage means by causing the predetermined information to be stored in the predetermined storage means (a function to execute game management processing, in the nineteenth embodiment, a function to execute history setting processing in the management CPU 112);
Information calculation means (in the 18th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S5503 and step S5508 in the main MPU 342, In the 19th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S5804 and step S5807 in the management CPU 112);
Equipped with
The predetermined storage means includes a first storage means (first cumulative buffer 363 in the eighteenth embodiment, first history memory 371 in the nineteenth embodiment) and a second storage means (first history memory 371 in the eighteenth embodiment). At least a second cumulative total buffer 364 (in the nineteenth embodiment, a second history memory 372),
The predetermined storage execution means includes:
When the predetermined event occurs during the first period as the predetermined period, the predetermined information is stored in the first storage means by storing information corresponding to the event in the first storage means. A first predetermined storage execution means (in the 18th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5404, S5409, and S5414 in the main side MPU 342, and in the 19th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S5704 in the management side CPU 112) ) and
When the predetermined event occurs during the second period as the predetermined period, the predetermined information is stored in the second storage means by storing information corresponding to the event in the second storage means. A second predetermined storage execution means (in the 18th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5406, S5411, and S5416 in the main side MPU 342, and in the 19th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S5707 in the management side CPU 112) ) and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that one of the first periods and one of the second periods partially overlap.

According to feature L1, when a predetermined event occurs, storage of information corresponding to the event is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, the manner in which predetermined events occur can be appropriately managed. It becomes possible to do so. Furthermore, by storing the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the gaming machine calculates mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. As a result, for example, it becomes possible to perform processing corresponding to the results of a game in a predetermined period on the gaming machine itself, or it is possible to externally output mode information that is the result of calculation using predetermined information. Become.

Further, the first storage means and the second storage means are provided as the predetermined storage means, and the first storage means is used to manage the first period as a predetermined period, and the second storage means is used to manage the predetermined period. Management is performed in a second period as a period, and one first period and one second period partially overlap. This makes it possible to derive aspect information corresponding to the management results in the first period in the middle of one's second period, and also to derive aspect information corresponding to the management results in the second period in the middle of one's first period. It becomes possible to derive information. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of deriving aspect information while ensuring that the first period and the second period are the periods during which management is performed. Furthermore, the aspect information can be derived while ensuring the first period and the second period as the periods in which management is performed without excessively increasing the storage capacity of each of the first storage means and the second storage means. It becomes possible to increase the frequency.

Feature L2. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the first period and the second period have the same period ending condition.

According to feature L2, even in a configuration in which management is performed using each of the first storage means and the second storage means, it is possible to derive mode information corresponding to a certain period of time.

Feature L3. The first predetermined storage execution means is configured to start a new first period following the first period when one of the first periods ends;
The second predetermined storage execution means starts a new second period following the second period when one second period ends,
The gaming machine according to feature L1 or L2, wherein the difference between the first period and the second period is constant.

According to feature L3, it is possible to derive mode information corresponding to each of the first period and the second period while ensuring a state in which a certain deviation has occurred.

Feature L4. The first predetermined storage execution means is configured to start a new first period following one of the first periods when one of the first periods ends; initializing the first storage means when the aspect information in the first period is calculated by the information calculation means, or setting the order of storage areas to be stored in the first storage means to the first order; death,
The second predetermined storage execution means is configured to start a new second period following one of the second periods when one of the second periods ends; initializing the second storage means when the aspect information in the second period is calculated by the information calculation means, or setting the order of storage areas to be stored in the second storage means to the first order; The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3.

According to feature L4, the first storage means has a sufficient capacity to store the predetermined information corresponding to the first period, and the second storage means has a sufficient capacity to store the predetermined information corresponding to the second period. The available capacity is sufficient. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing the capacities of the first storage means and the second storage means.

Feature L5. When the first period has elapsed, the content corresponding to the aspect information in the first period calculated by the information calculation means is notified, and when the second period has elapsed, the information calculation means It is characterized by comprising a means (in the 18th embodiment, a function of executing management processing in the main MPU 342) for notifying the content corresponding to the calculated aspect information in the second period. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4.

According to feature L5, content corresponding to the aspect information is reported as each of the first period and the second period progresses, thereby notifying the content corresponding to the aspect information in a situation relatively close to the current situation. It becomes possible to do so.

Note that for the configuration of features L1 to L5, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above feature H group, the above feature I group, the above feature J group, the above feature K group, and the above feature L group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

Below, the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature will be shown.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

A reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a plurality of symbols, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after the display is stopped or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and a bonus is given to a player according to the symbols after the stoppage.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 24a... Out port, 31... General winning port, 32... Special electric winning device, 33... First operating port, 34... Second operating port, 41... Symbol display device, 61... Main control board, 62... MPU, 63...Main side CPU, 65...Main side RAM, 82...Display control device, 92...Payout side CPU, 102...Reading terminal, 112...Management side CPU, 116...Memory for correspondence, 131...For calculation results Memory, 151... Notification light emitting unit, 163... Sound/light side CPU, 171... Normal counter area, 171a to 171e... Counter, 172... Counter area for opening/closing execution mode, 172a to 172e... Counter, 173... High frequency support mode counter area, 173a to 173e... counter, 311... housing, 312... front door, 340... main control device, 341... main control board, 342... main side MPU, 344b... advantageous game number counter, 345... board box, 349a, 349b...Illumination device.

Claims (1)

a program output means for outputting a control program to a device external to the gaming machine using the information output section;
information output means for outputting special information using the information output section;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Images